International Institute for the Advancement of Counseling Theory. Books & Videos on Counseling Theory.

We are hardwired to connect with one another, and we connect through our emotions. Our brains, bodies, and minds are inseparable from the emotions that animate them. Normal human development relies on the cultivation of relationships with others to form and nurture the self-regulatory circuits that enable emotion to enrich, rather than enslave, our lives. And just as emotionally traumatic events can tear apart the fabric of family and psyche, the emotions can become powerful catalysts for the transformations that are at the heart of the healing process. In this book, the latest addition to the Norton Series on Interpersonal Neurobiology, leading neuroscientists, developmental psychologists, therapy researchers, and clinicians illuminate how to regulate emotion in a healthy way. A variety of emotions, both positive and negative, are examined in detail, drawing on both research and clinical observations. The role of emotion in bodily regulation, dyadic connection, marital communication, play, well-being, health, creativity, and social engagement is explored. The Healing Power of Emotion offers fresh, exciting, original, and groundbreaking work from the leading figures studying and working with emotion today. Contributors include: Jaak Panksepp, Stephen W. Porges, Colwyn Trevarthen, Ed Tronick, Allan N. Schore, Daniel J. Siegel, Diana Fosha, Pat Ogden, Marion F. Solomon, Susan Johnson, and Dan Hughes.

What are the distinctive theoretical and practical features of acceptance and commitment therapy? Acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) is a modern behaviour therapy that uses acceptance and mindfulness interventions alongside commitment and behaviour change strategies to enhance psychological flexibility. Psychological flexibility refers to the ability to contact the present moment and change or persist in behaviour that serves one's personally chosen values. Divided into two sections, The Distinctive Theoretical Features of ACT and The Distinctive Practical Features of ACT, this book summarises the key features of ACT in 30 concise points and explains how this approach differs from traditional cognitive behaviour therapy. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy provides an excellent guide to ACT. Its straightforward format will appeal to those who are new to the field and provide a handy reference tool for more experienced clinicians.

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques offers a comprehensive, yet concise, overview of the central features of the philosophy, theory, and practical application of ACT. It explains and demonstrates the range of acceptance, mindfulness, and behaviour change strategies that can be used in the service of helping people increase their psychological flexibility and wellbeing. Divided into three main parts, the book covers the 'Head, Hands, and Heart' of the approach, moving from the basics of behavioural psychology, via the key principles of Relational Frame Theory and the Psychological Flexibility model, to a detailed description of how ACT is practiced, providing the reader with a solid grounding from which to develop their delivery of ACT-consistent interventions. It concludes by addressing key decisions to make in practice and how best to attend to the therapeutic process. The authors of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy bring a wealth of experience of using ACT in their own therapy practice and of training and supervising others in developing knowledge and skills in the approach. This book will appeal to practitioners looking to further their theoretical knowledge and hands-on skills and those seeking a useful reference for all aspects of their ACT practice.

Acceptance and commitment therapy, or ACT (pronounced as a word rather than letters), is an emerging psychotherapeutic technique first developed into a complete system in the book Acceptance and Commitment Therapy by Steven Hayes, Kirk Strosahl, and Kelly Wilson. ACT marks what some call a third wave in behavior therapy. To understand what this means, it helps to know that the first wave refers to traditional behavior therapy, which works to replace harmful behaviors with constructive ones through a learning principle called conditioning. Cognitive therapy, the second wave of behavior therapy, seeks to change problem behaviors by changing the thoughts that cause and perpetuate them. In the third wave, behavior therapists have begun to explore traditionally nonclinical treatment techniques like acceptance, mindfulness, cognitive defusion, dialectics, values, spirituality, and relationship development. These therapies reexamine the causes and diagnoses of psychological problems, the treatment goals of psychotherapy, and even the definition of mental illness itself. ACT earns its place in the third wave by reevaluating the traditional assumptions and goals of psychotherapy. The theoretical literature on which ACT is based questions our basic understanding of mental illness. It argues that the static condition of even mentally healthy individuals is one of suffering and struggle, so our grounds for calling one behavior 'normal' and another 'disordered' are murky at best. Instead of focusing on diagnosis and symptom etiology as a foundation for treatment-a traditional approach that implies, at least on some level, that there is something 'wrong' with the client-ACT therapists begin treatment by encouraging the client to accept without judgment the circumstances of his or her life as they are. Then therapists guide clients through a process of identifying a set of core values. The focus of therapy thereafter is making short and long term commitments to act in ways that affirm and further this set of values. Generally, the issue of diagnosing andtreating a specific mental illness is set aside; in therapy, healing comes as a result of living a value-driven life rather than controlling or eradicating a particular set of symptoms. Emerging therapies like ACT are absolutely the most current clinical techniques available to therapists. They are quickly becoming the focus of major clinical conferences, publications, and research. More importantly, these therapies represent an exciting advance in the treatment of mental illness and, therefore, a real opportunity to alleviate suffering and improve people's lives. Not surprisingly, many therapists are eager to include ACT in their practices. ACT is well supported by theoretical publications and clinical research; what it has lacked, until the publication of this book, is a practical guide showing therapists exactly how to put these powerful new techniques to work for their own clients. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for Anxiety Disorders adapts the principles of ACT into practical, step-by-step clinical methods that therapists can easily integrate into their practices. The book focuses on the broad class of anxiety disorders, the most common group of mental illnesses, which includes general anxiety, panic disorder, phobias, obsessive-compulsive disorder, and post-traumatic stress disorder. Written with therapists in mind, this book is easy to navigate, allowing busy professionals to find the information they need when they need it. It includes detailed examples of individual therapy sessions as well as many worksheets and exercises, the very important 'homework' clients do at home to reinforce work they do in the office.

Motivate your BPD clients with values-based treatment! This 16-week ACT protocol will help you get started today. As you know, clients with borderline personality disorder (BPD) and emotion dysregulation often struggle with negative beliefs about themselves--beliefs that can lead to feelings of shame, problems with personal relationships, and dangerous behaviors. And while dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) is the standard treatment for BPD, more and more, acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) has shown promising results when treating BPD clients by helping them focus on their core values and forgiveness. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for Borderline Personality Disorder provides a comprehensive program for delivering ACT to clients with BPD. Using the session-by-session, 16-week protocol in this professional guide, you can help clients work through the main driver behind BPD--experiential avoidance--and gain the psychological flexibility needed to balance their emotions and begin healing. You can use this protocol on its own, or in conjunction with treatment. With this guide, you'll learn to target the fundamental causes of BPD for better treatment outcomes and happier, healthier clients.

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for Christian Clients: A Faith-Based Workbook, Second Edition, is an indispensable companion for mental health professionals and their clients. The new edition includes updated discussions in each chapter and more than twenty-five new and updated exercises. The workbook offers a basic overview of the goals of ACT, including concepts that overlap with Christianity. Chapters devoted to each of the six ACT processes include biblical examples, equivalent concepts from the writings of contemplative Christians, worksheets for clients to better understand and apply the material, and strategies for clients to integrate a Christian worldview with ACT processes. Each chapter also includes several exercises devoted to contemplative practices and other psychospiritual interventions.

New Directions in the Treatment of PTSD Acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) offers a promising, empirically validated approach to the treatment of post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) and other trauma related problems. In this volume, you'll find a complete theoretical and practical guide to making this revolutionary new model work in your practice. After a quick overview of PTSD, the first part of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for the Treatment of Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder and Trauma-Related Problems explains the problem of experiential avoidance as it relates to trauma and explores the verbal nature of post-traumatic stress. You'll learn the importance of mindfulness and acceptance in the ACT model, find out how to structure sessions with your clients, and examine the problem of control. The section concludes by introducing you to the idea of creative hopelessness as the starting point for creating a new, workable life after trauma. The book's second section offers a practical, step-by-step clinical guide to the six core ACT components in chronological order: *Creative hopelessness *The problem of control *Willingness and defusion *Self-as-context *Valued living *Committed action Each chapter explains how to introduce these topics to clients suffering from PTSD, illustrates each with case examples, and offers homework for your clients to use between sessions.

Even if you are not a couples therapist, chances are you have dealt with clients whose problems are based in relationship issues. In order to successfully treat these clients, you must first help them understand what their values are in these relationships, and how their behavior may be undermining their attempts to seek intimacy and connection. Combining elements of acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) and relational frame theory (RFT), ACT and RFT for Relationships presents a unique approach for therapists to help clients develop and experience deeper, more loving relationships. By exploring personal values and expectations, and by addressing central patterns of behaviors, therapists can help their clients establish and maintain intimacy with their partner and gain a greater understanding of their relationship as a whole. ACT is a powerful treatment model that teaches clients to accept their thoughts, identify their core values, and discover how these values are extended to their relationships with others. RFT focuses on behavioral approaches to language and cognition, and can help clients identify their own expectations regarding relationships and how they might communicate these expectations with their loved ones more effectively. This book aims to shed light on the thought processes behind intimate relationships--from the attraction phase to the end of intimacy--from a functional, contextual perspective.

"Clearly written, entertaining, informative, and very clinically focused." --Kirk Strosahl, PhD, cofounder of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy The ACT Approach is the ultimate Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) resource all clinicians need to move their clients and therapy forward. Combining the foundational knowledge of ACT with practical guidance, strategies, and techniques, you can begin to use ACT immediatelywith any client that walks through your door. Highly recommended by other ACT experts, this workbook is filled with unique tools you won't find anywhere else: Reproducible handouts &worksheets Mindfulness scripts Experiential exercises Transcripts from therapy sessions with line by line analysis Includes specific case examples and treatment strategies for: Anxiety Disorders Depression Chronic Pain PTSD OCD Substance Use Borderline Personality Disorder Adults, Children, Couples, Families, and Groups

For the first time ever, three pioneers in the field of acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) present an edited volume that outlines how the core ACT processes can be applied to religious and spiritual care approaches. If you are a clergy leader or pastoral counselor, people struggling with difficult situations or life traumas frequently turn to you for guidance. And while you're passionate about helping, you may be unprepared for counseling people with certain mental health challenges. On the other hand, if you are a psychotherapist, you may need guidance in supporting your client's religious belief system in therapy. In either case, this book presents a powerful road map to help you provide the best care. In this book, you'll find a complete overview of ACT, as well as strategies for integrating ACT and issues related to spirituality. You'll also learn how the core processes of ACT--such as commitment to change and values-based living--can be seamlessly tied into spiritual and religious counseling, no matter your faith or therapeutic background. By teaching you how to fuse conceptual psychological and spiritual principles, this book will provide you with the tools needed to enhance your counseling skill set.

NOTE FROM THE PUBLISHER: Due to the recent illegal counterfeiting of this book, we cannot guarantee book quality when purchased through third-party sellers. Now fully-revised and updated, this second edition of ACT Made Simple includes new information and chapters on self-compassion, flexible perspective taking, working with trauma, and more. Why is it so hard to be happy? Why is life so difficult? Why do humans suffer so much? And what can we realistically do about it? No matter how rewarding your job, as a mental health professional, you may sometimes feel helpless in the face of these questions. You are also well aware of the challenges and frustrations that can present during therapy. If you're looking for ways to optimize your client sessions, consider joining the many thousands of therapists and life coaches worldwide who are learning acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT). With a focus on mindfulness, client values, and a commitment to change, ACT is proven-effective in treating depression, anxiety, stress, addictions, eating disorders, schizophrenia, borderline personality disorder (BPD), and myriad other psychological issues. It's also a revolutionary new way to view the human condition--packed full of exciting new tools, techniques, and strategies for promoting profound behavioral change. A practical primer, ideal for ACT newcomers and experienced ACT professionals alike, ACT Made Simple offers clear explanations of the six ACT processes and a set of real-world tips and solutions for rapidly and effectively implementing them in your practice. This book gives you everything you need to start using ACT with your clients for impressive results. Inside, you'll find: scripts, exercises, metaphors, and worksheets to use with your clients; a session-by-session guide to implementing ACT; transcripts from therapy sessions; guidance for creating your own therapeutic techniques and exercises; and practical tips to overcome "therapy roadblocks." This book aims to take the complex theory and practice of ACT and make it accessible and enjoyable for therapists and clients.

Copublished with Context Press This collection of transcripts, organized and annotated by Michael P. Twohig and acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) founder Steven C. Hayes, guides you through ACT-based therapy processes session-by-session. The transcripts featured in ACT Verbatim present common situations that arise in clinical practice, while the commentary explains how to identify the six target ACT processes and help clients work through them to achieve psychological flexibility. For the most detailed view of ACT therapy, the clinical transcripts included here follow the development of one client struggling with anger, anxiety, and depression. Since ACT is process- rather than technique-oriented, this kind of in the moment analysis is a singularly effective way to learn to apply this therapeutic model. These transcripts will help you: *Identify client indicators that suggest you should target a specific process in therapy *Create useful exercises to foster client development in the core processes of ACT *Evaluate client advancement and structure sessions for maximum progress *Learn the different styles other therapists use to implement ACT in their own ways

Traumatic experiences leave a "living legacy" of effects that often persist for years and decades after the events are over. Historically, it has always been assumed that re-telling the story of what happened would resolve these effects. However, survivors report a different experience: Telling and re-telling the story of what happened to them often reactivates their trauma responses, overwhelming them rather than resolving the trauma. To transform traumatic experiences, survivors need to understand their symptoms and reactions as normal responses to abnormal events. They need ways to work with the symptoms that intrude on their daily activities, preventing a life beyond trauma. Dr. Janina Fisher, international expert on trauma, has spent over 40 years working with survivors, helping them to navigate the healing journey. In Transforming the Living Legacy of Trauma, she shows how the legacy of symptoms helped them survive and offers: - Step-by-step strategies that can be used on their own or in collaboration with a therapist - Simple diagrams that make sense of the confusing feelings and physical reactions survivors experience - Worksheets to practice the skills that bring relief and ultimately healing

Traumatic experiences leave a "living legacy" of effects that often persist for years and decades after the events are over. Historically, it has always been assumed that re-telling the story of what happened would resolve these effects. However, survivors report a different experience: Telling and re-telling the story of what happened to them often reactivates their trauma responses, overwhelming them rather than resolving the trauma. To transform traumatic experiences, survivors need to understand their symptoms and reactions as normal responses to abnormal events. They need ways to work with the symptoms that intrude on their daily activities, preventing a life beyond trauma. Dr. Janina Fisher, international expert on trauma, has spent over 40 years working with survivors, helping them to navigate the healing journey. In Transforming the Living Legacy of Trauma, she shows how the legacy of symptoms helped them survive and offers: - Step-by-step strategies that can be used on their own or in collaboration with a therapist - Simple diagrams that make sense of the confusing feelings and physical reactions survivors experience - Worksheets to practice the skills that bring relief and ultimately healing

Conquer your self-defeating beliefs and create a more fulfilling life! Do you feel like you're broken? Are you depressed because you believe that you're somehow defective, unwanted, or inferior? Do you feel self-conscious and insecure, constantly comparing yourself to others? Are you sensitive to criticism, or terrified of rejection? Feeling flawed and inadequate often stems from negative childhood experiences. If you grew up in a highly critical environment, you might feel unworthy of being loved, or have a deep sense of shame about your perceived defects. You may tell yourself there is something inherently wrong with you that prevents you from forming satisfying relationships, finding happiness, and succeeding in life. So, how can free yourself from the self-defeating beliefs that keep you trapped in the depths of depression? Grounded in evidence-based acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT), this workbook will give you the tools to identify and dismiss your core beliefs of personal defectiveness, and build a life based on positive choices and values that bring vitality and a sense of personal fulfillment. You'll discover ways to develop psychological flexibility, freeing yourself from old habits and unhealthy coping mechanisms, and alleviating symptoms of depression. Finally, you'll learn to see yourself in all your wonderful complexity, with kindness and compassion. The truth is you are not broken, and painful memories of the past do not have to dictate your future. If you're ready to heal and treat yourself to the care and compassion you deserve, this book will show you how.

Valuing is central to acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT), yet few therapists truly understand how to engage clients in this complex process. Questions such asWhat is the purpose of my life? andHow do I make decisions? are difficult to answer honestly for ourselves, let alone share with another person.The Art and Science of Valuing in Psychotherapy is the mental health practitioner's complete guide to helping clients identify their values and apply them to their lives in practical ways. You will also learn to establish your own values as a professional, which may shift from client to client, and act in accordance with these values in therapy. The book provides you with practical tools for conducting values work, including easy-to-understand metaphors, defusion exercises, guided imagery exercises, scripts for role play, client worksheets, assessment quizzes, and more. Once you've mastered the art and science of valuing, you'll find out just how broad the applications for values work can be for conceptualization and interventions in the workplace, in organizations, and on the community level, and discover how effective values work can be for tapping into your clients' capacity for change. [The Art and Science of Valuing in Psychotherapy] will illuminate how a focus on values can inform every aspect of psychotherapy, from case conceptualization to the therapeutic relationship. At once accessible and profound... highly recommended. -Steven C. Hayes, Ph.D., University of Nevada Foundation Professor of Psychology at the University of Nevada, Reno

Interest in acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) is expanding rapidly. Many of those who are interested in ACT are trained using a mechanistic cognitive behavioral therapy model (or MCBT). Utilizing both ACT and MCBT together can be difficult, because the approaches make different philosophical assumptions and have different theoretical models. The core purpose of the book is to help provide a bridge between ACT and MCBT. The emphasis of this book will be applied psychology, but it will also have important theoretical implications. The book will highlight where ACT and MCBT differ in their predictions, and will suggest directions for future research. It will be grounded in current research and will make clear to the reader what is known and what has yet to be tested. The core theme of A CBT-Practitioner's Guide to ACT is that ACT and CBT can be unified if they share the same philosophical underpinnings (functional contextualism) and theoretical orientation (relational frame theory, or RFT). Thus, from a CBT practitioner's perspective, the mechanistic philosophical core of MCBT can be dropped, and the mechanistic information processing theory of CBT can be held lightly and ignored in contexts where it is not useful. From an ACT practitioner's perspective, the decades of CBT research on cognitive schema and dysfunctional beliefs provides useful information about how clients might be cognitively fused and how this fusion might be undermined. The core premise of the book is that CBT and ACT can be beneficially integrated, provided both are approached from a similar philosophical and theoretical framework. The authors acknowledge that practitioners often have little interest in extended discussions of philosophy and theory. Thus, their discussion of functional contextualism and RFT is grounded clearly in clinical practice. They talk about what functional contextualism means for the practitioner in the room, with a particular client. They describe how RFT can help the practitioner to understand the barriers to effective client action.

Get ready to take a different perspective on your problems and your life--and the way you live it. Acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) is a new, scientifically based psychotherapy that takes a fresh look at why we suffer and even what it means to be mentally healthy. What if pain were a normal, unavoidable part of the human condition, but avoiding or trying to control painful experience were the cause of suffering and long-term problems that can devastate your quality of life? The ACT process hinges on this distinction between pain and suffering. As you work through this book, you'll learn to let go of your struggle against pain, assess your values, and then commit to acting in ways that further those values. ACT is not about fighting your pain; it's about developing a willingness to embrace every experience life has to offer. It's not about resisting your emotions; it's about feeling them completely and yet not turning your choices over to them. ACT offers you a path out of suffering by helping you choose to live your life based on what matters to you most. If you're struggling with anxiety, depression, or problem anger, this book can help--clinical trials suggest that ACT is very effective for a whole range of psychological problems. But this is more than a self-help book for a specific complaint--it is a revolutionary approach to living a richer and more rewarding life. Learn why the very nature of human language can cause suffering Escape the trap of avoidance Foster willingness to accept painful experience Practice mindfulness skills to achieve presence in the moment Discover the things you really value most Commit to living a vital, meaningful life This book has been awarded The Association for Behavioral and Cognitive Therapies Self-Help Seal of Merit -- an award bestowed on outstanding self-help books that are consistent with cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) principles and that incorporate scientifically tested strategies for overcoming mental health difficulties. Used alone or in conjunction with therapy, our books offer powerful tools readers can use to jump-start changes in their lives.

In The Heart of ACT, renowned acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) trainer Robyn Walser explores ACT as a process-based therapy incorporating interpersonal, intrapersonal, and overarching and ongoing processes, as well as the integration of six core components of psychological flexibility to connect clinicians to the dynamic and relational implementation of ACT. Engaging clinical scenarios, therapeutic insights, and supervision dialogues are offered to help clinicians move beyond their conceptual understanding of ACT principles to master the nuances of the therapeutic relationship at the heart of ACT. Using the tips and strategies in this professional guide, you'll develop a flexible, grounded, and client-centered practice. With this comprehensive resource, you'll learn to cultivate an organic, process-driven practice, grounded in the heart of the therapeutic relationship and responsive to clients in the moment. The Heart of ACT is designed to mimic the supervision experience by presenting material in thought-provoking chapters grounded in real-life clinical situations and challenges. In the book, you'll also find supervision dialogues inspired by Walser's work with her supervisees, Carlton Coulter and Manuela O'Connell. Carlton and Manuela comment and ask questions related to the material in the book and their own ACT learning process. These are then addressed by Walser in a dialogue designed to assist clinicians in connecting to the material. These sections mimic the helpful mentoring process of one-on-one training and supervision, and offer insights into specific therapeutic challenges that can unfold in structured conversation. As the applications of ACT grow, so does the need for up-to-date professional resources. Unlike many advanced ACT books that focus on procedures and techniques, The Heart of ACT focuses on the heart of the therapeutic relationship, as well as the "soft skills" that are difficult to describe, but which often mark the difference between a merely good clinician and an excellent one. If you're looking to take your ACT delivery to a new, exciting level, this book is a must-have addition to your professional library.

Acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) is among the most remarkable developments in contemporary psychotherapy. This second edition of the pioneering ACT skills-training manual for clinicians provides a comprehensive update--essential for both experienced practitioners and those new to using ACT and its applications. ACT is a proven-effective treatment for numerous mental health issues, including depression, anxiety, stress, addictions, eating disorders, schizophrenia, borderline personality disorder, and more. With important revisions based on new developments in contextual behavioral science, Learning ACT, Second Edition includes up-to-date exercises and references, as well as material on traditional, evidence-based behavioral techniques for use within the ACT framework. In this fully revised and updated edition of Learning ACT, you'll find workbook-format exercises to help you understand and take advantage of ACT's unique six process model--both as a tool for diagnosis and case conceptualization, and as a basis for structuring treatments for clients. You'll also find up-to-the-minute information on process coaching, new experiential exercises, an increased focus on functional analysis, and downloadable extras that include role-played examples of the core ACT processes in action. By practicing the exercises in this workbook, you'll learn how this powerful modality can improve clients' psychological flexibility and help them to live better lives. Whether you're a clinician looking for in-depth training and better treatment outcomes for individual clients, a student seeking a better understanding of this powerful modality, or anyone interested in contextual behavioral science, this second edition provides a comprehensive revision to an important ACT resource.

For many clients, group therapy is a more practical treatment option than one-on-one therapy sessions. The financial cost of group therapy is substantially less than individual therapy, and research shows it can be just as effective. However, group therapy also presents unique challenges, and is often more difficult to administer. That's why professionals need a solid plan of action when using group therapy to treat clients. In recent years, acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) has gained immense popularity. Based in values, mindfulness, and committed action, this therapeutic model has proven successful in treating a number of psychiatric disorders, including anxiety, depression, stress, addictions, eating disorders, trauma, and relationship problems. However, despite the popularity of this modality, there are very limited resources available when it comes to applying ACT in a group setting. Learning ACT for Group Treatment is a comprehensive, powerful manual for clinicians, therapists, and counselors looking to implement ACT in group therapy with clients. A composite of stand-alone sessions, the book provides detailed explanations of each of the core ACT processes, printable worksheets, tips on group session formatting, and a wide range of activities that foster willingness, cooperation, and connection among participants. In the book, professionals will see how the benefits of ACT can actually be enhanced in a group setting, particularly because there are more participants for ACT exercises. This leads to increased accountability among clients, and allows them to play both an active role and the role of the observer during treatment. The book also includes concrete tips for applying ACT to a number of treatment scenarios, including inpatient group therapy, partial hospitalization programs, outpatient programs, and community self-help groups. With detailed exercises and group activities, this book has everything therapists need to start using ACT in group settings right away.

The traditional practice of psychiatry has been focused on reducing or eliminating distressing, unwanted symptoms. But what if the key to health and well-being is not to be symptom free, but rather to function effectively in life even when symptoms are present? What if symptoms serve an adaptive and motivational function, rather than being signals of a latent illness? What if the key to personal health is the ability to accept symptoms for what they are and to do what matters in life at the same time? This is the underlying proposition of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT), and this book--a collaboration among six clinicians from diverse practice backgrounds--is the first to systematically describe the principles and practices of ACT as they apply to psychiatric assessment, case analysis, and treatment. The guide begins with an in-depth analysis of the ACT model, from its scientific origins in the study of the functions of human language to a fully elaborated model for clinical assessment and intervention and outlines the clinical benefits of ACT in everyday practice. The second section of the book shows the reader how to conduct a streamlined assessment of the patient's life context, how to detect and intervene with the patient's unworkable emotional and behavioral avoidance strategies, and how to blend the use of medication treatment and behavioral interventions in a way that augments the beneficial effects of both approaches. Chapter-length examples in the third section discuss how to deliver ACT in an ambulatory psychiatric setting, in a hospital consultation-liaison service, and in an inpatient psychiatric context. The section also includes a chapter examining the all-important issue of teaching ACT to psychiatric residents as well as affiliated health professionals working in medical or psychiatric treatment team contexts. Learning Acceptance and Commitment Therapy uses a diverse array of case examples and clinical dialogues to offer readers a real-life view of the methodology in practice. Each chapter also includes additional reading resources to pursue should a particular theoretical or applied clinical concept create a desire to learn more. Additionally, readers have unlimited access to an online instructional library that includes video demonstrations of core ACT clinical strategies "in action" as well as a host of written practice support tools and worksheets. This book is a must for clinicians who want to expand their ability to improve clinical outcomes for the wide range of patients seen in clinical practice.

This user-friendly workbook provides adults with obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD), the tools they need to move beyond their disorder using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) and it also serves as compact text for clinicians/practitioners to use with clients suffering from OCD at any point in treatment. The workbook offers readers hands-on ACT and Exposure Response Prevention (ERP) skills for taming disturbing obsessions and filling the gap of where one stands and where one wants to go. Dr. Zurita provides evidence-based exercises to guide adults through the process of ACT. This includes learning to step back from one's thoughts and memories, opening up to all types of unwanted thoughts and feelings, paying attention to the physical world, observing one's thoughts and feelings, getting rid of barriers to values-based living, and developing consistent patterns of values-based behavior. Written from the office of a full-time therapist in a simple, uncomplicated, and unpretentious manner, this workbook will be useful for all clients suffering from OCD and for the therapists who work with them.

What if depression could lead to positive change? Written by acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) cofounder Kirk Strosahl and Patricia Robinson, this revised edition of the best-selling classic, The Mindfulness and Acceptance Workbook for Depression includes updated research on self-compassion, mindfulness, and neuroscience to help you live a more meaningful life. If you suffer from depression, you may feel like you are living under a perpetual raincloud, even when it's sunny outside. If left untreated, clinical depression can damage relationships, cause problems at work, lead to substance abuse, and even make it more difficult to overcome physical illnesses. You may feel too tired and scared to reach out for help, or you may try to avoid your feelings altogether. But you should know that there are little, effective ways you can overcome your depression, one day at a time. This fully revised and updated second edition of The Mindfulness and Acceptance Workbook for Depression will show you how changing daily behaviors and practicing new mindfulness skills can literally reshape your brain. Rather than fruitlessly trying to avoid your depression, you'll learn to focus on living a productive life by accepting your feelings. There are hundreds of books that will try to help you overcome or put an end to depression. But what if you could use your depression to change your life for the better? Your symptoms may be signals that something in your life needs to change. Learning to understand and interpret these signals is much more important than ignoring or avoiding them--approaches that only make the situation worse. This workbook uses techniques from acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) to offer a new treatment plan for depression that will help accept your feelings instead of fruitlessly trying to avoid them. This new edition will include skills based on new research and contributions from mindfulness, self-compassion, and neuroscience. Using the skills outlined in this book, you'll be able to work through your depression, experience greater peace and well-being, and go on to create a better life.

You are more than you think. With this evidence-based guide, you'll learn to break free from the self-critical stories you've created about yourself, and develop the self-compassion and self-acceptance you need to reach your full potential. We all have stories we've created about ourselves--some of them positive and some of them negative. If you suffer from low self-esteem, your story may include these types of narratives: "I'm a failure," "I'll never be able to do that," or "If only I were smarter or more attractive, I could be happy."  Ironically, at the end of the day, these narratives are your biggest roadblocks to achieving happiness and living the life you deserve. So, how can you break free from these stories--once and for all? Grounded in evidence-based acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT), this workbook offers a step-by-step program to help you break free from self-doubt, learn to accept yourself and your faults, identify and cultivate your strengths, and reach your full potential. You'll also discover ways to take action and move toward the life you truly want, even when these actions trigger self-doubt. Finally, you'll learn to see yourself in all your complexity, with kindness and compassion.

The ancient wisdom of yoga meets the evidence-based effectiveness of acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) in this breakthrough professional guide for both yoga instructors and ACT clinicians. Mindful yoga-based acceptance and commitment therapy (MYACT) is a holistic mind-body program that integrates psychology, yoga, and behavior change. In Mindful Yoga-Based Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, a psychologist, social worker, and yoga instructor team up to offer comprehensive training in MYACT. Using the holistic therapy outlined in this manual, clinicians and yoga instructors alike will discover ways to guide clients toward emotional balance and wellness, with the perspective that healing suffering requires treating both the body and the mind. This unique book offers proven-effective interventions informed by the model of psychological flexibility--the foundational underpinning of modern third-wave cognitive behavioral therapies. Mental health professionals who are interested in yoga, mindfulness, and holistic approaches to health will rejoice in this evidence-based program, while yoga instructors who wish to incorporate well-researched health care interventions into their yoga practice and teaching will also celebrate this much-needed resource. Whether you are new to yoga or ACT or both, or have a long history with either, this book will provide you with the tools and foundational understanding needed to bring this practice into the scope of yours. 

This book is the most practical clinical guide on Acceptance and Commit­ ment Therapy (ACT said as one word, not as initials) yet available. It is designed to show how the ACT model and techniques apply to various disorders, settings, and delivery options. The authors of these chapters are experts in applying ACT in these various areas, and it is intriguing how the same core principles of ACT are given a nip here and a tuck there to fit it to so many issues. The purpose of this book, in part, is to emboldened researchers and clinicians to begin to apply ACT wherever it seems to fit. The chapters in the book demonstrate that ACT may be a useful treat­ ment approach for a very wide range of clinical problems. Already there are controlled data in many of these areas, and soon that database will be much larger. The theory underlying ACT (Relational Frame Theory or "RFT"-and yes, here you say the initials) makes a powerful claim: psy­ chopathology is, to a significant degree, built into human language. Fur­ ther, it suggests ways to diminish destructive language-based functions and ways of augmenting helpful ones. To the extent that this model is cor­ rect, ACT should apply to a very wide variety of behavioral issues because of the centrality of language and cognition in human functioning.

For more than three years, British psychologist David Chantry followed the daily activity on the acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) Listserve, recognizing that he was witnessing one of the most innovative and excitiing discussions in the field of contemporary psychotherapy. In this book, he has collected many of his observation of this nascent period, a selection of proposals, arguments, and elucidations from many of leaders in this area, including Steven Hayes, Kelly Wilson and other leading figures in the world ACT community. Having started life as a personal archive, the collection contains discussions on the main principles of ACT, its application to particular presenting problems, ACT resources (e.g., new metaphors and exercises), and clinical issues. Also included are postings describing the theoretical, scientific and philosophical roots of ACT, discussing new research findings, and comparing and contrasting ACT with other therapeutic approaches

Adlerian Counseling and Psychotherapy, now in its sixth edition, places a fresh emphasis on wellness both in concept and in practice. Written with the practitioner in mind, this text provides a definitive overview of the theory and practice of individual psychology based on the work of both Alfred Adler and Rudolf Dreikurs. The sixth edition retains the clarity, focus, and practicality of the previous editions and incorporates research, methods, and techniques to illustrate the usefulness of the Adlerian approach with children, adolescents, and adults of all ages in settings with individuals, groups, and couples. Parent education, career counseling, lifestyle assessment and counseling, and clinical diagnosis and psychotherapy are all discussed, as are applications for working with clients of different cultural and ethnic backgrounds and gender orientations. Neuroscience concepts and methods are described in case examples that illustrate their effectiveness across the lifespan. Readers will also find clinical examples from lifestyle assessment and family counseling meetings, as well as tables and figures that augment the activities and review questions included with each chapter. across the lifespan. Readers will also find clinical examples from lifestyle assessment and family counseling meetings, as well as tables and figures that augment the activities and review questions included with each chapter.

Adlerian Therapy: Theory and Practice introduces the reader to Alfred Adler's seminal approach to psychotherapy. Starting from the principle that human behavior is goal oriented and socially embedded, Adlerian therapy is a brief psychoeducational approach that emphasizes understanding individuals' characteristic ways of moving through life - the life style - before working toward change. The authors demonstrate the relevance of Adlerian therapy today by illustrating how Adler's ideas have influenced current practice and emphasizing the short-term nature of its interventions. In addition, the authors show how Adlerian therapy works in practice with individuals, couples, families, and groups, as well as in educational settings. This book is for practitioners of all orientations who want to ground their practices in a holistic theory that makes sense for today's world. Students will also benefit from learning about Adler's theory and flexible strategies.

First published in 1989. The purpose of this book has been to present the basic principles of Adler's psychology in a form easily understood by students of psychology as well as a wider population interested in psychology.

Couples counseling is distinct from individual and family therapy and, while ideas from these other formats may be overlapping, applying theoretical concepts to couples has distinctive challenges. Behavioral, Humanistic-Existential, and Psychodynamic Approaches to Couples Counseling is unique in that it addresses how to conceptualize various theories around a single case. By discussing only one case, the reader is more readily able to compare and contrast the theoretical ideas of each theory, as well as the pragmatics of techniques. Five theories are discussed around four consistent parts: history, theory of problem formation, theory of problem resolution, and case transcript.

Originally published in 1929 the individual psychological interpretation of this autobiography was first presented by Alfred Adler to a group of psychiatrists and pedagogues in Vienna. The story of the development of a neurosis is told in this book. A young girl relates the fascinating story of her unhappy life, the psychologist comments on her remarks and leads the reader to an understanding of the blunders and mistakes which have made her life so full of suffering. Publication of this book in its day was intended to bring the growing interest in Adler's Individual Psychology to a wider audience. Today it can be read and enjoyed in its historical context.

As presented here, Adler’s emphasis on the equality of the sexes and his innovative concept of the “masculine protest” provides the basis of present-day considerations of the dynamics of sexuality, love and marriage. Co-operation Between the Sexes remains in many ways a modern work by a writer whom Gordon Allport called “one of the wisest psychologists of this century.”
In this volume, a major psychoanalytic thinker presents a theory of personality through his explorations of one of humankind’s most basic attributes: sexuality. In addition, these writings reflect Adler’s theoretical dissatisfaction with what he felt were the deterministic beliefs of Sigmund Freud. And having presented them, he precipitated one of the most dramatic schisms in psychoanalytic psychology.

A new translation of Alfred Adler's seminal classic on psychopathology.

New translations of Alfred Adler's early (1898-1909) journal articles and his classic work (1907) on organ inferiority.

New translations of Alfred Adler's journal articles, orignally published 1914-1920.

This new edition of Couples Therapy tackles four challenges currently facing the field: (1) accountability and the increasing demands for demonstrating effectiveness as a condition for reimbursement, (2) the need for practitioners to reconfigure their practice patterns in an ever-involving health-care system, (3) training mental health practitioners who have not completed marital and family therapy (MFT) programs, and (4) integrating new couples approaches and interventions into everyday clinical practice. The book offers a focused vision and successful strategies for working effectively with couples, both today and tomorrow. It incorporates the best insights from the neurosciences as well as new couples theories, research, and evidence-based interventions, introducing approaches including psychoanalytic, systemic, cognitive behavioral, Adlerian, constructivist, third wave, integrative, and mindfulness-based. 　Chapters also present practical applications and professional considerations, with a comprehensive look at how to work with diverse issues in couples therapy, such as substance abuse, domestic violence, sexual dysfunction, infidelity, aging, and much more. This third edition of Couples Therapy is an essential resource for students as well as mental health practitioners, social workers, and family counselors who are keen to better meet the needs of couples and the demands of the changing healthcare landscape.

This book reviews the extensive literature on early recollections and organizes various interpretive systems of evaluating early memories. The practitioner will find specific and detailed guidelines for administering and interpreting early recollections to help integrate these memories into counseling and psychotherapy. Following a carefully articulated contextual approach to early recollections, which synthesizes three perspectives - subjective, interpersonal and objective - come suggestions for using early recollections in the counseling process and a full-length case study to explicate the model and demonstrate the utility of using this approach.

Originally published in 1930, this title looks at the education of children. Adler believes the problems from a psychological point of view are the same as for adults, that of self-knowledge and rational self-direction. However, the difference being that due to the 'immaturity of children, the question of guidance - never wholly absent in the case of adults - takes on supreme importance.' The title starts by presenting the Individual Psychology viewpoint as a whole, with the later chapters undertaking to tackle in more depth the various interrelated problems of children's education.

2010 Reprint of 1932 British edition. Adler, along with Freud and Jung, created an entirely new branch of psychology, namely psychoanalysis. What Life Should Mean to You brings his conclusions to a popular audience. The book covers adolescence, feelings of superiority and inferiority, the importance of cooperation, work, friendship, love and marriage.

From the 'nothing works' maxim of the 1970s to evidence-based interventions to challenge recidivism and promote pro-social behavior, psychological therapy has played an important role in rehabilitation and risk reduction within forensic settings in recent years. And yet the typical group therapy model isn't always the appropriate path to take. In this important new book, the aims and effectiveness of individual therapies within forensic settings, both old and new, are assessed and discussed. Including contributions from authors based in the UK, North America, Europe, Australia and New Zealand, a broad range of therapies are covered, including Cognitive Behavioural Therapy, Mentalisation Based Therapy, Schema Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy and Compassion Focussed Therapy. Each chapter provides: an assessment of the evidence base for effectiveness; the adaptations required in a forensic setting; whether the therapy is aimed at recidivism or psychological chan≥ the client or patient characteristics it is aimed at; a case study of the therapy in action. The final section of the book looks at ethical issues, the relationship between individual and group-based treatment, therapist supervision and deciding which therapies and therapists to select. This book is essential reading for probation staff, psychologists, criminal justice and liaison workers and specialist treatment staff. It will also be a valuable resource for any student of forensic or clinical psychology.

Expanded and revised to reflect a broader understanding of the complementary approach to therapeutic treatment, this is the only text to integrate expressive arts counseling techniques with major theories of counseling and psychology. Substantial changes to the second edition include new chapters that address neuroscience and counseling, trauma-informed counseling, animal-assisted therapy, mindfulness and counseling, and family counseling, along with a greater emphasis on cultural and diversity considerations throughout. The book is updated with over 30 new interventions including animal-assisted and videographic interventions, and new information about the neuroscientific foundations of expressive arts therapies. Updated references in each chapter and a suite of Instructor's Materials also add to the value of the second edition. The text integrates expressive arts therapies with 12 commonly used treatment modalities. Each chapter reviews a particular theory and describes how expressive and creative techniques can support and be easily integrated within that orientation. Over 90 field-tested, step-by-step interventions--created by leading practitioners--offer students and clinicians techniques that can be put to use immediately. A full suite of online instructor's materials, including an Instructor's Manual and chapter PowerPoint slides, is also available for instructors. New to the Second Edition: New chapters address neuroscience and counseling, trauma-informed counseling, animal-assisted therapy, mindfulness and counseling, and family counseling and the expressive artsCultural and diversity considerations in each chapterUpdated with new referencesOver 30 new interventions including videographyInstructor's materials, including an Instructor's Manual and PowerPoint slides Key Features: Integrates expressive arts counseling techniques with 12 major theories of counseling and psychologyPresents over 90 expressive arts interventions in easy, step-by-step formatIncludes art, writing, bibliotherapy, drama, music, movement, dance, puppetry, and sand playDiscusses appropriate populations, settings, and diagnoses for each interventionIncludes interventions that can be put to use immediately

Play therapy expert Terry Kottman and her colleague Kristin Meany-Walen provide a comprehensive update to this spirited and fun text on integrating Adlerian techniques into play therapy. Clinicians, school counselors, and students will find this to be the definitive guide for using Adlerian strategies with children to foster positive growth and effective communication with their parents and teachers. After an introduction to the basics of the approach and the concepts of Individual Psychology, the stages of Adlerian play therapy are outlined through step-by-step instructions, detailed treatment plans, an ongoing case study, and numerous vignettes. In addition to presenting up-to-date information on trends in play therapy, this latest edition emphasizes the current climate of evidence-based treatment and includes a new chapter on conducting research in play therapy. Appendixes contain useful worksheets, checklists, and resources that can be easily integrated into practice.

Alfred Alder's 1924 work was penned as the science of individual psychology was gaining increasing credibility and recognition. The volume covers the range of psychological issues understood at the time, whilst recognising the inevitable developments in the field as scientific knowledge and experimentation grew.

This book offers new possibilities for mental health professionals who are looking for ways to adapt traditional therapy and counseling techniques to address the spiritual and psychological issues their clients face. The author utilizes an Adlerian Individual Psychology perspective, which rejects biological determinism and focuses on the influence of powerful environmental factors on personality. This book provides specific methods and guidelines for applying Individual Psychology concepts to clients of each of the world's major religions, including Christianity, Judaism, Buddhism, Hinduism, and Islam. The author offers a wealth of insight into the customs, theories, and philosophies of each religion. With this knowledge, mental health professionals can use Individual Psychology methods and techniques to better understand and assist clients. Key Features Discusses how Individual Psychology can be integrated with Christian spirituality Examines the relational and social theories of Judaism as compared to Adler's theories of social interest Compares Adler's theories with the ethical, spiritual, and social systems of Islam Reviews the doctrines of Hinduism, including the belief in karma and reincarnation, the goals of life, and the paths to God Presents case examples to illustrate how psychological and spiritual problems may be approached using Adlerian psychotherapy

Originally published in 1928 this book was an attempt to acquaint the general public with the fundamentals of Individual Psychology.nbsp; At the same time it is a demonstration of the practical application of these principles to the conduct of everyday relationships, and the organization of our personal life.nbsp; Based upon a years' lectures to audiences at the People's Institute in Vienna, the purpose of the book was to point out how the mistaken behaviour of the individual affects harmony of our social and communal life; to teach the individual to recognize their own mistakes; and finally, to show them how they may effect a harmonious adjustment to the communal life. nbsp;Adler felt that mistakes in business or in science were costly and deplorable, but mistakes in the conduct of life are usually dangerous to life itself.nbsp; This book is dedicated by the author in his preface 'to the task of illuminating man's progress toward a better understanding of human nature.'

2010 Reprint of 1932 British edition. Adler, along with Freud and Jung, created an entirely new branch of psychology, namely psychoanalysis. What Life Should Mean to You brings his conclusions to a popular audience. The book covers adolescence, feelings of superiority and inferiority, the importance of cooperation, work, friendship, love and marriage.

Aggregating 46 years of research, this book proposes a fresh approach on how to conduct assessment and therapy using autobiographical memories. It offers a system to identify and deconstruct major lifetime memories and shows how clinicians can work with the content of these memories to help clients better understand past events as present events are filtered through them. Dr. Bruhn's first book on this subject, Earliest Childhood Memories: Theory and Application to Clinical Practice (1990), illustrated what could be learned about clients' present situation from the Early Memories Procedure (EMP), which is designed to identify and explore autobiographical memories of problematic experiences in therapy. The present book, which builds upon Dr. Bruhn's work with incarcerated women and male parolees, shows what can be done with these key memories by working directly on them in therapy. Dr. Bruhn showcases a new insight-oriented treatment paradigm, "memories work," to help resolve the issues identified in EMP responses. Chapters offer an alternative view of processing trauma and explore each facet of using memories work to design mental health interventions with clients. Included throughout are detailed case studies and techniques to re-engineer dysfunctional perceptions. Clinicians and therapists will come away with the tools necessary to use memories work successfully with clients.

This book presents cutting-edge research on adult attachment together with a complete overview of the Adult Attachment Projective Picture System (AAP), the authors' validated developmental assessment. In addition to identifying attachment classification groups, the AAP yields important information about dimensions--including defensive processes--not evaluated by other available measures. Detailed case illustrations show what the AAP looks like "in action" and what it reveals about individuals' early experiences, sense of self, and capacity to engage in close, protective relationships. The AAP can be used in clinical or research settings; the concluding chapter discusses promising applications to studying the neurobiology of attachment.

The Attachment-Based Focused Genogram Workbookis a hands-on guide for clinicians looking to integrate attachment research and family systems theory into their practice, with particular attention to intergenerational transmission processes. The book introduces a range of relationship mapping and timeline tools, grounded in the use of focused genograms and the Intersystem Approach. Examining the importance of the therapeutic bond within a variety of client-systems, the book outlines a new methodology for identifying childhood attachment patterns, adult attachment styles, family scripts and attachment narratives, and contextual social bonds. Exercises are also included throughout to encourage reflective thinking and to consolidate key concepts. Utilizing genograms as an essential tool in systemically focused family practice, this workbook will help therapists at all levels to apply and strengthen systemic considerations for clinical practice and research. The text also compliments the revised edition of Focused Genograms, whichuniquely applies attachment research for individuals, couples, and families in contextual clinical settings. ce and research. The text also compliments the revised edition of Focused Genograms, whichuniquely applies attachment research for individuals, couples, and families in contextual clinical settings.

This succinct and highly readable book from one of our best-selling authors offers the perfect introduction to a fascinating and fast-growing field. It explains the key concepts in attachment theory and describes how the main attachment types play out both in childhood and later life. It identifies some of the intriguing questions being explored by research, such as: 'What part do individuals' attachment histories play in adult relationships?' and 'What scope is there for attachment styles established in infancy to change later in life?'Students and professionals alike from across the fields of psychology, counselling, health and social work will find this an illuminating and thought-provoking guide to the rich complexity of human behaviour.

There are many exciting points of contact between developmental psychology in the attachment paradigm and the kinds of questions first raised by Aristotle's ethics, and which continue to preoccupy moral philosophers today. The book brings experts from both fields together to explore them forthe first time, to demonstrate why philosophers working in moral psychology, or in 'virtue ethics' - better, the triangle of relationships between the concepts of human nature, human excellence, and the best life for human beings - should take attachment theory more seriously than they have done todate.Attachment theory is a theory of psychological development. And the characteristics attachment theory is a developmental theory of - the various subvarieties of attachment - are evaluatively inflected: to be securely attached to a parent is to have a kind of attachment that makes for a good intimaterelationship. But obviously the classification of human character in terms of the virtues is evaluatively inflected too. So it would be strange if there were no story to be told about how these two sets of evaluatively inflected descriptions relate to one another. Attachment and Character exploresthe relationship between attachment and prosocial behaviour; probes the concept of the prosocial itself, and the relationship between prosocial behaviour, virtue and the quality of the social environment; the question whether there even are such things as stable character traits; and whetherattachment theory, in locating the origins of virtue in secure attachment, and attachment dispositions in human evolutionary history, gives support to ethical naturalism, in any of the many meanings of that expression.

This book provides a broad overview of the literature, theory, and clinical treatment of attachment deficit. It discusses its application in understanding the etiology of juvenile sexual offending, as well as implications for treatment. Issues addressed include the components of attachment and social connection, attachment and the development of personality, neurology and attachment, the development of social competence, and consideration of whether attachment can be learned.

The main objective of the research presented in this book is to broaden the scope of attachment theory by stressing the importance of a social network approach to the study of attachment. This approach forms the integrating theme of this volume, as is testified by various studies of attachment as it develops in an extended rearing context over and beyond the limits of the traditional mother-child dyad. In this connection attention is paid to the importance of sibling relationships, attachment relationships with professional caregivers, the role of the father in caring and rearing young children, and the (short-term and long-term) effects on attachment quality of maternal employment in infancy. Also, the cross-cultural validity of Ainsworth's Strange Situation is discussed, with reference to the USA, Sweden, Israel, Japan, The Netherlands, etc. In adopting a social network approach, the attachment theory proves to be a particularly useful instrument for reflecting on the consequence of social change (maternal employment, symmetrical families, socialisation of childrearing) for child development.

This is a concise, accessible introduction to the basic principles of attachment theory, and their application to therapeutic practice. Bringing together 70 years' of theory and research, its expert authors provide a much-needed user-friendly guide to attachment-informed psychotherapy. The book covers: The history, research base, and key figures and concepts of attachment theory The key concepts of attachment theory, and their implications for practice Neuroscience implications of attachment and its therapeutic relevance The parallels and differences between parent-child attachment and the therapeutic relationship The application of attachment in adult individual psychotherapy across a number of settings, also to couples and families The applications of attachment to working with complex disorders The applications of attachment in child psychotherapy

This book covers the groundbreaking concepts in attachment theory, as promulgated by Bowlby himself and during the years post Bowlby. It sets out to develop the seminal concept of 'learned security': the provision of a reparative experience of a secure base by the therapist so that the client can imbibe what he missed out on during his formative

In the last decade, few topics in social and personality psychology have attracted more interest than the application of attachment theory to adult relationships. Comprehensive and up-to-date, this book integrates the most important theoretical and empirical advances in this growing area of study and suggests new and promising directions for future investigation. Its balanced coverage of measurement issues, affect regulation, and clinical applications makes this a valuable sourcebook for scholars, students, and clinicians.

Attachment Theory and Psychosis: Current Perspectives and Future Directions is the first book to provide a practical guide to using attachment theory in the assessment, formulation and treatment of a range of psychological problems that can arise as a result of experiencing psychosis. Katherine Berry, Sandra Bucci and Adam N. Danquah, along with an international selection of contributors, expertly explore how attachment theory can inform theoretical understanding of the development of psychosis, psychological therapy and mental health practice with service users with psychosis. In the first section of the book, contributors describe the application of attachment theory to the understanding of paranoia, voice-hearing, negative symptoms, and relationship difficulties in psychosis. In the second section of the book, the contributors consider different approaches to working therapeutically with psychosis and demonstrate how these approaches draw on the key principles of attachment theory. In the final section, contributors address individual and wider organisation perspectives, including a voice-hearer perspective on formulating the relationship between voices and life history, how attachment principles can be used to organise the provision of mental health services, and the influence of mental health workers' own attachment experiences on therapeutic work. The book ends by summarising current perspectives and highlighting future directions. Written by leading mental health practitioners and researchers, covering a diverse range of professional backgrounds, topics and theroetical schools, this book is significant in guiding clinicians, managers and commissioners in how attachment theory can inform everyday practice. Attachment Theory and Psychosis: Current Perspectives and Future Directions will be an invaluable resource for mental health professionals, especially psychologists and other clinicians focusing on humanistic treatments, as well as postgraduate students training in these areas.

As interest in attachment theory continues to grow, misconceptions of the theory are becoming increasingly common. Important texts on major theoretical and empirical contributions are often too extensive for non-specialist readers or not readily available to clinicians. Designed to address a significant gap in literature, Attachment Theory and Research: A Readerpresents a carefully curated selection of book chapters and journal articles on the subject--complemented by previously unpublished material by the founder of the theory. This valuable new resource provides practitioners, students, policymakers, and general readers an accessible and up-to-date view of the concepts, development, and diversity of attachment theory. The Reader comprises 15 succinct chapters by many of the most influential researchers in the theory, covering the basis of attachment theory and the current state of the field. The book brings together a wide range of works, many of which challenge common assumptions and offer intriguing new insights on attachment theory and research. Topics include psychoanalytic theories of separation anxiety, concepts of anxiety, stress, and homeostasis, the origins of disorganized attachment, cultural differences in caregiving practices, reactive attachment disorder (RAD) and disinhibited social engagement disorder (DSED), the future prospects of attachment theory, and more.

This volume showcases the latest theoretical and empirical work from some of the top scholars in attachment. Extending classic themes and describing important new applications, the book examines several ways in which attachment processes help explain how people think, feel, and behave in different situations and at different stages in the life cycle. Topics include the effects of early experiences on adult relationships; new developments in neuroscience and genetics; attachment orientations and parenting; connections between attachment and psychopathology, as well as health outcomes; and the relationship of attachment theory and processes to clinical interventions.

Written with the practicing psychotherapist in mind, this invaluable book presents cutting-edge knowledge on adult attachment and explores the implications for day-to-day clinical practice. Leading experts illustrate how theory and research in this dynamic area can inform assessment, case formulation, and clinical decision making. The book puts such concepts as the secure base, mentalization, and attachment styles in a new light by focusing on their utility for understanding the therapeutic relationship and processes of change. It offers recommendations for incorporating attachment ideas and tools into specific treatment approaches, with separate chapters on psychoanalytic, interpersonal, cognitive-behavioral, and emotionally focused therapies.

How teachers form and maintain classroom and staffroom relationships is crucial to the success of their work. A teacher who is able to accurately interpret the underlying relationship processes can learn to proactively, rather than reactively, influence the dynamics of any class. These are skills that can be taught. This invaluable text explains how adult attachment theory offers new ways to examine professional teaching relationships, classroom management and collegial harmony: equally important information for school leaders, teacher mentors and proteges. Attachment Theory and the Teacher-Student Relationship addresses three significant gaps in the current literature on classroom management: the effects of teachers' attachment style on the formation and maintenance of classroom and staffroom relationships the importance of attachment processes in scaffolding teachers' and students emotional responses to daily educational tasks the degree of influence these factors have on teachers' classroom behaviour, particularly management of student behaviour. Based on recent developments in adult attachment theory, this book highlights the key aspects of teacher-student relationships that teachers and teacher educators should know. As such, it will be of great interest to educational researchers, teacher educators, students and training teachers.

Two leading psychoanalysts resolve the conflict between attachment theory and trauma theory. In From Death Instinct to Attachment Theory, Tomas Geyskens and Philippe Van Haute address a theoretical conflict at the heart of contemporary psychoanalysis. Analytic theory, especially the work of Melanie Klein, asserts the developmental primacy of infantile Hilflosigkeit and the trauma it inevitably inflicts; however, John Bowlby and other attachment theorists have shown that attachment to the mother is primary and instinctive--and not the result of traumatic helplessness. Geyskens and Van Haute resolve the apparent tension between the empirical fact of the primacy of attachment and the fundamental psychoanalytic theory of infantile trauma by drawing on Imre Hermann's distinction between natural development and subjective history. Arguing that Hermann's theory constitutes a workable clinical anthropology of attachment, they undertake a deep and revealing analysis of the work of Freud and Klein on the death instinct, trauma, and infantile sexuality; the critique leveled by attachment theorists like Bowlby; and the overlooked insights of the Hungarian School of Psychoanalysis. From Death Instinct to Attachment Theory offers an elegant answer to an important problem in psychoanalysis and provides new insight into the sort of clinical phenomena that led Freud to move beyond the pleasure principle in the first place.

Widely regarded as the state-of-the-science reference on attachment, this handbook interweaves theory and cutting-edge research with clinical applications. Leading researchers examine the origins and development of attachment theory; present biological and evolutionary perspectives; and explore the role of attachment processes in relationships, including both parent-child and romantic bonds. Implications for mental health and psychotherapy are addressed, with reviews of exemplary attachment-oriented interventions for children and adolescents, adults, couples, and families. Contributors discuss best practices in assessment and critically evaluate available instruments and protocols. New to This Edition *Chapters on genetics and epigenetics, psychoneuroimmunology, and sexual mating. *Chapters on compassion, school readiness, and the caregiving system across the lifespan. *Chapter probing the relation between attachment and other developmental influences. *Nearly a decade's worth of theoretical and empirical advances.

This accessible book draws on unique evidence from oral histories and little-known archive material to shed new light on the working relationships which led to John Bowlby's shift from psychoanalysis to ethology as a frame of reference - and ultimately to the development of attachment theory. A unique exploration of the origins of Bowlby's ideas and the critical transformation in his thinking - offers an alternative to standard accounts of the origin of attachment theory Explores the significance of Bowlby's influential working relationships with Robert Hinde, Harry Harlow, James Robertson and Mary Ainsworth Provides students, academics, and practitioners with clear insights into the development of attachment theory Accessible to general readers interested in psychology and psychoanalysis

Second edition, completely revised and updated John Bowlby is one of the outstanding psychological theorists of the twentieth century. This new edition of John Bowlby and Attachment Theory is both a biographical account of Bowlby and his ideas and an up-to-date introduction to contemporary attachment theory and research, now a dominant force in psychology, counselling, psychotherapy and child development. Jeremy Holmes traces the evolution of Bowlby's work from a focus on delinquency, material deprivation and his dissatisfaction with psychoanalysis's imperviousness to empirical science to the emergence of attachment theory as a psychological model in its own right. This new edition traces the explosion of interest, research and new theories generated by Bowlby's followers, including Mary Main's discovery of Disorganised Attachment and development of the Adult Attachment Interview, Mikulincer and Shaver's explorations of attachment in adults and the key contributions of Fonagy, Bateman and Target. The book also examines advances in the biology and neuroscience of attachment. Thoroughly accessible yet academically rigorous, and written by a leading figure in the field, John Bowlby and Attachment Theory is still the perfect introduction to attachment for students of psychology, psychiatry, counselling, social work and nursing.

Learning to Trust describes a constructivist approach to classroom management and discipline that was developed by the Child Development Project, a multiyear research and development project that applied attachment theory, care, and self-determination theories to the elementary schoolclassroom. In this book, Marilyn Watson provides an overview of the research on attachment theory and a detailed description of its implications for teaching and classroom management, while chronicling one teacher, Laura Ecken, and her second-third grade class in a high poverty school across twoyears as she implements the Child Development Project and manages the class, guided by attachment theory. Watson documents in detail Laura's day by day and week by week efforts to build caring, trusting relationships with and among her students and describes the many steps Laura takes to guide theclass into becoming a caring, learning community while also meeting her students' individual needs for autonomy and competence.Of course, not all goes well in this very real classroom and the ways Laura manages the pressures of competition and students' many misbehaviors, ordinary and serious, are clearly and sometimes humorously described. Such teaching is not easy, and is counter to more controlling management approachescommon in many schools. The book concludes with a chapter on how teachers might find support in their current schools for this more collaborative approach to classroom management, as well as a chapter that includes reflections from a number of the students seven years after leaving the class.

The Myth of Attachment Theory confronts the uncritical acceptance of attachment theory - challenging its scientific basis and questioning the relevance in our modern, superdiverse and multicultural society - and exploring the central concern of how children, and their way of forming relationships, differ from each other. In this book, Heidi Keller examines diverse multicultural societies, proposing that a single doctrine cannot best serve all children and families. Drawing on cultural, psychological and anthropological research, this challenging volume respects cultural diversity as the human condition and demonstrates how the wide heterogeneity of children's worlds must be taken seriously to avoid painful or unethical consequences that might result from the application of attachment theory in different fields. The book explores attachment theory as a scientific construct, deals with attachment theory as the foundation of early education, specifies the dimensions that need to be considered for a culturally conscious approach and, finally, approaches ethical problems which result from the universality claim of attachment theory in different areas. This book employs multiple and mixed methods, while also going beyond critical analysis of theory to offer insight into the implications of the unquestioning acceptance of this theory in such areas as childhood interventions, diagnosis of attachment security, international intervention programs and educational settings. This volume will be a crucial read for scholars and researchers in developmental, educational and clinical psychology, as well as educators, teachers-in-training and other professionals working with children and their families.

Nurturing Children describes children's lives transformed through therapy.　 Drawing on decades of experience, internationally respected clinician and trainer Graham Music tackles major issues affecting troubled children, including trauma, neglect, depression and violence. Using psychoanalysis alongside modern developmental thinking from neurobiology, attachment and trauma theory and mindfulness, Music creates his own distinctive blend of approaches to help even the most traumatised of children. A mix of personal accounts and therapeutic riches, Nurturing Children will appeal to anyone helping children, young people and families to lead fuller lives.

A child's close bond with mother, father, or guardian usually provides a foundation for trust in all future attachments. Children deprived of early and healthy dependency--who do not form normal attachment with their caregivers--may later suffer from Reactive Attachment Disorder (RAD). This childhood disorder is characterized by a general failure in social relationships resulting from pathogenic care. Although first included in the third edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM-III) in 1980, RAD is one of the more uncommon and understudied forms of psychopathology. Reactive Attachment Disorder: A Case-Based Approach adds to a now growing research base, providing scholars and clinicians with a well-rounded analysis of RAD and suggested treatments. The case-based approach used in this Brief follows the representative case of "Jorge," presented as unfolding over time and structured to illustrate challenges of diagnosis, to show examples of co-morbidity, and to provoke reflection on what questions may arise during treatment. Readers are asked to appraise the overlap with other clinical syndromes, the forms of psychotherapy which may apply, and the potential role of psychiatric medications as part of a comprehensive treatment plan.

The Routledge Handbook of Attachment: Theory provides a broadly based introduction to attachment theory and associated areas, written in an accessible style by experts from around the world. The book covers the basic theories of attachment and discusses the similarities and differences of the two predominant schools of attachment theory. The book provides an overview of current developments in attachment theory, explaining why it is important not only to understanding infant and early child development but also to adult personality and the care we provide to our children. The Routledge Handbook of Attachment: Theory provides detailed descriptions of the leading schools of attachment theory as well as discussions of this potentially confusing and contentious area, and includes a chapter on the neuropsychological basis of attachment. The book also examines other domains and diagnoses that can be confused with issues of attachment and assesses contexts when different approaches may be more suitable. Providing a comprehensive yet accessible introduction to the theories of attachment, The Routledge Handbook of Attachment: Theory is an indispensable guide for professionals working with children and families in community and court-based settings, clinical psychologists, psychiatrists and social workers, clinicians in training and students.

Organized around extended case illustrations--and grounded in cutting-edge theory and research--this highly regarded book shows how an attachment perspective can inform psychotherapeutic practice with patients of all ages. Karl Heinz Brisch explores the links between early experiences of separation, loss, and trauma and a range of psychological, behavioral, and psychosomatic problems. He demonstrates the basic techniques of attachment-based assessment and intervention, emphasizing the healing power of the therapeutic relationship. With a primary focus on treating infants and young children and their caregivers, the book discusses applications of attachment-based psychotherapy over the entire life course.   New to This Edition *Incorporates advances in research on neurobiology, genetics, and psychotraumatology. *Expanded with a section on inpatient treatment for traumatized children, including in-depth cases. *Describes two promising prevention programs for expectant couples, families, and young children. *The latest knowledge on disorganized attachment, attachment disorders, and assessments.

This book provides a comprehensive overview of research into dissociation in children and adolescents and challenges conventional ideas about complex behaviours. Offering a new perspective to those who are unfamiliar with dissociation in children, and challenging prevalent assumptions for those who are experienced in the field, the editors encourage the professional to ask questions about the child's internal experiences beyond a diagnosis of the external symptoms. Chapters bring together a range of international experts working in the field, and interweave theories, practice, and challenging and complex case material, as well as identifying mistakes that therapists can avoid while working with children who dissociate. Filled with practical tools and examples, this book is a vital resource for professionals to enrich their practice with children who dissociate.

Why Don't I Feel Good Enough? Using Attachment Theory to Find a Solution　offers a guide to how early emotional bonds affect our adult relationships and how psychological theory can help us to find the origin and solution to a number of life's problems. 　 Bringing a wealth of therapeutic experience and the latest scientific research, Helen Dent introduces the benefits that understanding attachment theory can bring to all areas of life. You will find this particularly helpful if you struggle with everyday relationships and have difficulties managing your emotions. Using practical guidance, real-life examples and questionnaires to help you locate your own 'attachment style', she provides the tools and guidance to help you move on and develop secure, positive attachments. 　 Why Don't I Feel Good Enough?　will be an important guide and resource for psychotherapists, counsellors, clinical psychologists and their clients. It provides a good introduction to attachment theory for professionals in training.

This book provides psychotherapists with a multidimensional view of childhood neglect and a practical roadmap for facilitating survivors' healing. Working from a strong base in attachment theory, esteemed clinician Ruth Cohn explores ways therapists can recognize the signs of childhood neglect, provides recommendations for understanding lasting effects that can persist into adulthood, and lays out strategies for helping clients maximize therapeutic outcomes. Along with extensive clinical material, chapters introduce skills that therapists can develop and hone, such as the ability to recognize and discern non-verbal attempts at communication. They also provide an array of resources and evidence-based treatment modalities that therapists can use in session. Working with the Developmental Trauma of Childhood Neglect is an essential book for any mental health professional working with survivors of childhood trauma.

Title: Autism spectrum disorders: applied behavior analysis, evidence, and practice
Authors: Sturmey, Peter; Fitzer, Adrienne
Subjects: Autism in children; Autistic children -- Rehabilitation; Behavioral assessment; Education; Autistic Disorder -- therapy; Behavioral Medicine -- methods.
Published: Austin, Tex. : Pro-ed
Creation Date: c2007
Format: xiv, 289 p. : ill., charts ; 23 cm..
Language: English

The problems and needs of rural substance abusers vary from those of abusers in urban areas. Accordingly, the means of treatment must acknowledge and address these differences. Despite this call for specialized care, no theoretically grounded therapy has yet been made available to rural patients. Behavioral Therapy for Rural Substance Abusers, developed and piloted over three years by University of Kentucky faculty and staff and substance abuse counselors in rural eastern Kentucky, provides a model for effective treatment for this segment of the population. A two-phase outpatient treatment, this approach combines group and individual sessions in an environment that is both comfortable and useful for the client. The success of this method lies in its regional approach to therapy. Rather than using role-playing techniques to examine old behaviors, therapy is designed around storytelling activities. Rural patients respond more positively to such time-honored traditions and thus become active participants in their own treatment. This manual offers a clear and well-constructed guide through the strategies of Structured Behavioral Outpatient Rural Therapy (SBORT). Supplemented with illustrations, sample exercises, and case studies, Behavioral Therapy for Rural Substance Abusers is a vital tool in meeting the treatment needs of an otherwise ignored rural population.

Many research fields are heading toward more precise process analyses in the era of big data and artificial intelligence. In particular, using innovative methods to analyze different human behaviors as well as understand specific behavioral patterns helps explore the structures and contexts in all kinds of human behaviors, which can serve as theoretical innovation and strategies to solve human problems. This book collects the latest behavior analysis research in different disciplines, including some methods or analysis examples.

Behaviour Therapy is based on the application of principles of learning to change human behaviour. In the last two decades it has grown into a promising scientific discipline. This development is exemplified by extensive research and applications. The present book provides a unifying account of its contemporary developments, linking underlying theories with practice. This book is divided into three sections. In the first section, basic assumptions of behaviour therapy are examined and emerging trends such as radical behaviourism, cognitive behaviourism and systematic eclectism are dealt with in a systematic manner. In the second section, the techniques of behaviour therapy, their theoretical bases and applications have been illustrated with the help of empirical studies. The concluding section focuses on the contemporary issues of research and practice of behaviour therapy.

Effective Programs for Treating Autism Spectrum Disorder is written for teachers, parents, and the many service providers who work with individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Partnbsp;one reviews the characteristics of ASD, summarizes major theories and research findings regarding cause(s) of ASD, and discusses the most popular treatment claims, examining each approach's scientific base and value. Partnbsp;two provides an informative overview of applied behavior analysis, focusing on the principles of learning and basic procedures based upon those principles. These two parts provide a foundation for understanding the strategies implemented by the outstanding treatment programs described in Partnbsp;three. The eight models described in Partnbsp;three represent comprehensive, evidence-based programs for the treatment of persons with ASD, from infancy through adulthood. Programs reviewed include the Lovaas Institute, Koegel Center, Strategic Teaching and Reinforcement Systems (STARS), Project DATA, New England Children's Center, May Institute, Princeton Child Development Institute, and Judge Rotenberg Center. Strategies explained include intensive early behavioral intervention, Pivotal Response Training, verbal behavior, script fading, social stories, visual activity schedules, functional analysis, the Picture Exchange Communication System, and the Family-Teaching Model.

Exposure Treatments for Anxiety Disorders is a unique volume, as it draws together the latest research on the rapidly-expanding field of anxiety disorders and illuminates how to correctly apply the proven methodology of behavioral therapy techniques to the variety of situations that face today's mental health professional. That said, cognitive therapy has in the last 10 years gotten increased attention as an alternative to behavior therapy in the treatment of anxiety disorders. But while it is gaining acceptance among practitioners, cognitive therapy has yet to illustrate substantial benefits above those that behavior therapy can already provide. In light of the aforementioned, coupled with the pressure many practitioners feel from managed care paradigms and shrinking healthcare coverage, this book will be a welcome resource allowing for increased clarity of action, accountability, and ultimately, positive client outcome. Each chapter is designed to address pivotal aspects in the assessment, formulation and diagnosis, and treatment of anxiety disorders, to a sufficient depth that the generalist practitioner will be comfortable using this book as a guide when working with the anxiety disordered client.

Widely regarded as the authoritative work on the principles and practice of applied behavior analysis (ABA), this indispensable volume is now in a revised and expanded second edition. Leading experts present evidence-based procedures for supporting positive behaviors and reducing problem behaviors with children and adults in diverse contexts. Chapters delve into applications in education, autism treatment, addictions, behavioral pediatrics, and other areas. Covering everything from behavioral assessment and measurement to the design and implementation of individualized interventions, the Handbook is a complete reference and training tool for ABA practitioners and students.    New to This Edition *Incorporates key advances in research, theory, and clinical practice. *Chapters on additional applications: school consultation, pediatric feeding disorders, and telehealth services. *Chapters on quantitative analysis of behavior (matching and behavioral momentum theory) and behavioral economics. *Updated discussions of professional issues, ABA certification, and technology tools.  

This volume will provide the reader with a concise overview of applied behavioral interventions for language in people with autism spectrum disorders. It is an edited work consisting of 12 chapters organized into two broad sections. Part I deals with general aspects of language in people with ASD, such as the nature of language impairments, general approaches to language teaching, behavioral conceptions of language, and the evidence base for which approaches are effective. Part II addresses speci'c programmatic issues including particular intervention questions, such as how to teach speci'c functions (e.g., mands, tacts, intraverbals, and echoics); speci'c intervention methods (e.g., discrete- trial training, natural language paradigm, and incidental teaching); and intervening for problematic aspects of verbal behavior (e.g., prosody and maladaptive verbal behavior).

Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) is increasingly recognised as a highly effective way of helping children with autistic spectrum disorders. It is based on a variety of methods and techniques which can be used to promote skills for daily living and change difficult behavior. In Raising a Child with Autism, Shira Richman explains how parents can adapt the practical techniques used in ABA for use at home, providing tips and guidelines to increase play skills, improve communication and sibling interaction and increase independence. The book also covers toilet-training, food selectivity, self-dressing and community outings, and includes an overview of the theory behind ABA as well as a list of resources for further reading. It offers parents a practical and effective way to help autistic children interact more successfully with family, friends and at school.

This book provides the foundation for a lifelong journey of ethical practice in service for individuals with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities. The second edition of Understanding Ethics in Applied Behavior Analysis includes an explanation of each element in the Ethics Code for Behavior Analysts, along with considerations for ethical practice and examples from the field. Professional behavior for the behavior analyst is also addressed when fulfilling roles as teacher, employee, manager, colleague, advocate, or member of a multidisciplinary team. This new edition expands on the first chapter's introduction of moral philosophy, adds a new chapter on ethical decision-making and core principles, and provides a study guide to assist those preparing for the Behavior Analyst Certification Board exams. Drawing upon Beirne and Sadavoy's combined 40 years of clinical experience as well as the reflections of colleagues in the field, this is an indispensable guide to ethics for behavior analysis students.

This volume brings together leading experts to explore the state of the art of cognitive clinical assessment and identify cutting-edge approaches of interest to clinicians and researchers. The book highlights fundamental problems concerning the validity of assessments that are widely used in cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT). Key directions for further research and development are identified. Updated cognitive assessment methods are described in detail, with particular attention to transdiagnostic treatment, evidence-based practice, cognitive case formulation, and imagery-based techniques.

Although cognitive behavior therapy (CBT) is the most widely practiced evidence-based clinical approach in mental health today, CBT is a broad term that encompasses a wide array of approaches and techniques that can be difficult for even experienced clinicians to navigate. In this fully updated edition, the authors provide a detailed, step-by-step guide to behavioral interventions in CBT. They discuss case formulation and treatment planning, core behavioral intervention strategies, and innovative approaches such as acceptance, mindfulness, and a behavioral approach to cognition. They look at key behavioral techniques, such as self-monitoring, behavioral activations, exposure therapy, and skills training, that are essential features of CBT practice. The behavioral framework they describe is practical and accessible to clinicians and students with varying degrees of behavioral training. Alongside a comprehensive update of the research literature, this edition features new chapters on enhancing interpersonal effectiveness, emotion regulation, and navigating particularly difficult therapeutic challenges.

The emotional and behavioral problems of students in the classroom are a major concern for teachers, parents, and administrators. Fifty years of scientific research supports the efficacy of behavioral interventions in the classroom, yet school psychologists and teachers are often unaware of this evidence or of how to apply it. As diagnoses of autism spectrum disorder (ASD) continue to rise, school psychologists today must have the theoretical and practical knowledge to assess, treat, and intervene on behalf of all children, including those with ASD. This fully updated second edition includes new chapters on screening and diagnosis of ASD, discrete trials training, pivotal response training, verbal behavior interventions, and structured teaching approaches. Contributors also describe interventions for using cognitive behavior therapy with children and families to treat a variety of symptoms and behaviors. This book provides school psychologists, counselors, social workers, school administrators, and teachers with the primary, secondary, and tertiary intervention and prevention strategies they need to succeed in today's classroom.

This book addresses a critical challenge in evidence-based psychotherapy: how to use empirically supported therapies (ESTs) in real-world clinical contexts. The author explains the basic theories of cognition, learning, and emotion that underlie available ESTs and shows how the theories also guide systematic case formulation. By crafting a sound formulation and continually refining and monitoring it as treatment progresses, the therapist can smoothly "shift theoretical gears" and weave together elements of different ESTs to meet the needs of individual patients, who typically present with multiple problems. Hands-on tools, reproducibles, and many concrete examples are included.

Increasing numbers of therapists are coming into contact with the problem of compulsive sexual behaviour disorders. However, it is still a relatively new field and there is little in the current literature available that enables the therapist to work with and treat this problem. CBT for Compulsive Sexual Behaviour: A guide for professionals addresses this by providing a guide to cognitive-behavioural theory and practice which includes the assessment, diagnosis and treatment of addictive sexually compulsive disorders. 　 Beginning with a description of addictive sexuality and an overview of cognitive behavioural therapy in which CBT is presented as the most useful response, Thaddeus Birchard provides clear therapeutic information about the implementation of CBT treatment intervention. The chapters included cover the neuroscience that underpins the addictive process; a 'how to' chapter on the use of groups; paraphilias; trauma and attachment; comorbid disorders and cross-addictions and analysis on the function of internet pornography, all written from a cognitive behavioural stance.　 Using case vignettes throughout, Thaddeus Birchard draws on his own experience as a psychosexual therapist, along with the latest research in the field, to enable the therapist to treat a range of compulsive sexual problems in a way that can be applied in individual practice or in a group setting as well as how to prevent relapse. This book will be essential reading for psychosexual therapists, cognitive behaviour therapists and other professional working with sexual compulsive disorders.

Don't let social anxiety rule your life! Overcome your fears using proven-effective skills grounded in cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT). Do you avoid social situations? Do you dread public speaking? Would you rather stay in a job you hate than go through the interview process?  If so, you may have social anxiety--and you aren't alone. People who struggle with social anxiety have an overwhelming fear of social situations. And as a result, could end up missing out on life's opportunities--such as getting their dream job, meeting new friends, or finding the perfect mate. If you're tired of social anxiety holding you back, this book can help. In CBT for Social Anxiety, you'll learn how to conquer your fears using research-proven skills from one of the world's leading CBT experts. In addition to overcoming avoidance of social situations through understanding how your social anxiety works, you'll also learn how to engage in "social mishap exposures"--humorous social scenarios that you practice on your own terms, as you learn to see how well you're able to cope with your anxiety in the moment. As you gradually realize that your worst fears are unfounded, you'll gain the self-confidence needed to start really enjoying social interactions. Avoidance may lessen your social anxiety in the short-term, but it can actually make anxiety worse in the long run. Using the skills outlined in this book, you'll learn how to face your social anxiety head on--so you can get on with your life.

Children who have been sexually abused not only often experience PTSD symptoms as a direct result of the trauma, but also develop unhealthy emotional responses and may engage in age-inappropriate sexual behaviors. In addition, parents also suffer from the trauma and thus are often in need ofemotional support and guidance in responding to their children's needs.Based on over 25 years of research supported by grants from the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH), the National Center on Child Abuse and Neglect (NCCAN), and other funding sources, Child Sexual Abuse describes a premier empirically supported treatment approach for children, adolescents,and non-offending parents/caregivers impacted by child sexual abuse. Developed to provide support and to alleviate symptoms and problem behaviors in children and adolescents, trauma-focused CBT for child sexual abuse incorporates treatment components that provide children and their caregivers witheducation and coping skills training, while simultaneously addressing the trauma.The book describes the nuts and bolts of treatment including trauma narration and processing that helps to alleviate children's distress and feelings of shame associated with the abuse. Parents are also taught effective behavior management skills, and treatment often culminates with a focus onparent-child communication and enhancing safety and future development. This highly effective treatment model can be adapted to be delivered in school-based, residential, home and/or group settings.

Cognitive Behavioral Art Therapy explores the intersection of art therapy practices and principles within cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) theories and models. This timely new resource examines CBT theory as it relates to art therapy, and offers an argument for the inclusion of CBT within art therapy-based treatments. An analysis of the historical roots of both CBT and cognitive behavioral art therapy (CBAT) is presented along with current practices and a proposed model of implementation. Also included are case studies to enhance this in-depth exploration of a largely unexamined perspective within the arts therapies.

Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Sexual Dysfunction provides clinicians and graduate students with a comprehensive biopsychosocial model of useful, practical, empirically-based strategies and techniques to address common sexual dysfunctions. It is the most comprehensive volume describing the couple cognitive-behavioral approach to assessment, treatment, and relapse prevention of sexual dysfunction. The focus is on sexual desire and satisfaction with an emphasis on the Good Enough Sex (GES) model of sharing sexual pleasure rather than an individual perfect intercourse performance test. This title reflects the contributions of Mike Metz to the field of couple sex therapy.

Grounded in decades of CBT research and clinical practice, as well as cutting-edge cognitive science, this entirely new book replaces the classic Cognitive Therapy of Substance Abuse. Bruce S. Liese and Aaron T. Beck provide critical tools for understanding and treating the full range of addictive behaviors. They explain how to systematically develop case conceptualizations and support clients in achieving their recovery goals. Vivid case examples are used to illustrate CBT techniques, structure, psychoeducation, motivational interviewing, group treatment, relapse prevention, and other effective therapeutic components. Several reproducible forms can be downloaded and printed in a convenient 8 1/2" x 11" size.

This book offers a new framework for providing psychological services in schools at the individual, group, and systemic levels. It examines a variety of disorders common to school children, including anxiety, depression, ADHD, and conduct disorder, and outlines treatment options from evidence-based cognitive and cognitive-behavioral methods. The accessible real-world guidelines enable readers to design, implement, and evaluate interventions relevant to diverse student needs. Ethical, competency, and training concerns facing school practitioners in the new therapeutic environment are reviewed as well. Featured areas of coverage include: Behavioral assessment in school settings. PTSD and secondary trauma in children and adolescents. Transdiagnostic behavioral therapy for anxiety and depression in school. CBT for children with autism spectrum and other developmental disorders. Implementation, technological, and professional issues. The Practitioner's Toolkit: evidence-based cognitive and behavioral interventions. Cognitive and Behavioral Interventions in the Schools is an essential resource for professionals and scientist-practitioners in child and school psychology, social work, behavioral therapy, psychotherapy and counseling, and educational psychology.

Demonstrating the importance of theory for effective clinical practice, this thought-provoking volume brings together leading experts on a range of contemporary cognitive and behavioral approaches. The contributors probe the philosophical and theoretical underpinnings of each model--its assumptions about normal psychological processes, the development and maintenance of psychopathology, and the mechanisms by which therapeutic changes take place. The historical antecedents of the theories are examined and studies that have tested them are reviewed. Vivid case studies show practitioners how theory informs clinical decision making and technique in each of the respective approaches.

Cognitive Behavioural Chairwork: Distinctive Features provides a practical, accessible, and concise introduction to both the theory and practice of chairwork, one of the most powerful and exciting methods of intervention in cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT), and is the first book to synthesise its many applications in CBT and allied therapies. Part of the popular 'CBT Distinctive Features' series, this book contains a wealth of effective experiential procedures for working with automatic thoughts, emotions, behaviours, core beliefs, ambivalence, strengths, well-being, and cognitive processes such as worry and self-criticism. Readers will also learn how chairwork is applied in other areas, such as clinical supervision and associated psychotherapeutic approaches including compassion focused therapy, schema therapy, positive psychotherapy, and motivational interviewing. Techniques are presented in an easy-to-understand format and illustrated using clinical examples and therapy transcripts. The result is a comprehensive guide which demystifies chairwork and places it at the heart of CBT's continued evolution. Created for practising clinicians, researchers, and training therapists, Cognitive Behavioural Chairwork: Distinctive Features will appeal to both individuals who are new to chairwork and those who are familiar with its techniques.

With coverage of the latest theory and research, this is a complete guide to implementing cognitive behavioral group therapy for practitioners and trainees in a range of mental health disciplines.   Presents evidence-based protocols for depression, panic, social anxiety, generalized anxiety, posttraumatic stress, OCD, compulsive hoarding, psychosis, and addiction Provides innovative solutions for achieving efficient, effective therapy as mandated by emerging health care priorities, as well as trouble-shoots for common problems such as dropouts Details unique strategies for working with ethnic minorities and clients across the age spectrum, along with material on mindfulness augmentation and transdiagnostic approaches Includes clear, accessible instructions, complete with references to DSM-5 diagnostic changes, real-life clinical examples, and group session transcripts

Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT) has been an effective intervention for decades, but few clinicians have discovered the powerful treatment results of combining CBT with Mindfulness. Clinical psychologist and mindfulness expert Dr. Richard Sears has created a practical, engaging skills manual that clearly defines the principles of CBT and then demonstrates steps for integrating mindfulness practices into therapy -- all drawing from the latest research. Straight-forward explanations and dozens of worksheets provide fresh insights and new tools to move therapy forward when treating stress, anxiety, panic, depression, pain, trauma, addictions, and other issues.

Cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) is a modern type of short-term psychotherapy that integrates cognitive and behavioral theories. The CBT approach is effective in the treatment of a wide range of mental issues and conditions, such as generalized anxiety disorders, general or post-traumatic stress, panic attacks, depression, eating and sleep dysfunctions, obsessive-compulsive disorders, and substance dependence. CBT is also effective as an intervention for psychotic, personality, and bipolar disorders or to approach fatigue and chronic pain conditions especially if associated with distress. This book explains both theoretical and practical aspects of CBT, along with case examples, and contains useful tools and specific interventions for different psychological situations.

Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Beginners lays out an experiential learning program replete with exercises to guide new clinicians, as well as more experienced therapists re-specializing in CBT, through the process of systematically implementing successful CBT interventions both for themselves and their clients. Each chapter examines a key construct in understandable terms, presenting an overarching view of how clinicians put these concepts and techniques into practice in typical as well as in difficult or unexpected scenarios. Readers will come away with a deep understanding not just of the standard principles of CBT but also of the real decisions and strategies that allow seasoned therapists to implement these principles in a way that maximizes the benefit to clients.

This Cognitive Behavior Therapy text is brief, practical, comprehensive, and tailored just for counselors. Evidence-based CBT techniques are specifically adapted to counseling including core-counseling concepts such as social justice, strengths, wellness, and diversity (e.g., ethnicity, culture, sexual orientation, gender, disability) which are interwoven throughout the book's content. Each chapter includes case vignettes that reflect the work of professional counselors in school, clinical mental health, marital and family, and rehabilitation settings.

Cognitive Behavioural Couple Therapy (CBCT) is an enhanced and contextually grounded approach that provides evidence-based strategies for working with couple distress, as well as individual psychopathology in the context of a distressed relationship. Cognitive Behavioural Couple Therapy: Distinctive Features explores this truly integrative and experiential way of working. This model has significantly widened the traditional CBT focus on cognition and behaviour to include an equal emphasis on emotion, stable individual differences and vulnerabilities, as well as an awareness of the importance of the environment and the wider context for couple relationships. Comprising 30 key points, and divided into two parts - Theory and Practice - this concise book includes numerous clinical examples that illustrate the key features of Cognitive Behavioural Couple Therapy. It will offer essential guidance for students, practitioners experienced in individual CBT, as well as practitioners of couple therapy from other theoretical orientations who require an accessible guide to the distinctive theoretical and practical features of this contemporary approach. 　

Cognitive Behavioural Therapy for Adolescents and Young Adults: An Emotion Regulation Approach provides a unique focus on therapeutic practice with adolescents and young adults, covering everything from psychological theories of adolescence to the treatment of common emotional difficulties. Beginning with a review of development through adolescence into adulthood, and the principles of CBT, the book highlights problems with traditional models of CBT for adolescents and young adults. In a fresh approach, this book separates CBT from diagnosis and grounds it instead in emotion science. Adolescents and young adults learn not about disorders and symptoms, but about emotions, emotional 'traps', and how they can use CBT to bring about change. There are chapters on fear, sadness, anger, emotion dysregulation, and happiness. Each chapter provides an outline of emotion science, a clear cognitive behavioural formulation ('trap'), and evidence-based interventions. Clinicians are walked through the process using case illustrations. Cognitive Behavioural Therapy for Adolescents and Young Adults represents a transformation of CBT practice, and will become a valuable treatment manual to training and practising mental health professionals, especially psychotherapists specialising in CBT.

This book reviews the development of Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT) and its use with patients suffering from schizophrenia or other severe personality disorders. The effectiveness of CBT is highlighted through case studies of dissociative disorders, borderline personality disorders and narcissistic personality disorders. A special section on dealing with uncommunicative patients with personality disorders completes the overview.

This book reviews the development of Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT) and its use with patients suffering from schizophrenia or other severe personality disorders. The effectiveness of CBT is highlighted through case studies of dissociative disorders, borderline personality disorders and narcissistic personality disorders. A special section on dealing with uncommunicative patients with personality disorders completes the overview.

This bestselling, classic work offers a definitive presentation of the theory and practice of cognitive therapy for depression. Aaron T. Beck and his associates set forth their seminal argument that depression arises from a "cognitive triad" of errors and from the idiosyncratic way that one infers, recollects, and generalizes. From the initial interview to termination, many helpful case examples demonstrate how cognitive-behavioral interventions can loosen the grip of "depressogenic" thoughts and assumptions. Guidance is provided for working with individuals and groups to address the full range of problems that patients face, including suicidal ideation and possible relapse.  

This widely used practitioner resource and training tool is the definitive work on understanding and treating personality disorders from a cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) perspective. The prominent editors and contributors explain the nature of personality disorders and why they are so challenging to treat. Chapters addressing 12 specific disorders are organized around vivid, instructive clinical examples. The book provides up-to-date scientific knowledge about each disorder and describes effective strategies for differential diagnosis, case conceptualization, implementing individualized CBT interventions, and overcoming roadblocks. New to This Edition *Incorporates cutting-edge clinical approaches and research; expands the cognitive theory of personality disorder. *Chapters on neural mechanisms, cultural diversity issues, and depressive personality disorder. *Chapters on co-occurring disorders and management of clinical challenges. *Disorder-specific chapters now include sections on key treatment goals, progress and termination, and clinician self-care. *Discusses DSM-5 concepts and diagnostic criteria. *Reviews advances in assessing personality beliefs.

Emotion Focused Cognitive Therapy argues that it is time for a new focus in psychotherapy based on emotion, and presents an innovative approach to the treatment of clients with emotional disorders. Features an approach based on the latest work in cognition and emotion Offers psychologists an innovative way of working in therapy Draws on the strengths evidence-based cognitive behavioural and interpersonal approaches to psychotherapy Provides relevant case examples throughout the text Additional resources for the book available online here

One of the hallmarks of cognitive behavior therapy is its diversity today. Since its inception, over twenty five years ago, this once revolutionary approach to psychotherapy has grown to encompass treatments across the full range of psychological disorders. The Encyclopedia of Cognitive Behavior Therapy brings together all of the key aspects of this field distilling decades of clinical wisdom into one authoritative volume. With a preface by Aaron T. Beck, founder of the cognitive approach, the Encyclopedia features entries by noted experts including Arthur Freeman, Windy Dryden, Marsha Linehan, Edna Foa, and Thomas Ollendick to name but a few, and reviews the latest empirical data on first-line therapies and combination approaches, to give readers both insights into clients' problems and the most effective treatments available.      *  Common disorders and conditions: anxiety, depression,      OCD, phobias, sleep disturbance, eating disorders, grief, anger      *  Essential components of treatment: the therapeutic relationship,      case formulation, homework, relapse prevention      *  Treatment methods: dialectical behavior therapy, REBT,      paradoxical interventions, social skills training, stress inoculation,      play therapy, CBT/medicine combinations      *  Applications of CBT with specific populations: children,      adolescents, couples, dually diagnosed clients, the elderly,      veterans, refugees      *  Emerging problems: Internet addiction, chronic pain, narcolepsy       pathological gambling, jet lag All entries feature reference lists and are cross-indexed. The Encyclopedia of Cognitive Behavior Therapy capably fills practitioners' and educators' needs for an idea book, teaching text, or quick access to practical, workable interventions.

From leading experts in the field--a practicing clinical psychologist and a renowned psychotherapy researcher--this book synthesizes the evidence base for cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) and translates it into practical clinical guidelines. The focus is how clinicians can use current research findings to provide the best care in real-world practice settings. Within a case formulation framework, core cognitive and behavioral theories and techniques are described and illustrated with vivid case examples. The authors also discuss managing everyday treatment challenges; separating CBT myths from facts; and how to develop a successful CBT practice and optimize the quality of services.

This workbook elucidates the techniques clinicians will encounter using the cognitive experiential (psychodrama) group therapy (CEGT) model. This model incorporates cognitive behavioral and psychodramatic interventions to help identify and modify negative thinking, behavior, and interpersonal patterns. Beginning with a brief overview of cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) and psychodrama, the book highlights concepts and techniques that are most relevant to CEGT session content. The second half of the workbook provides a description of CEGT and what group members should expect through their engagement in this therapy. Featured throughout are tables and exercises that create pathways to challenge dysfunctional thinking along with blank worksheets to be used by group members located in the appendices. Readers will learn techniques to challenge negative thought patterns and increase engagement in positive and success-based experiences through clear guidelines for behavioral interventions to help move individuals from negativity to a more positive life space.

Multistep Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Eating Disorders: Theory, Practice, and Clinical Cases describes a novel model of cognitive behavior therapy (CBT) for eating disorders called multistep CBT-E (Enhanched). The treatment, derived from the transdiagnostic cognitive behavior theory of eating disorders, extends the range of applicability of standard CBT-E. It is designed to be applicable to three different levels of care (outpatient, intensive outpatient, inpatient), and to eating disorder patients of all diagnostic categories, ages, and BMI categories. Distinguishing multistep CBT-E is the adoption of a multi-step approach conducted by a multidisciplinary CBT-E team including psychologists, dietitians, and physicians, the inclusion of a family module for patients under eighteen years old, and the use of assisted eating and group sessions, in adjunct to individual psychotherapy in the intensive levels of care. The first eight chapters provide an overview of eating disorders, the cognitive behavior theory of eating disorders, how to build a CBT-E multidisciplinary team, how patients are assessed and prepared for the treatment, the general organization, procedures, and strategies involved in the three steps of multistep CBT-E treatment, and how multistep CBT-E can be adapted for adolescents. In order to highlight the flexibility of the multistep CBT-E approach, Section Two of the book provides a detailed description of three treated clinical cases. The first case illustrates how outpatient CBT-E was adapted to treat a professional sportswoman affected by an eating disorder; the second describes the procedures and strategies applied in intensive outpatient CBT-E to treat a patient who did not improve with standard outpatient CBT-E; and the third case illustrates the procedures and strategies typically applied in inpatient CBT-E and shows how it can be used to help a patient with a longstanding eating disorder who has failed to respond to several outpatient treatments. Each chapter gives a general description of the case in question and details the main procedures, strategies, and tools used from the assessment stage through to discharge. In addition, abridged transcripts of relevant clinical sessions are included, to give interesting insight into the practical implementation of multistep CBT-E, and the outcomes at the end of the treatment and follow-up are reported.

It is estimated that one in ten U.S. adults suffers from chronic insomnia. If left untreated, chronic insomnia reduces quality of life and increases risk for psychiatric and medical disease, especially depression and anxiety.The Overcoming Insomnia treatment program uses evidence-based cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) methods to correct poor sleep habits. CBT has been proven in multiple studies to improve sleep by reducing time spent in bed before sleep onset, reducing time spent awake after first sleep onset, andincreasing the quality and efficiency of sleep. This second edition has been thoroughly updated by the program developers, Jack D. Edinger and Colleen E. Carney. Patients use the Workbook in conjunction with the treatment they receive from their therapist. Patients will receive information abouthealthy sleep and the reasons for improving sleep habits, and the therapist will develop a program to address that patient's specific sleep problems. Use of a sleep diary, assessment forms, and other homework (all provided in the Workbook) allows patient and therapist to work together to develop aneffective sleep regimen tailored specifically for each patient.

This exciting new edition of The Philosophy of Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy (CBT) demonstrates how techniques and concepts from Socratic philosophy, especially Stoicism, can be integrated into the practise of CBT and other forms of psychotherapy. What can we learn about psychological therapy from ancient philosophers? Psychotherapy and philosophy were not always separate disciplines. Here, Donald Robertson explores the relationship between ancient Greek philosophy and modern cognitive-behavioural psychotherapy. The founders of CBT described Stoicism as providing the "philosophical origins" of their approach and many parallels can be found between Stoicism and CBT, in terms of both theory and practise. Starting with hypnotism and early twentieth century rational psychotherapy and continuing through early behaviour therapy, rational-emotive behaviour therapy (REBT), and cognitive-behavioural therapy (CBT), the links between Stoic philosophy and modern psychotherapy are identified and explained. This book is the first detailed account of the influence of Stoic philosophy upon modern psychotherapy. It provides a fascinating insight into the revival of interest in ancient Western philosophy as a guide to modern living. It includes many concepts and techniques, which can be readily applied in modern psychotherapy or self-help. This new edition, covering the growth in third-wave CBT, including mindfulness and acceptance-based therapies, will appeal to any mental health practitioner working in this area, as well as students and scholars of these fields.

Practicing Positive CBT: From Reducing Distress to Building Success reveals a new therapeutic approach that combines traditional CBT with Positive Psychology and Solution-Focused Brief Therapy. By shifting the focus of therapy from what is wrong with clients to what it right with them and from what is not working to what is, Positive CBT creates a more optimistic process that empowers clients and therapists to flourish. Increases client motivation and collaboration; allows therapeutic outcomes to be achieved in shorter timeframes and in a more cost-effective way Covers theory and applications, and provides a wide range of stories, exercises and case studies The author has a uniquely broad knowledge and experience as a therapist and trainer of CBT, PP, and SFBT

From Aaron T. Beck and colleagues, this is the definitive work on the cognitive model of schizophrenia and its treatment. The volume integrates cognitive-behavioral and biological knowledge into a comprehensive conceptual framework. It examines the origins, development, and maintenance of key symptom areas: delusions, hallucinations, negative symptoms, and formal thought disorder. Treatment chapters then offer concrete guidance for addressing each type of symptom, complete with case examples and session outlines. Anyone who treats or studies serious mental illness will find a new level of understanding together with theoretically and empirically grounded clinical techniques.

The Science of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy describes the scientific approach of CBT, reviews the efficacy and validity of the CBT model, and exemplifies important differences and commonalities of CBT approaches. The overarching principle of CBT interventions is that cognitions causally influence emotional experiences and behaviors. The book reviews recent mediation studies, experimental studies, and neuroimaging studies in affective neuroscience that support the basic model of CBT, as well as those that clarify the mechanisms of treatment change. Additionally, the book explains the interplay of cognition and emotion in CBT, specifies the treatment goals of CBT, discusses the relationship of cognitive models with medical models and associated diagnostic systems, and provides concrete illustrations of important general and disorder-specific considerations of CBT. Investigates the scientific foundation of CBT Explores the interplay of emotion and cognition in CBT Reviews neuroscience studies on the mechanisms of change in CBT Identifies similarities and differences in CBT approaches for different disorders Discusses CBT extensions and modifications Describes computer assisted applications of CBT

Until quite recently, therapist training was predicated on the notion that therapy is an ongoing process. Single-Session Integrated CBT (SSI-CBT) questions this. In this book, Windy Dryden takes long standing research on SSI therapy and transfers it to the field of CBT in a timely and conceptual application. Based on his extensive work demonstrating the benefits of single-session CBT to public and professional audiences, Dryden has developed a single-session approach for work in the therapy and coaching fields. Comprising 30 key points, and divided into two parts - Theory and Practice - this concise book covers the key features of SSI-CBT. It will offer essential guidance for students and practitioners experienced in CBT, as well as practitioners from other theoretical orientations who require an accessible guide to the distinctive theoretical and practical features of this exciting new approach.

Third Wave CBT Integration for Individuals and Teams: Comprehend, Cope and Connect introduces a therapy that starts from the perspective of the immediate experience of the individual. Developed by the authors, this new, transdiagnostic approach to mental health difficulties brings together the impact of past trauma and adversity on present coping (comprehend), and utilizes the latest in mindfulness and compassion-focused approaches to manage change (cope and connect).Already adopted in a variety of settings, the book demonstrates the approach's practicality and adaptability of the therapy. The text explores the cognitive science-based theory behind the approach and its place within the range of 'third wave'. It also includes a full manual of the linked individual and group therapy approach piloted in primary care IAPT, including case examples. The application of the approach to psychosis, its adoption in a variety of settings and the evidence base to date are also discussed. Third Wave CBT Integration for Individuals and Teams will be warmly welcomed by IAPT practicitioners looking to adopt a new, third wave CBT approach, as well as other CBT practitioners and clinical psychologists.

Grounded in current theory and treatment research, this highly practical book presents a comprehensive framework for assessing and treating health anxiety, including full-blown and milder (subclinical) forms of hypochondriasis. The current state of knowledge about these prevalent and costly problems is reviewed, and assessment methods and empirically supported treatments described. Clear, step-by-step recommendations are provided for engaging patients or clients, implementing carefully planned cognitive and behavioral interventions, and troubleshooting potential pitfalls. Important advances in pharmacotherapy for persons with health anxiety disorders are also discussed. Enhancing the utility of this clinician- and student-friendly resource are numerous case examples and sample dialogues, quick-reference tables and boxed material, and over 20 reproducible handouts and assessment forms.

Over the past 20 years, there has been growing interest in integration among psychotherapy theorists and practitioners. Historically, allegiance to specific theories or "systems" of psychotherapy was emphasized and even expected by particular "schools of thought." However, the current zeitgeist emphasizes common ground and convergent themes. Within this context is Adlerian theory/therapy, having originated in the first half of the 20th century relevant for today's integrative discussion. The diverse authors in this book demonstrate that the Adlerian approach soundly resonates with contemporary cognitive and constructivist therapies, and is indeed a relevant "voice" for inclusion in contemporary dialogues regarding integration. Part I includes chapters by Adlerian and Constructivist authors. Part II includes perspectives from Adlerian and Cognitive therapists. Part III presents responses to the prior chapters representing all three systems approaches.

Applying the Constructivist Approach to Cognitive Therapy goes beyond the traditional objectivist approach of uncovering the what of a client's dysfunctional thinking by helping client and therapist understand why the client thinks in a dysfunctional manner. This unique work demonstrates how this thinking can be uncovered through dreamwork, analytic hypnotherapy, ecstatic trance, and other spontaneous trance experiences such as the use of imagination, free association, and guided imagery. Utilizing hypnotherapeutic techniques, the author shows how clients can reframe these thoughts to achieve a healthier, more functional way of thinking. Replete with case studies and practical guidance, this text will help therapists take clients beyond a simple resolution of their problems and offer an avenue to greater personal growth, maturity, and creativity.

Constructivist psychotherapy focuses on the meaning that clients attribute to their world, and the way that this shapes their life and contributes to their difficulties. In this book, Robert A. Neimeyer, a leading figure in the field, provides a clear and accessible explanation of the key features of this approach. Constructivist Psychotherapy: Distinctive Features concentrates on the 30 key commitments that distinguish constructivism from other cognitive behavioural perspectives. Divided into two sections - Theory and Practice - this straightforward book is illustrated throughout with case material and recent research findings. Neimeyer provides us with a fresh perspective on familiar material, together with a clear, concise introduction to material that the reader may be less familiar with, making this book a valuable text for professionals in training as well as a source of new ideas for practising therapists of constructivist psychotherapy.

Psychotherapy has undergone major changes in recent years, with a variety of new approaches including cognitive-behavioural therapy joining the more traditional and widespread schools of thought. These new approaches all share the epistemological assumption of constructivism, which states that there are alternative ways of looking at events and that we interpret events according to how we see the world. Constructivist Psychotherapy reviews the constructivist trends in psychotherapy which link these new approaches, allowing the reader to enter an entirely new dialogue. The book traces constructivist thought, elaborating on Kelly's personal construct theory and the implications for psychotherapeutic theory and practice. Areas of discussion include: the therapist's understanding of the client's narrative a constructivist understanding of the person psychological constructivism and constructivist trends in psychotherapy Setting constructivist psychotherapy within its therapeutic, social and philosophical context and using case studies throughout, the book revisits 'Kellian' ideas and theories, bringing them up to date, to explore what it is to be a constructivist psychotherapist today. As such this book will be of interest to all psychotherapists, as well as anyone with an interest in the psychotherapeutic field.

Introducing a breakthrough, integrative approach to managing your borderline personality disorder (BPD). If you've been diagnosed with BPD you may feel a number of emotions--including shock, shame, sadness, abandonment, emptiness, or even anger. Even worse, you may be tempted to research your diagnosis online, only to find doomsday scenarios and terrible prognoses everywhere you click. Take a deep breath. You can get through this--and this workbook will help guide you. Despite what you may have read or been told, BPD is not the worst thing that can happen to you. Like many mental health issues, it manifests on a spectrum, and while some people may encounter extreme symptoms and consequences on one end, others may be less affected on the other. What do you all have in common? You likely experience difficulty balancing your emotions, thoughts, and behaviors. And you may even have trouble seeing yourself clearly--continuously switching from the hero to the villain of the story you've written about your life. So, how can you make sense of it all and start on the road to healing? Rather than utilizing a one-size-fits-all treatment, this groundbreaking and comprehensive workbook meets you where you are on your therapeutic journey, and provides an integrative approach to treating BPD drawing on evidence-based dialectical behavior therapy (DBT), acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT), cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), and interpersonal therapy. With this compassionate workbook, you'll gain a greater understanding of your BPD, uncover your own emotional triggers, and discover your own personal motivators for positive change. Your BPD has determined how you see and live your life, but it doesn't have to define you forever. With this workbook as your guide, you'll be ready to face your diagnosis head-on, and take those important first steps toward lasting wellness.

Case Formulation for Personality Disorders provides clinical guidance on how to build effective treatment plans for patients presenting with personality disorders. Anchored within a disorder-specific approach, the present volume reviews the evidence base of case formulation methodology. The book takes an integrative and differentiated approach to case formulation, with multiple methods of case formulation, all specifically adapted to the psychotherapy of personality disorders, illustrated with many case examples. Provides individualized assessment and measurement in practice Uses 18 case formulation methods for treating personality disorders Identifies evidence-based effective treatment Includes real life case examples

CBT for Psychological Well-Being in Cancer is the first clinical manual to target psychological well-being in cancer by combining skill sets from DBT and other well-researched approaches, providing clinical material in a clear session-by-session structure organized by topic. The first skills training manual in the field to provide an integrated session-by-session outline that clinicians can customize for their own needs Adaptive and contextualist in approach - Carlson integrates skill sets from DBT, ACT, behavioral activation, and motivational Interviewing to promote efficacy and cost-effectiveness The text provides a unique range of resources to support for clinicians, including session guides, specific interventions, client handouts, and invaluable measurement and tracking tools for those clinicians required to report outcomes The content can be flexibly deployed by clinicians into their existing work to meet the needs of specific patients in individual or group treatment contexts, by selecting the most appropriate sessions, skills, and handouts

Cutting Down provides a practical and accessible treatment programme based on Cognitive Behaviour Therapy (CBT) principles for young people who self-harm. This fully revised and updated second edition includes new techniques from 'third' wave CBT, Acceptance Commitment Therapy (ACT) and Dialectical Behaviour Therapy (DBT). This enriches the material and brings the concepts up to date. Another key addition to this new edition is the inclusion of strategies for young people who engage in suicidal behaviour. The manual is evidence based and focuses on a flexible and formulation driven model to direct treatment in around 15 sessions for young people and six sessions for parents and caregivers. It provides a clear structure for each session and an easy-to-follow outline on how the therapist should deliver each session. The content of each session is supported by handouts and worksheets which can be used within sessions or as homework between sessions. Enhanced with online resources, the workbook will be useful for all professionals working with young people who self-harm across a wide range of settings from schools, primary care and voluntary sector, to community mental health services and inpatient units.

Originally developed for the treatment of borderline personality disorder, dialectical behavior therapy, or DBT, has rapidly become one of the most popular and most effective treatments for all mental health conditions rooted in out-of-control emotions. However, there are limited resources for psychologists seeking to use DBT skills with individual clients. In the tradition of ACT Made Simple, DBT Made Simple provides clinicians with everything they need to know to start using DBT in the therapy room. The first part of this book briefly covers the theory and research behind DBT and explains how DBT differs from traditional cognitive behavioral therapy approaches. The second part focuses on strategies professionals can use in individual client sessions, while the third section teaches the four skills modules that form the backbone of DBT: core mindfulness, distress tolerance, emotion regulation, and interpersonal effectiveness. The book includes handouts, case examples, and example therapist-client dialogue--everything clinicians need to equip their clients with these effective and life-changing skills.

DBT Metaphors and Stories gives therapists and DBT skills trainers the skills they need to make effective use of dialectical behavior therapy and to help clients more deeply understand complex realities. Each page is devoted to explaining a specific DBT skill. The book is structured so that it can be used in several ways, including as a reference tool to look up specific skills the reader is struggling to understand or (for skills trainers) to teach. The book can also be read cover to cover, both for understanding the broad array of skills and as a source of motivation to devote one's self to regular practice of skills. It's a vital guide for trainers, therapists, and their clients interested in fully harnessing DBT's power to change lives.

Featuring more than 225 user-friendly handouts and worksheets, this is an essential resource for clients learning dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) skills, and those who treat them. All of the handouts and worksheets discussed in Marsha M. Linehan's DBT Skills Training Manual, Second Edition, are provided, together with brief introductions to each module written expressly for clients. Originally developed to treat borderline personality disorder, DBT has been demonstrated effective in treatment of a wide range of psychological and emotional problems. No single skills training program will include all of the handouts and worksheets in this book; clients get quick, easy access to the tools recommended to meet their particular needs. The 8 1/2" x 11" format and spiral binding facilitate photocopying. Purchasers also get access to a webpage where they can download and print additional copies of the handouts and worksheets. Mental health professionals, see also the author's DBT Skills Training Manual, Second Edition, which provides complete instructions for teaching the skills. Also available: Cognitive-Behavioral Treatment of Borderline Personality Disorder, the authoritative presentation of DBT, and Linehan's instructive skills training DVDs for clients--Crisis Survival Skills: Part One and This One Moment.

From Marsha M. Linehan--the developer of dialectical behavior therapy (DBT)--this comprehensive resource provides vital tools for implementing DBT skills training. The reproducible teaching notes, handouts, and worksheets used for over two decades by hundreds of thousands of practitioners have been significantly revised and expanded to reflect important research and clinical advances. The book gives complete instructions for orienting clients to DBT, plus teaching notes for the full range of mindfulness, interpersonal effectiveness, emotion regulation, and distress tolerance skills. Handouts and worksheets are not included in the book; purchasers get access to a webpage where they can download and print all the handouts and worksheets discussed, as well as the teaching notes. The companion volume is available separately: DBT Skills Training Handouts and Worksheets, Second Edition. New to This Edition *Handouts and worksheets (available online and in the companion volume) have been completely revised and dozens more added--more than 225 in all. *Each module has been expanded with additional skills. *Multiple alternative worksheets to tailor treatment to each client. *More extensive reproducible teaching notes (provided in the book and online), with numerous clinical examples. *Curricula for running skills training groups of different durations and with specific populations, such as adolescents and clients with substance use problems. *Linehan provides a concise overview of "How to Use This Book." See also DBT Skills Training Handouts and Worksheets, Second Edition, a spiral-bound 8 1/2" x 11" volume containing all of the handouts and worksheets and featuring brief introductions to each module written expressly for clients. Plus, Cognitive-Behavioral Treatment of Borderline Personality Disorder, the authoritative presentation of DBT. Also available: Linehan's instructive skills training DVDS for clients--Crisis Survival Skills: Part One and This One Moment.

A definitive new text for understanding and applying Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT). Offers evidence-based yet flexible approaches to integrating DBT into practice Goes beyond adherence to standard DBT and diagnosis-based treatment of individuals Emphasizes positivity and the importance of the client's own voice in assessing change Discusses methods of monitoring outcomes in practice and making them clinically relevant Lane Pederson is a leader in the drive to integrate DBT with other therapeutic approaches

Have you always wanted to learn how to use DBT with your clients but weren't sure where to start? Have you believed that only full-fidelity DBT works and that if you can't offer all the elements of DBT in your setting you shouldn't bother learning DBT? The authors address those questions and more with a practical guide for applying DBT skills to fit your client needs. Clearly written and easy to understand for all levels of DBT experience, the authors bring their extensive knowledge to light with creative ideas that work, clinical examples, treatment plans, practice vignettes, and strategies for adapting the skills across a variety of settings and age groups. Examples throughout this book will address issues such as: - Anger and Emotion Dysregulation - Depression - Substance Use Disorder - Anxiety - Impulse Control - Trauma - ODD - Conduct Disorder - Eating Disorders - Grief - Borderline Personality Disorder - Bipolar - Stress Management

Keep clients engaged, reinforce their knowledge and increase their ability to integrate DBT skills into their lives with this game-changing resource. The second edition of this much-loved toolbox contains a vast collection of worksheets, handouts, practices and games that therapists can use with clients, or to develop their own DBT skills. Let DBT experts, Cathy Moonshine and Stephanie Schaefer, guide you through sample vignettes and clinical presentations, sharpening your skills to use DBT with any client, in any setting. Included for easy reproduction are: - Skills worksheets - Detailed diary cards - Simplified and in-depth chain analysis - Posters and coloring pages to learn these skills - DBT BINGO - Crossword puzzles and word searches

Adolescents are more likely than any other age groups to engage in behaviors that contribute to injuries, violence, unintended pregnancies, sexually transmitted diseases, and reckless alcohol, tobacco, and drug use. At-risk adolescents may also exhibit signs of moodiness, aggression, and even self-injury, and these behaviors often cause parents, teachers, and clinicians to become extremely frustrated. Adolescents themselves may even believe that change is impossible. Drawing on proven-effective dialectical behavior therapy (DBT), Dialectical Behavior Therapy for At-Risk Adolescents is the first reader-friendly and easily accessible DBT book specifically targeted to mental health professionals treating adolescents who may be dangerous to themselves or others. If you work with adolescents who exhibit at-risk behavior, you know how important it is to take immediate action. However, you may also have trouble "breaking through" the barrier that these young people can build around themselves. This book can help. The DBT skills outlined in this book are evidence-based, and have been clinically proven to help build emotion regulation skills, which are useful for all age groups, though perhaps especially for the millions of at-risk adolescents experiencing depression, anxiety, anger, and the myriad behaviors that can result from these emotions. This book also includes practical handouts and exercises that can be used in individual therapy sessions, skills training groups, school settings, and when working with parents and caregivers. Adolescents stand at the precipice of the future, and the decisions they make now can have life-long impacts. By showing them how to manage their emotions and deal with the stresses that are common in day-to-day life, you are arming them with the tools they will need to succeed and thrive.

Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) has quickly become a treatment of choice for individuals with borderline personality disorder and other complicated psychiatric conditions. Becoming proficient in standard DBT requires intensive training and extensive supervised experience. However, there are many DBT principles and procedures that can be readily adapted for therapists conducting supportive, psychodynamic, and even other forms of cognitive behavioral treatments.Despite this, there is a dearth of easily accessible reading material for the busy clinician or novice. This new book provides a clinically oriented, user-friendly guide to understanding and utilizing the principles and techniques of DBT for non-DBT-trained mental health practitioners and is an ideal guide to DBT for clinicians at all levels of experience. Written by internationally recognized experts in suicide, self injury and borderline personality disorder, it features clinical vignettes, following patients through a series of chapters, clearly illustrating both the therapeutic principles and interventions.

A clear and effective approach to learning evidence-based DBT skills--now in a fully revised and updated second edition. Do you have trouble managing your emotions? First developed by Marsha M. Linehan for treating borderline personality disorder, dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) has proven effective as treatment for a range of other mental health problems, and can greatly improve your ability to handle distress without losing control and acting destructively. However, to make use of these techniques, you need to build skills in four key areas: distress tolerance, mindfulness, emotion regulation, and interpersonal effectiveness. The Dialectical Behavior Therapy Skills Workbook, a collaborative effort from three esteemed authors, offers evidence-based, step-by-step exercises for learning these concepts and putting them to work for real and lasting change. Start by working on the introductory exercises and, after making progress, move on to the advanced-skills chapters. Whether you're a mental health professional or a general reader, you'll benefit from this clear and practical guide to better managing your emotions. This fully revised and updated second edition also includes new chapters on cognitive rehearsal, distress tolerance, and self-compassion. Once you've completed the exercises in this book and are ready to move on to the next level, check out the authors' new book, The New Happiness Workbook.

This pragmatic workbook offers evidence-based skills grounded in dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) to help you find lasting relief from trauma and post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). If you've experienced trauma, you should know that there is nothing wrong with you. Trauma is a normal reaction to an abnormal event. Sometimes, the symptoms of trauma persist long after the traumatic situation has ceased. This is what we call PTSD--in other words, the "trauma after the trauma." This happens when the aftereffects of trauma--such anxiety, depression, anger, fear, insomnia, and even addiction--end up causing more ongoing harm than the trauma itself. So, how can you start healing? With this powerful and proven-effective workbook, you'll find practical exercises for overcoming trauma using mindfulness, interpersonal effectiveness, emotion regulation, and distress tolerance. You'll learn how to be present in the moment and identity the things that trigger your trauma. You'll also find activities and exercises to help you cope with stress, manage intense emotions, navigate conflict with others, and change unhealthy thought patterns that keep you stuck. Finally, you'll find practical materials for review and closure, so you can take what you've learned out into the world with you. If you're ready to move past your trauma and start living your life again, this workbook will help guide you, one step at a time. The practical interventions in this guide can be used on their own or in conjunction with therapy.

Dialectical Behavior Therapy with Adolescents is an essential, user-friendly guide for clinicians who wish to implement DBT for adolescents into their practices. The authors draw on current literature on DBT adaptation to provide detailed descriptions and sample group-therapy formats for a variety of circumstances. Each chapter includes material to help clinicians adapt DBT for specific clinical situations (including outpatient, inpatient, partial hospitalization, school, and juvenile-detention settings) and diagnoses (such as substance use, eating disorders, and behavioral disorders). The book's final section contains additional resources and handouts to allow clinicians to customize their treatment strategies.

Filling a tremendous need, this highly practical book adapts the proven techniques of dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) to treatment of multiproblem adolescents at highest risk for suicidal behavior and self-injury. The authors are master clinicians who take the reader step by step through understanding and assessing severe emotional dysregulation in teens and implementing individual, family, and group-based interventions. Insightful guidance on everything from orientation to termination is enlivened by case illustrations and sample dialogues. Appendices feature 30 mindfulness exercises as well as lecture notes and 12 reproducible handouts for "Walking the Middle Path," a DBT skills training module for adolescents and their families. Purchasers get access to a Web page where they can download and print these handouts and several other tools from the book in a convenient 8 1/2" x 11" size. See also Rathus and Miller's DBT Skills Manual for Adolescents, packed with tools for implementing DBT skills training with adolescents with a wide range of problems.

Dialectical Behaviour Therapy (DBT) is a psychotherapeutic approach used to treat individuals with complex psychological disorders, particularly chronically suicidal individuals with borderline personality disorder (BPD). The therapy articulates a series of principles that effectively guide clinicians in responding to problematic behaviours. Treated problems include, among others, attempting suicide, bingeing, purging, using illegal drugs and behaviours that directly impede the treatment. Dialectical Behaviour Therapy: Distinctive Features highlights theoretical and practical features of the treatment using extensive clinical examples to demonstrate how the theory translates into practice. This updated edition reviews recent modifications to the structure of the treatment and considers more recent research evidence for both the biosocial theory underpinning the treatment and treatment efficacy. The book provides a clear overview of a complex treatment, through a unique application of strategies and a discussion of a comprehensive treatment programme that structures the therapeutic journey for the client. The book will be of interest to clinicians wanting to develop their knowledge about the treatment, prior to formal training; post-graduate students in mental health seeking to learn how to conceptualize complex problems; DBT trained clinicians who require a useful précis of the treatment with clinical examples, and clients about to embark upon this treatment. This book provides a clear and structured overview of a complex treatment. It is written for both practising clinicians and students wishing to learn more about DBT and how it differs from the other cognitive behaviour therapies.

In this much-needed guide, two dialectical behavior therapists offer an activity-based workbook for kids who struggle with anger, mood-swings, and emotional and behavioral dysregulation. Using the skills outlined in this book, kids will be able to manage their emotions, get along with others, and do better in school. Childhood can often be a time of intense emotions. But if your child's emotions interfere with school, homework, or tests; alienate them from their peers; make it difficult to forge lasting friendships; or cause constant conflicts at home--it's time to make a change. You need help to calm the chaos now, rather than later. Building on the success of Don't Let Your Emotions Run Your Life and Don't Let Your Emotions Run Your Life for Teens, this is the first dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) activity skills workbook designed especially for kids. Designed for children ages 7 to 12, this essential guide will help kids manage difficult emotions and get along better with others. If you are frustrated or worried about your emotional child, the hands-on activities in this book--including child-friendly mindfulness practices--can help. By reading this book, kids will develop their own "skills tool box" for dealing with intense emotions as they arise, no matter where or when. This book has been selected as an Association for Behavioral and Cognitive Therapies Self-Help Book Recommendation--an honor bestowed on outstanding self-help books that are consistent with cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) principles and that incorporate scientifically tested strategies for overcoming mental health difficulties. Used alone or in conjunction with therapy, our books offer powerful tools readers can use to jump-start changes in their lives.

This second edition is the most comprehensive and readable DBT manual available with more skills than any other DBT book on the market. Beyond updates to the classic skills modules, clients and therapists will be enriched by added modules that include Dialectics, Cognitive Modification, Problem-Solving, and Building Routines as well as all-new, much-needed modules on addictions and social media. Designed for DBT therapists, eclectic and integrative therapists, and as a self-help guide for people interested in learning DBT skills, the straightforward explanations and useful worksheets contained within make DBT skills learning and practice accessible and practical for both skills groups and individual users.

Experiential Group Therapy Interventions with DBT provides group and individual therapists with proven experiential exercises that utilize dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) skills and original educational topics and have been successfully used nationwide to help treat patients with addiction and trauma. It introduces the advantages of using experiential therapy to facilitate groups for trauma and addiction and explains how DBT can help in regulating emotions and tolerating stress. This workbook contains concise plans and exercises for facilitating a group for a 30-day cycle. There is a theme for each day, original psychoeducational materials, experiential exercises, warm ups, and closing interventions.

Integrating CBT and Third Wave Therapies offers a thought-through approach to integrating evidence-based therapies. It provides help for all of us who are developing or have expertise in a variety of evidence-based approaches. The theoretical part of the book briefly reviews four therapies, namely: CBT, DBT, ACT and CFT. The authors identify core processes of change and examine how each therapy contributes to each core process, helping in the integration of all four. The text considers the influence of early adversity on later mental wellbeing, the theoretical underpinnings of mindfulness, behaviour analysis, reliving and re-scripting and dissociation. Theory and practice chapters are illustrated using case vignettes. The book will be useful for therapists to structure sessions with clients. It demonstrates how to follow a theoretical approach and a offers a therapeutic structure for integrated clinical work. It will be useful in reflective practice and supervision, and for students learning about a variety of therapeutic approaches.

Clinicians know that mental health disorders in adolescents may manifest externally as aggressiveness, opposition, or isolation from others. What's less clear is just how to move beyond these conduct and defiance issues to help teenage clients cooperate with treatment so they can build healthy social skills and values. Mode Deactivation Therapy for Treating Aggression and Oppositional Behavior in Adolescents combines the most effective aspects of cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), dialectical behavior therapy (DBT), acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT), and functional analytic psychotherapy (FAP) to meet the specific challenges of therapists working with angry, distrustful, or hostile adolescents. This evidence-based treatment program is effective with the most difficult-to-treat adolescents, especially those who struggle with anxiety, post-traumatic stress disorder, and depression. Complete with assessments and client worksheets, this approach encourages young clients to see alternatives to their antisocial core beliefs and equips them with skills for gaining control of their emotions and oppositional behavior. The skills these clients learn will be useful long after adolescence, and can redirect their lives dramatically.

Grounded in a wellness, strengths-based, and developmental perspective, Non-Suicidal Self-Injury is the ideal guide for counselors and other clinicians seeking to understand self-injurious behaviors without pathologizing them. The book covers topics not previously discussed in other works, including working with families, supervising counselors working with clients who self-injure, DSM-5 criteria regarding the NSSI diagnosis, NSSI as a protective factor for preventing suicidal behavior, and advocacy efforts around NSSI. In each chapter clinicians will also find concrete tools, including questions to ask, psychoeducational handouts for clients and their families, treatment handouts or treatment plans for counselors, and more. Non-Suicidal Self-Injury also includes real-life voices of individuals who self-injure as well as case vignettes to provide examples of how theoretical models or treatments discussed in this book immediately apply to practice.

Regulating Emotion the DBT Way is a practical guide to the DBT skill of 'Opposite Action', which helps clients develop the skill of up- or down-regulating their emotions when necessary. It is the skill that fosters emotional literacy in clients who have learned to fear or avoid painful feelings. Part A of the text introduces emotion theory, describes how to validate emotions, and explains how Linehan's 'Opposite Action' skill is used to regulate problematic responses. There are examples and analogies that can be shared with clients, and clinical examples to demonstrate the key points. There is a description of how DBT therapists contextualise emotion using chain analysis. Part B dedicates a chapter to each of the basic emotions and describes its signature features. A session scenario is included allowing the reader to see how the therapist coaches the skill of opposite action, elicits behavioural rehearsal, and gives corrective feedback. There are some tips on handling common issues specific to that emotion, based on the author's extensive experience. This book will be of interest to any therapist who wants to learn more about a behavioural approach to emotion such as psychologists, nurses, social workers, psychiatrists, counsellors, cognitive therapists, prison staff, and occupational therapists. It is an accessible explanation of emotion regulation for people who have already undertaken DBT training.

Your story is just beginning. In The Stronger than BPD Journal, influential BPD blogger, advocate, and peer educator Debbie Corso and psychotherapist Kathryn C. Holt offer guided writing activities to help you work through strong emotions, strengthen emotional resiliency, and build lasting relationships. If you have borderline personality disorder (BPD), you may have trouble managing your intense emotions, navigating day-to-day life, and maintaining healthy relationships. You may also have trouble seeing yourself clearly beyond your diagnosis. But you should know that--while BPD is a part of your life's story--BPD isn't the whole story. This unique journal offers gentle guided exercises based in dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) to help you balance your emotions, take time for self-care and exploration, and put a stop to overly critical self-judgment. You'll also learn to reduce stress, upsets, and triggers; gain resiliency; and improve communication with others. Writing can be a vehicle for profound self-reflection, exploration, and healing. This guided journal will help you take control of your emotions, gain insight into your unique mind, and start living the life you deserve. This book has been selected as an Association for Behavioral and Cognitive Therapies Self-Help Book Recommendation--an honor bestowed on outstanding self-help books that are consistent with cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) principles and that incorporate scientifically tested strategies for overcoming mental health difficulties. Used alone or in conjunction with therapy, our books offer powerful tools readers can use to jump-start changes in their lives.

This second edition of　Becoming an Emotionally Focused Therapist: The Workbook has been fully revised by expert therapists with advances in attachment science and emotionally focused therapy (EFT) practice, the integration of the "EFT Tango"--a guide to the EFT process--and new chapters on working with both individuals and families. Suitable as a companion volume to The Practice of Emotionally Focused Couple Therapy or as a standalone learning tool, it provides an easy road-map toward mastering the ins and outs of EFT with practice exercises, review questions, and compelling clinical examples. Invaluable for clinicians and students, this workbook takes the reader on an adventure: the quest to become a competent, confident, and passionate emotionally focused therapist.

Six in-depth case studies - three of which result in a good outcome and three in a poor outcome - exemplify the principles of EFT and show how treatment progresses. The six clients depicted vary widely in their background, personalities, and beliefs about the roots of their depression, vividly demonstrating the utility of EFT across a range of circumstances.

Compassion Focused Therapy: Clinical Practice and Applications offers evidence-based guidance and extensive insight into the science behind compassion focused therapy. 　 The first section of the book explores the evolution and physiological infrastructures of caring, and how compassion arises when humans use their complex cognitive competencies to address suffering deliberately and intentionally. With this framework and basis, the next sections of the book explore CFT applied to groups, specific interventions such as chair work, the importance of applying the principles of the therapy to oneself, the CFT therapeutic relationship, and a chapter offering a systematic review of the evidence for CFT. The third section offers a series of multi-authored chapters on interventions for a range of different mental health problems such as depression, anxiety, trauma, and many others.　 　 Being the first major clinical book on compassion focused therapy, with leading international researchers and clinicians addressing central problems, this landmark publication will appeal to psychotherapists from a variety of schools as well as being a vital resource for compassion focused therapists.

Emotion Focused Cognitive Therapy argues that it is time for a new focus in psychotherapy based on emotion, and presents an innovative approach to the treatment of clients with emotional disorders. Features an approach based on the latest work in cognition and emotion Offers psychologists an innovative way of working in therapy Draws on the strengths evidence-based cognitive behavioural and interpersonal approaches to psychotherapy Provides relevant case examples throughout the text Additional resources for the book available online here

In this seminal volume now available in paperback, master clinician and founder of emotion-focused therapy (EFT) Leslie Greenberg presents a comprehensive overview of EFT--a treatment that helps clients identify, experience, accept, explore, interpret, transform, and flexibly manage their emotions. Essentially, the approach helps clients increase their emotional intelligence and achieve greater well-being. EFT's influence has grown in the decade since the first edition of this book was published. There have been significant theoretical and empirical advances, and the approach has been applied successfully to new clinical populations. This second edition of Emotion-Focused Therapy incorporates the latest theory and research on EFT. It also includes a new chapter on specific marker-guided interventions and case formulation, as well as chapters on forgiveness and working with emotion in organizational leadership. This essential guide to EFT is required reading for all therapists who believe that accessing emotions can be a source of healing and wisdom.

Clients with Complex Trauma often suffer long-term challenges as a result of repeated exposure to violence and betrayals of trust by attachment figures in the form of child abuse and neglect. Disrupted narrative and emotional processes are common effects of complex trauma, and emotion-focused therapy for trauma (EFTT) is well suited to address these difficulties. This fully updated second edition presents theory, research, and practice guidelines for short-term, evidence-based individual treatment for adults experiencing the effects of complex relational trauma. The authors bring more than 25 years of research and clinical expertise to this evidence-based treatment model, which enables therapists to skillfully navigate the unique challenges facing these clients. Chapters discuss theoretical and practical aspects of EFTT alongside supporting research, allowing clinicians from various theoretical perspectives to either apply the complete package or integrate aspects of the model into their current practice. This comprehensive, and essential resource describes recent developments and updates in research, clinical practice, and training.

In Emotion-Focused Therapy for Depression, Leslie S. Greenberg and Jeanne C. Watson, well-regarded scholars and leading figures in the field, provide a manual for the emotion-focused treatment (EFT) of depression. This approach is supported by studies in which EFT for depression was compared with Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy, Client-Centered Therapy, and then both. The approach has been refined to apply specifically to the treatment of this pervasive and often intractable disorder. The authors discuss the nature of depression and its treatment, examine the role of emotion, present a schematic model of depression and an overview of the course of treatment, and suggest who might benefit.   Written with a practical focus rather than the more academic theoretical style of previous books that established the theoretical grounds and scientific viability of working with emotion in psychotherapy, this book aims to introduce practitioners to the idea of using this approach to work with a depressed population. The book covers theory, case formulation, treatment, and research in a way that makes this complex form of therapy accessible to all readers. Particularly valuable are the case examples, which demonstrate the deliberate and skillful use of techniques to leverage emotional awareness and thus bring about change.  

Emotionally Focused Therapy with African American Couples: Love Heals is an essential guide that integrates emotionally focused therapy (EFT) with cultural humility. It provides a pathbreaking, evidence-based model of couples work that reinforces the bond between partners in the face of race-based distress. Guillory explores and brings a deep understanding of the legacy of racial trauma, and the cultural strengths of African American couples by using real-life case studies. The chapters in the book focus on several key clinical issues in the field, such as communication problems, anxiety, infidelity, depression, and porn. Each case study is enhanced by a consultation with EFT master therapist Sue Johnson. The book is an essential text for students and mental health professionals looking to provide culturally competent therapeutic interventions. It will also appeal to psychologists, mental health workers, social workers, marriage and family therapists, and religious leaders.

This book introduces emotion focused family therapy (EFFT) as an evidence-based intervention for children through the integration of parent trauma treatment and emotion-focused techniques. A team of expert authors, including the founders of EFT and EFFT, contribute to the chapters, in which recent findings from longitudinal clinical trials are woven into a rich and deeply presented overview of using EFFT practically with clients. This immensely practical book also provides illustrative case studies, intervention strategies, and do's and don'ts at the end of each chapter.

Since its original publication in 1996, The Practice of Emotionally Focused Couple Therapy has been the definitive guide for couple therapists, supervisors, and students wishing to practice emotionally focused therapy. This cutting-edge third edition addresses recent changes in the field of couple therapy, including updated research results relating to clinical interventions, expanded understandings of emotion regulation, adult attachment and neuroscience, and dynamic EFT applications for a range of issues such as depression, anxiety, sexual disorders, and PTSD. Chapters introduce micro-interventions for use in EFT couple sessions, as well as a systematic presentation of a macro set of interventions called the EFT Tango. Clinical examples are included throughout, bringing the in-session process of change alive, and two case chapters offer in-depth commentaries of Stage 1 and Stage 2 EFT sessions. Written by the leading authority on emotionally focused therapy, this third edition is an essential reference on all aspects of EFT and its uses for mental health professionals in the field of couple and marital therapy.

From best-selling author, Susan M. Johnson, with over 1 million books sold worldwide! This essential text from the leading authority on Emotionally Focused Therapy, Susan M. Johnson, and colleague, T. Leanne Campbell, applies the key interventions of EFT to work with individuals, providing an overview and clinical guide to treating clients with depression, anxiety, and traumatic stress. Designed for therapists at all levels of expertise, Johnson and Campbell focus on introducing clinicians to EFIT interventions, techniques, and change processes in a highly accessible and practical format. The book begins by summarizing attachment theory and science - the theoretical basis of this model - together with the experiential approach to change in psychotherapy. Chapters describe the three stages of EFIT, macro-interventions, such as the EFIT Tango, and various micro-interventions through clinical exercises, case studies, and transcripts to demonstrate this model in practice with individuals, highlighting the unique benefits of EFT as a cross-modality approach for treating emotional disorders. With exercises interwoven throughout the text, this book is built to accompany in-person and online training, helping the practicing clinician offer targeted and empirically tested interventions that not only alleviate symptoms of distress but expand the client's emotional balance, agency, and sense of self. As the next major extension of the EFT approach, this book will appeal to therapists already working with couples and families as well as those just beginning their professional journey. Psychotherapists, psychologists, counselors, social workers, and mental health workers will also find this book invaluable.

The effort to surmount shame and formidable defenses in psychotherapy can trigger shame and self-doubt in therapists. Susan Warren Warshow offers a user-friendly-guide to help therapists move past common treatment barriers. This unique book avoids jargon and breaks down complex concepts into digestible elements for practical application. The core principles of Dynamic Emotional Focused Therapy (DEFT), a comprehensive treatment approach for demonstrable change, are illustrated with rich and abundant clinical vignettes.　 This engaging, often lyrical handbook emphasizes "shame-sensitivity" to create the safety necessary to achieve profound interpersonal connection. Often overlooked in treatment, shame can undermine the entire process. The author explains the "therapeutic transfer of compassion for self," a relational phenomenon that purposefully generates affective expression. She introduces a three-step, robust framework, The Healing Triad, to orient therapists to intervene effectively when the winds of resistance arise. Chapters clarify: Why we focus on feelings How to identify and move beyond shame and anxiety How to transform toxic guilt into reparative actions How to disarm defenses while avoiding ruptures This book is essential reading for both advanced and newly practicing mental health practitioners striving to access the profound emotions in their clients for transformative change.

What would it mean for Christian counseling and pastoral care to take seriously the idea that God intervenes in the world? What would it look like for therapists and pastors to see themselves as opening the door to a miraculous divine encounter? How would counseling change if the intervention of God was not merely a theoretical idea but a lived experience?This essay by Lydia C. W. Kim-van Daalen and Eric L. Johnson was originally published as chapter 10 in the book Transformative Encounters, edited by David W. Appleby and George Ohlschlager. Kim-van Daalen and Johnson highlight the power and importance of emotional experience, discuss why some Christians are skeptical of the emotions, propose a model of Christian emotion-focused therapy and offer a case study, along with reference and other recommended resources.Like the other essays in the full-length volume, Kim-van Daalen and Johnson build on Gary Collins's classic work, The Rebuilding of Psychology, to explore what a God-centered model of Christian counseling or pastoral care would look like. They share the conviction that God is able to bring about lasting psycho-spiritual change here and now. And they seek to encourage and aid counselors, pastors, church staff, clinical practitioners, academics and students in developing this kind of God-encountering, Christ-centered ministry of miraculous change.

Transforming Generalized Anxiety: An Emotion Focused Approach examines an approach to treating generalized anxiety disorder (GAD) which attempts to uncover the deeper, underlying emotional experiences that clients are afraid of. It also demonstrates how these painful experiences can be transformed in therapy into a form of emotional resilience by generating experiences of self-compassion and healthy, boundary setting, protective anger. Though most of the literature on treating GAD is dominated by Cognitive Behavior Therapy, this book presents emotion-focused therapy as an alternative treatment of this condition. The emotional resilience this particular approach instils serves as a resource when encountering triggers of emotional vulnerability, but also decreases the client's need to avoid hitherto feared triggers and the emotional experiences they bring. Developed in a series of research studies, and illustrated with reference to case examples, this book offers a practical, theoretically informed, evidence based guide, to conducting therapy with clients. Using clinical material, and applying the outcome of a series of research studies, Transforming Generalized Anxiety will equip psychotherapists and counsellors with the means to help GAD clients transform core painful experiences into a sense of empowerment and inner confidence.

In psychotherapy, as in life, all significant emotions are embedded in important stories, and all significant stories revolve around important emotional themes. Yet, despite the interaction between emotion and narrative processes, emotion-focused therapy (EFT) and narrative-informed therapies have evolved as separate clinical approaches. In this book, Lynne Angus and Leslie Greenberg address this gap and present a groundbreaking, empirically based model that integrates working with narrative and emotion processes in EFT. According to Angus and Greenberg's narrative-informed approach to EFT, all successful psychotherapy entails the articulation, revision, and deconstruction of clients' maladaptive life stories in favor of more life-enhancing alternatives. Because emotions and narratives interact to form meaning and sense of self, the evocation and articulation of emotions is critical to changing life narratives. Individual chapters describe how the interaction between emotion and narrative creates a constantly evolving sense of self; how clinicians can address both narrative and emotion processes to help clients create more adaptive, empowering meanings and sense of self; and the importance of a strong therapeutic alliance. Engaging, in-depth case studies at the end of the book illustrate how the model can be applied to treatment of depression and emotional trauma.

Integrating the latest in attachment theory and research into the use of EMDR. Much has been written about trauma and neglect and the damage they do to the developing brain. But little has been written or researched about the potential to heal these attachment wounds and address the damage sustained from neglect or poor parenting in early childhood. This book presents a therapy that focuses on precisely these areas. Laurel Parnell, leader and innovator in the field of eye-movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR), offers us a way to embrace two often separate worlds of knowing: the science of early attachment relationships and the practice of healing within an EMDR framework. This beautifully written and clinically practical book combines attachment theory, one of the most dynamic theoretical areas in psychotherapy today, with EMDR to teach therapists a new way of healing clients with relational trauma and attachment deficits. Readers will find science-based ideas about how our early relationships shape the way the mind and brain develop from our young years into our adult lives. Our connections with caregivers induce neural circuit firings that persist throughout our lives, shaping how we think, feel, remember, and behave. When we are lucky enough to have secure attachment experiences in which we feel seen, safe, soothed, and secure--the "four S's of attachment" that serve as the foundation for a healthy mind--these relational experiences stimulate the neuronal activation and growth of the integrative fibers of the brain. EMDR is a powerful tool for catalyzing integration in an individual across several domains, including memory, narrative, state, and vertical and bilateral integration. In Laurel Parnell's attachment-based modifications of the EMDR approach, the structural foundations of this integrative framework are adapted to further catalyze integration for individuals who have experienced non-secure attachment and developmental trauma. The book is divided into four parts. Part I lays the groundwork and outlines the five basic principles that guide and define the work. Part II provides information about attachment-repair resources available to clinicians. This section can be used by therapists who are not trained in EMDR. Part III teaches therapists how to use EMDR specifically with an attachment-repair orientation, including client preparation, target development, modifications of the standard EMDR protocol, desensitization, and using interweaves. Case material is used throughout. Part IV includes the presentation of three cases from different EMDR therapists who used attachment-focused EMDR with their clients. These cases illustrate what was discussed in the previous chapters and allow the reader to observe the theoretical concepts put into clinical practice--giving the history and background of the clients, actual EMDR sessions, attachment-repair interventions within these sessions and the rationale for them, and information about the effects of the interventions and the course of treatment.

Hailed as the most important method to emerge in psychotherapy in decades, Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing therapy (EMDR) has successfully treated more than one million sufferers worldwide for trauma-related conditions, as well as phobias and other experience-based disorders. EMDR is the essential guide to this remarkable therapy, written by its pathbreaking creator Francine Shapiro.   Drawing on the experiences of thousands of clinicians as well as a vast research literature on depression, addiction, PTSD, and other disorders, Shapiro explains how painful life experiences are physically stored in our brains, making us feel and act in counterproductive ways, and how EMDR therapy can bring relief, often in a remarkably short period of time. EMDR is essential reading for practicing psychotherapists and anyone who seeks to understand why we hurt, how we heal, and how we get better.  

This book guides therapists trained in EMDR in the successful integration of the creative arts therapies to make the healing potential of EMDR safer and more accessible for patients who present with complex trauma. Contributors from the respective fields of creative and expressive arts therapies offer their best ideas on how to combine EMDR with these therapies for maximum benefit for people from diverse backgrounds, orientations, and vulnerable populations. Chapters offer detailed case studies and images, insightful theoretical approaches, and how-to instructions to creatively enhance clinical work. Additionally, the book addresses current critical issues in the field, including the importance of an integrative and open approach when addressing cultural, racial and diversity issues, and creative interventions with clients through teletherapy. Creative arts therapy practitioners such as art therapists, play therapists, and dance/movement therapists will find this a compelling introductory guide to EMDR.

Initially regarded as one of the most peculiar methods of psychotherapy ever devised, EMDR (eye movement desensitization and reprocessing) was introduced to psychotherapists 11 years ago when Dr. Francine Shapiro reported demonstrable rapidly effective treatment results. An early endorsement by the late Dr. Joseph Wolpe, a founder of behavior therapy, and confirmatory research studies have led to wide and rapid acceptance by practitioners. Dr. Howard Lipke, the first clinician authorized by Dr. Shapiro to independently offer EMDR training, has written a book which elaborates on Shapiro's Accelerated Information Processing model in offering what Lipke calls the Four Activity Model (FAM) of Psychotherapy. This model advances the integration of EMDR theory and practice with dynamic, behavioral and humanistic methods, as well as with previous prominent integrative models. Recognizing the commonalities in human healing/growth traditions, the text also offers therapeutic suggestions for use of EMDR that rely on the wisdom of previously established psychotherapies as well as that of religion and philosophy. While there is an emphasis on combat-related psychological problems, Dr. Lipke demonstrates how combat trauma and treatment contain the elements of a broad range of potentially traumatic events and the treatment of destructive stress reactions. Indeed, Dr. Lipke's EMDR and Psychotherapy Integration has helped satisfy the need for a scholarly work on this demonstrably effective method of psychotherapy.

In this groundbreaking work, Mark Dworkin, an EMDR teacher, facilitator, and long-time practitioner, explores the subtle nuances of the therapeutic relationship and the vital role it plays in using Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing (EMDR) with traumatized clients. Showing how relational issues play a key role in each phase of EMDR treatment, the author provides tools for the therapist to more efficiently apply this method in the treatment of trauma victims and form a stronger and healthier relationship with the patient. A standard reference for all practitioners working to heal the wounds of trauma, this book will be an essential resource for the effective application of EMDR.

EMDR originator Francine Shapiro explores the latest developments and theoretical perspectives on, and clinical implications of, this complex psychotherapy approach originally developed to treat post-traumatic stress disorder. Leading spokespersons of all major schools of psychotherapy explore how EMDR meshes with their approaches, identifying the elements and outcomes salient to their world view. They offer guidelines and techniques, amply illustrated, across a range of problems and disorders, including depression, attachment disorder, social phobia, generalized anxiety disorder, body image disturbance, marital discord, and existential angst. From this diversity of viewpoints emerges a picture of similarities, differences, and strengths across disciplines and suggestions and opportunities for more robust and comprehensive treatment.

EMDR in Family Systems provides clinicians with a clear account of the EMDR process and a comprehensive, step-by-step approach to healing trauma through integrating EMDR with other therapeutic tools. The book provides a unique protocol utilizing numerous evidence-based diagnostic assessments; in-depth psychoeducation on attachment issues, Internal Family Systems therapy, and mindfulness; and Metaframeworks, a Family Systems modality, as a model to enhance EMDR. Filled with a wealth of information on the latest clinical studies on topics from the neurobiology of trauma to the effectiveness of mindfulness practices in EDMR, this book will open up a host of productive new avenues for EMDR therapists to pursue with their clients.

This edited collection--a follow-up to Shapiro's successful EMDR Solutions--presents step-by-step instructions for implementing EMDR approaches to treat a range of issues, written by leading EMDR practitioners. The how-to approach, mixed with ample clinical wisdom, will help clinicians excel when using EMDR to treat their clients. The units include: A comprehensive compendium of EMDR interventions for Depression, it begins with Robin Shapiro's Assessment, Trauma-Based and Endogenous Depression chapters, continues with Jim Knipe's Shame-Based Depression chapter, and ends with Shapiro's Attachment-Based chapter. The eight chapters of the Eating Disorder unit cover all the bases. From etiology to neurology through Preparation phases and treatment strategies, you'll learn how to work with Bulimia, Anorexia, Body Dysmorphia, Binge Eating Disorder, disorders of Desire and more. Andrew Seubert is the ring leader. The other writers are Janie Scholom, Linda Cooke, Celia Grand, DaLene Forester, Janet McGee, Catherine Lidov, and Judy Lightstone. Performance, Coaching, and Positive Psychology unit emphasizes strengths, skills, focus, and whatever gets in the way of reaching the goal. David Grand shares his foundational 15 Strategies for Performance enhancement. Ann Marie McKelvey integrates EMDR with Coaching and Positive Psychology. The Complex Trauma unit includes Katie O'Shea's useful and user-friendly Preparation Methods and Early Trauma Protocol, Sandra Paulsen and Ulrich Lanius's brilliant collaboration Integrating EMDR with Somatic and Ego State Interventions, Liz Massiah's hair-raising Intrusive Images chapter, and Shapiro's treatment strategies for OCPD. Robin Shapiro gives an overview of Medically-Based Trauma and her strategies for successful treatment of Multiple Chemical Sensitivities. Katherine Davis shows us how Post-Partum "Depression" is often treatable Post-Partum PTSD. Ronald Ricci and Cheryl Clayton tell us how to use EMDR in our work with Sex Offenders and their complete therapeutic milieu. Martha S. Jacobi develops our "third ear" for using EMDR with Religious and Spiritually-Attuned clients. Contributors include: Cheryl Clayton, LCSW, Linda J. Cooke, LCSW, BCD, DaLene Forester, PhD, LMFT, David Grand, PhD., The Reverend Martha S Jacobi, M.Div., LCSW, Jim Knipe, PhD, Dr. Ulrich Lanius, Catherine Lidov, MSW, LCSW, Judy Lightstone, PhD, MA, MS, Elizabeth Massiah , MSW, RSW, Reg. Psychologist, Janet McGee, LCSW, Ann Marie McKelvey, LPCC, PCC, Katie O'Shea, MS, LMHC, Sandra Paulsen, PhD, Ronald J. Ricci, PhD, Janie Scholom, BSN, LCSW, Andrew Seubert, LPC, NCC.

Note to Readers: Publisher does not guarantee quality or access to any included digital components if book is purchased through a third-party seller. Praise for the Second Edition: This book is a must-have for any newly trained EMDR therapist. Dr. Hensley, drawing from her years of experience and many conversations with Dr. Francine Shapiro, clearly and succinctly addresses the kinds of clinical questions that typically arise for new clinicians and does so in a way that is incredibly supportive and encouraging. The EMDR Therapy Primer is the perfect companion to Shapiro's seminal textbook. -Deborah Korn, PhD. This book presents EMDR as a comprehensive therapeutic approach and informs the clinician how to integrate EMDR into clinical practice. EMDR concepts are clearly explained and illustrated with many case examples. It is informative, well-written, and an excellent resource that expands EMDR basic training for the clinician. -- Roger Solomon, PhD - This book has been an invaluable resource as a one-stop shop for EMDR therapists. Thank you for the gift of the 3rd edition! -- Deany Laliotis, LICSW Barbara Hensley's book, An EMDR Therapy Primer: From Practicum to Practice, is written as a primer and companion to Francine Shapiro's EMDR texts. It is a step-by-step overview of the foundations of EMDR therapy presented in easily accessible, conversational language, and helps both new and experienced clinicians to maximize their preparation and skills in using EMDR safely, confidently, and effectively. By providing concise coverage of the AIP model and EMDR principles, protocols, and procedures, and by addressing the types of targets accessed during the EMDR process, the book expertly summarizes the eight phases of EMDR with myriad examples so core content can be easily grasped. The third edition is fully revised to include case examples on treating specific populations and issues - transgender issues, military personnel, children, and disaster response. The author has ensured that all relevant new information on components of memory, precepts of EMDR therapy, and adaptive information processing has been fully integrated into the text, making this the most up-to-date book available on the foundations of EMDR therapy. An eBook is included with the purchase of the print edition.New to the Third Edition: New chapter on working with special populations including the transgender population, children, military personnel, and disaster responseExpanded Shapiro metaphors and introduced new informational plateau embracing social connection and belongingKey Features: Like having a tutor in your pocketBlends text, clinical examples, scripts, and derailment possibilities to explore and explain the eight phases of EMDRDescribes core content in clear, easy-to-understand languageUses case histories, dialogues, and transcripts of successful EMDR sessions with explanations of treatment rationaleDetails strategies and techniques for dealing with challenging clients, high levels of abreaction, and blocked processingDelivers abundant diagrams, tables, and illustrations to illuminate conceptsHelps clinicians to guide clients smoothly through the EMDR process

Cover; Title; Copyright; Contents; Preface; References; Acknowledgments; Share EMDR Toolbox: Theory and Treatment of Complex PTSD and Dissociation, Second Edition; Part I: An Adaptive Information Processing Framework for Treating Complex PTSD; Chapter 1: The Need for a Theoretical Framework and Additional "Tools" for Using EMDR With Complex PTSD; References; Chapter 2: Traumatic Memory and EMDR, When Dual Attention Is Possible; EMDR When the Client is Able to Maintain Dual Attention; The Crucial Importance of Dual Attention; The Therapeutic Shifts of EMDR are not Primarily Cognitive.
Specific Effects of BLSReferences; Part II: Adaptive Information Processing Methods for Resolving Psychological Defenses; Chapter 3: An Adaptive Information Processing Model for Treating Psychological Defenses; The Effects of BLS on Different Types of Personality Parts; Psychological Defense and Vulnerability to Dissociative Abreaction; Other Examples of Defense; References; Chapter 4: EMDR With Avoidance; Example: The Level of Urge to Avoid (0-10) Method of Targeting Avoidance; Back to Target; Example: The "What's Good About . . .?" Method for Targeting an Avoidance Defense; Back to Target.
Avoidance Defenses within the Internal Family Systems ModelInstalling Avoidance as a Resource; Constructive Avoidance; References; Chapter 5: Targeting Idealization Defenses; Identifying the Problem in the Present; Lopa Procedures; Interweave to Facilitate Healing of an Unfinished Relationship; References; Chapter 6: Treating Addictive Disorders With Adaptive Information Processing Methods; References; Part III: An Adaptive Information Processing Model for Treating Dissociative Personality Structure; Chapter 7: Treating Dissociation Within an Adaptive Information Processing Model.
The Origins of DissociationReferences; Chapter 8: The Basic Framework for the Preparation Phase; References; Chapter 9: Preparation: The Language of Ovals; Attachment to the Perpetrator; References; Chapter 10: Preparation: Drawings; Drawings by Clients; The Dissociative Table, or Conference Room Method; References; Chapter 11: Loving Eyes: "Looking" From One Part to Another; Situations in Which Dual Attention is not Initially Possible; Steps in the Loving Eyes Procedure; Example: Loving Eyes Method as an Intervention When there is "Too Much" Disturbance.
Example: Loving Eyes as an Intervention When there is "Too Little" DisturbanceReferences; Chapter 12: Treating Defensive Shame; References; Chapter 13: The CIPOS Procedure; References; Chapter 14: The Persistence of Dissociative Personality Structure and the Internal Healing Dialogue (IHD) Procedure; The Internal Healing Dialogue Procedure; References; Part IV: Case Examples; Chapter 15: Veronica; References; Chapter 16: Doug; Reference; Chapter 17: Rhonda; References; Chapter 18: Some Closing Thoughts; Index.

This one-stop resource focuses on applying EMDR scripted protocols to medical-related conditions. Edited by a leading EMDR scholar and practitioner, it delivers a wide range of step-by-step protocols that enable beginning clinicians as well as seasoned EMDR clinicians, trainers, and consultants alike to enhance their expertise more quickly when working with clients who present with medical-related issues such as eating and body image dysregulation, relationship distortion, chronic pain, and maladaptive self-care behaviors. The scripts are conveniently outlined in an easy-to-use, manual style template, facilitating a reliable, consistent format for use with EMDR clients. The scripts distill the essence of the standard EMDR protocols. They reinforce the specific parts, sequence, and language used to create an effective outcome, and illustrate how clinicians are using this framework to work with a variety of medical-related issues while maintaining the integrity of the AIP model. Following a brief outline of the basic elements of EMDR procedures and protocols, the book focuses on applying EMDR scripted protocols to such key medical issues as eating and body image dysregulation, chronic pain experiences such as migraine and fibromyalgia, and maladaptive self-care behaviors. It includes summary sheets for each protocol to facilitate gathering information, client documentation, and quick retrieval of salient information while formulating a treatment plan. Protocols for clinician self-care add further to the book's value. Key Features: Encompasses a wide range of step-by-step scripts for medical-related issues Includes scripted protocols and summary sheets in strict accordance with the AIP model Facilitates the rapid development of practitioner expertise Outlined in convenient manual-style template Includes scripts for EMDR treatment of clients with eating disorders and body image dysregulation, headaches, fibromyalgia, relationship distortion, maladaptive self-care behaviors, and more

Starting with the Foreword by Daniel Siegel, MD, the Handbook demonstrates in superb detail how you can combine EMDR's information processing approach with family systems perspectives and therapy techniques. An impressive and needed piece of work, Handbook of EMDR and Family Therapy Processes provides a clear and comprehensive bridge between individual and family therapies.

The book offers practical guidance and strategies to avoid the common pitfalls of EMDR practice through the 8-phase protocol. Chapters will include Frequently Asked Questions about subjects, such as confidence and other "horror stories" that are often heard by EMDR therapists. The text proposes to guide those therapists into a safer way of working while encouraging them to access accredited training and supervision for their practice. The scope of the book is limited to EMDR practice with adults. Key Features of this Book: Case studies illustrate common pitfalls and strategies for preventing them FAQ's and "Whatever you do, don't do this" provided for each stage Narratives from EMDR clients offer insight for the practitioner

Integrating Relational Psychoanalysis and EMDR: Embodied Experience and Clinical Practice provides contemporary theoretical and clinical links between Relational Psychoanalysis, attachment theory, neuroscience, and Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing, all of which bring both the patient's and analyst's embodied experience into the forefront of clinical thinking and practice. The author grounds an in-depth view on the ways psychoanalysis and EMDR can be effectively integrated to complement each other through a presentation of fundamental concepts and an abundance of insightful and moving clinical vignettes. Hemda Arad outlines the theoretical and clinical concepts that allow the integration of Relational Psychoanalysis with EMDR's unique contributions, specifically appreciating the neurological and embodied experience in an individual's development in relation to the classic talking cure's approach to dealing with "big T" trauma and with "small t" everyday attachment-related trauma. Arad describes a view of a modified EMDR approach capable of reaching many patients, beyond the trauma work for which it originally became known, in order to lend its more embodied approach to the advancement of the relational endeavor. Vivid clinical illustrations, chosen to elucidate theoretical concepts, make the complex theoretical ideas more accessible. The clinical portions illustrate a range of ways that EMDR and relational work, which may at first seem incompatible, may be integrated to help therapists navigate the two methods. Integrating Relational Psychoanalysis and EMDR: Embodied Experience and Clinical Practice will appeal to psychoanalysts, psychoanalytic psychotherapists and psychodynamic therapists who wish to learn about the relational tradition in theory and practice or are seeking a way to integrate their work with other versatile approaches such as EMDR, as well as advanced students studying across these areas and EMDR clinicians who would like to broaden the scope of their skills.

Drawing on many years of personal experience and that of numerous peers from around the world, the authors of Light in the Heart of Darkness address issues confronted by all clinicians attempting to respond to the psychological aftermath of man's inhumanity to man. Focusing on the application of EMDR to survivors' traumatic experiences, this book covers a wide range of subject matter including school violence, 'near-war' experiences, refugees, combat soldiers, children, and emergency service workers. Using their experiences in humanitarian relief efforts, the authors provide useful information to all clinicians interested in participating in such activities. The book also includes extensive case histories as well as a 'consumer's report' from a war medic whose chronic PTSD was successfully treated with EMDR.

The second edition of this groundbreaking work incorporates f new neuroscientific and psychological research related to human development, traumatic stress, disorders of attachment, and information processing, and its implications for EMDR practice., The book delivers critical new neurobiological research on procedural and emotional learning, early-acquired relational patterns, inter-corporality, and empathy. Drawing from contemporary neuroscience's increased understanding of emotions and the significance of mirror neurons, the book demonstrates the importance of affective resonance and its effect on neuroplasticity as a prerequisite for any enduring change in cognition, behavior, and emotion. The second edition also examines in further depth the relationship between stress, trauma, and immune function in regard to immunoinflammmatory illnesses and the implications for their treatment. An additional 20 syndromes are examined, in addition to the 11 syndromes discussed in the first edition. New to the Second Edition: Delivers groundbreaking neuroscientific and psychological research related to human development, traumatic stress, attachment disorders, and information processingUnderscores the importance of emotion as fundamental for changeAddresses the dominance of right hemispheric communications that foster procedural and emotional learningExamines the implicit nature of early-acquired relational patterns, inter-corporality, and empathyCovers the relationship between stress, trauma, and immune function regarding immunoflammatory illnesses and their treatment Key Features: Provides a neurobiological foundation that informs our understanding of human development, attachment disorders, and information processingExamines biological underpinnings of EMDR regarding successful treatment outcomes for attachment disorders, stress, and dissociationExplicates disorders as outcomes of chronically dysregulated, evolutionarily based, biological action systemsIllustrates EMDR's sensorial input to the brain as a neural catalyst that can help to repair dysfunctional neural circuitryIncludes illustrative neural maps

Sensorimotor-Focused EMDR combines two hugely influential and effective therapies, EMDR therapy and sensorimotor psychotherapy, to provide a new approach. In doing so, the book supports the widely held view of psychotherapists that in trauma the primary store of neurological information is somatic rather than cognitive. Many therapists trained in EMDR find that additional resources are needed for patients who present with symptoms of complex trauma and dissociation. This is because EMDR is primarily a top-down approach based on CBT, with the addition of bilateral stimulation (BLS) in visual, tactile and auditory modalities. By contrast, Sensorimotor-Focused EMDR takes a body-based and bottom-up approach that seeks to resolve trauma by reprocessing information at multiple levels - in the gut-brain, the heart-brain and the head-brain, as well as in the endocrine, immune and nervous systems. Fully revised since The Art of BART (2015), the book looks at the latest advances in neuroscience, including research into the effectiveness of psychotherapy and the mysteries of consciousness and the development of mind. It also looks at the role of newly discovered organs, the mesentery and the interstitium, and provides clear anatomical evidence for the communication of biophotons in energy channels known as the primo vascular system. SF-EMDR is the only therapy that fully integrates Western theories of affective neuroscience with Eastern observations on activation of chakras, pranas and energies, and in doing so it offers strong potential for enhanced outcomes and optimized performance for patients.

Transforming Performance Anxiety Treatment: Using Cognitive Hypnotherapy and EMDR offers a much needed and different approach to this issue, using two psychodynamic therapies which work to bring about rapid and long-lasting change. Using nine reflexive case studies, the author examines two little used interventions, cognitive hypnotherapy (CH) and eye movement desensitisation and reprocessing (EMDR). The basic theories of cognitive anxiety and the emotions that underpin this condition are explored. The principles and protocols of CH and EMDR are explained, and how these psychodynamic therapies are adapted to effect permanent change. The first book to examine these treatments for this condition, Transforming Performance Anxiety Treatment will be of interest for practitioners and therapists in training, as well as educators, professionals, and therapists working within competitive sports.

1. Creating Meaning in Young Adulthood explores how young adults find self-empowerment in the aftermath of existential trauma by creating meanings in life through their relationships with the world. 2. People will want to buy this book because it outlines how to cultivate growth-promoting relationships with young adults that have experienced existential crises, in order to provide the necessary resources that support healing, well-being, and enlightenment. 3. Readers will choose this book over competitors for two main reasons: First, it utilizes the current research literature on the COVID-19 pandemic as an illustration of young adults' existential trauma. Second, the book synthesizes unique multicultural perspectives and research literature to contemporary humanistic and existential research. The book also contains case studies that explore 3 young adults' journeys to create meaning through their relationships with caring adults, animals, nature, and within solitude.

Existential-humanistic therapy melds European existential philosophy -- which values self-inquiry, struggle, and responsibility -- with the American tradition of spontaneity, optimism, and practicality. In this updated edition of their popular book, Kirk Schneider and Orah Krug demonstrate how this unique approach can help clients free themselves from self-imposed limitations and develop a deeper understanding of their authentic life goals by cultivating skills such as experiential reflection. Schneider and Krug explore existential-humanistic therapy's theoretical and historical underpinnings, its empirical foundations, the therapeutic process and mechanisms of change, as well as future developments. Detailed case examples vividly illustrate the work of existential-humanistic therapy, highlighting key takeaways that are equally accessible and valuable to graduate students and veteran practitioners. New to this revised edition is an increased focus on a more integrative perspective, which makes existential-humanistic therapy applicable to a wider array of settings and diagnostic populations. This flexibility also makes it more adaptable to other therapeutic approaches and expands its influence on clinical psychology as a whole.

Providing an overview of essential topics in multicultural psychology, Humanistic Approaches to Multiculturalism and Diversityfocuses on the intersection of humanistic psychology and multiculturalism, including history, theory, research, and practice. The authors examine the unique contributions of humanistic psychology to multicultural psychology on topics often ignored, such as cultural empathy and indigenous psychology and diversity. The book critiques and rectifies previous failures to adequately engage multicultural issues by providing methods for integrating multicultural psychology and humanistic therapy. Readers will find that each chapter advances scholarship through a dialogue with multicultural perspectives and builds a foundation for future scholarship and clinical practice. This book will be of great interest to mental health professionals interested in humanistic and existential psychology.

This book introduces the concept of the "Person One Could Have Become" and shows the importance of mourning for individuals with traumatic experiences. The Person One Could Have Become is conceptualized as personality and physical characteristics that could have emerged if an individual, at the right time, had received or opted for an appropriate quantity and quality of stimuli and experiences, which in turn would have enabled the person to make more mature and independent choices. Consequences of potentially traumatic events bear non-linear, meta-folding, and multicontextual meaning unique to each being-in-the-world. Many people with a history of trauma tend to mystify their existence in order to survive. This book contains an overview of the ramifications of abuse and neglect on personality, as well as the consequences of pregnancy loss and the specific loss of possibility and its co-occurrence with abuse and neglect. It looks at examples from daily life and two cases of traumatized individuals who differ in their background and experience of trauma, as well as in their struggles during psychotherapy. This book is not intended as a treatment manual, nor does it advocate for any particular therapeutic approach. It is, rather, an encouragement of a way of living. Indeed, a reasonable mourning of the Person One Could Have Become may set the individual free--also such with the history of trauma--for the road beyond the traditional psychotherapy outcome, the road toward authenticity.

Positive Psychology Across the Life Span provides an insight into how we are affected by the different stages of adult development and gives us the opportunity to change through choice rather than leaving change to chance. The science of positive psychology offers a wealth of research and evidence-based interventions and shares insights into which habits and behaviours contribute to how to live a flourishing life. This book aims to extend that knowledge by introducing and incorporating key aspects of existential and humanistic psychology and explores positive psychology with a lifespan perspective. It goes beyond theory to look at practical application, with insightful reflective questions. Whilst acknowledging the differences and disagreements between some of the key figures in the subject areas of the book, it seeks to highlight the areas where there is agreement and congruence which have been previously overlooked or ignored. The book will be essential reading for students and practitioners of positive psychology as well as other mental health professionals.

Re-Visioning Existential Therapy is a collection of essays from leading practitioners and theorists around the globe which questions some of the key tenets of traditional existential therapy. The book enlightens, stimulates, and provokes the reader out of complacency. It expands the breadth and scope of the approach, discusses recent developments in psychotherapy and philosophy and aligns existential therapy to a progressive, radical, and counter-traditional ethos. Through clinical studies, personal reflections, discussions on aspects of theory and exciting links to art, literature and contemporary culture, these very diverse and wide-ranging contributions take existential therapy into the fertile wilderness of shared experience. Through renewed links to seminal writers, it captures the subversive spirit, the deep compassion, the unflinching gaze and playfulness that is at the heart of the approach. The book will share knowledge and enthusiasm for the practice of existential therapy in order to encourage therapists and trainees to partake of the joys and challenges of existential practice.

In the years since it was first published, The Reality Game has become a classic text. For all those training and practising in humanistic and integrative psychotherapy it is an essential guide to good practice, and an excellent introduction to the skills used in individual and group therapy. This new edition has been updated to take into account changes in the field and John Rowan's own work, while still providing guidance on establishing and developing the relationship between counsellor and client, and covering: assessment; the initial interview; the opening session; aims; transference; resistance and supervision. With the student's needs always at the forefront, this extensively revised new edition responds to the questions most often asked by trainees in these disciplines, and includes discussions of ethics and new chapters on transpersonal psychology, and on dialogical self-theory. It will be a must read for psychotherapists and counsellors in practice and training especially those involved in humanistic and integrative psychotherapy.

An existential therapy handbook from those in the field, with its broad scope covering key texts, theories, practice, and research The Wiley World Handbook of Existential Therapy is a work representing the collaboration of existential psychotherapists, teachers, and researchers. It's a book to guide readers in understanding human life better through the exploration of aspects and applications of existential therapy. The book presents the therapy as a way for clients to explore their experiences and make the most of their lives. Its contributors offer an accurate and in-depth view of the field. An introduction of existential therapy is provided, along with a summary of its historical foundations. Chapters are organized into sections that cover: daseinsanalysis; existential-phenomenonological, -humanistic, and -integrative therapies; and existential group therapy. International developments in theory, practice and research are also examined.

Breaking the Rules: Women in Prison and Feminist Therapy challenges therapists, public policymakers, voters, and those in the criminal justice system to find treatment options, empowerment strategies, viable resources, community support, and policies that can help women with problems such as drug abuse, domestic violence, poverty, and prostitution rather than perpetually punishing them. Breaking the Rules shows you how our society makes 'other'of those among us who are most vulnerable, injured, and without resources. It digs under your skin and forces you to look at: the histories of abuse among women who have murdered their partners the impact of race and ethnicity on patterns of mothering and caretaking of children of women prisoners the lack of treatment options for addicted women prisoners how prison reawakens the feelings of powerlessness in women who have suffered childhood physical and sexual abuse helping women inmates develop marketable educational and vocational skills, support systems, and positive perceptions of themselves collaborative strategies that challenge the status quo of programs and support available to female offenders and their families a relational model of treatment that is based on the integration of three theoretical perspectives the strengths and limitations of twelve step programs for women Mapping the problems and offering solutions, Breaking the Rules walks you through treatment strategies and self-confirming experiences--such as feminist therapy, prisoner-led support groups, affirmative prison programming, and art therapy--that help women draw on their strengths, come to terms with their pasts, and meet future challenges head on.

I found this book to be penetrating, easy to read, and very thought provoking. . . . It really is an excellent treatment of a sensitive subject. I highly recommend it. --Nicolette Jackson, Re-Entry Center of Orange County Community College, Costa Mesa, California "Mollie Whalen′s book Counseling to End Violence Against Women is subversive in the best sense of the word. She has tackled head-on the challenge of a social action approach to working with abused women. The book is provocative, challenging the reader to pursue fundamental social change in the practice of counseling victims of domestic violence." --Ruth A. Brandwein, The University of Utah "After years of heavy psychologizing discourse, a book has finally come along that places initiation into the women′s movement at the core of counseling violated women. Mollie Whalen cuts through professionalization and brings the political back into the process of counseling women. A wonderfully subversive work." --Bonnie Burstow, Private Practice, Toronto Feminist theory has viewed violence against women as a result of a male-dominated society, but traditional counseling models for battered women have largely failed to encourage social change as a solution to this disturbing epidemic. Offering challenging arguments on the power of the counseling relationship to initiate change, Counseling to End Violence Against Women unites feminist and radical feminist theory and counseling practice to promote women′s liberation from violence and sexual oppression. In her comprehensive model, author Mollie Whalen examines the historical roles of the women′s movement and the battered women′s movement in relation to the development of a politically subversive approach to counseling. Whalen′s model focuses not only on empowering individual women but on seizing the collective power of women to end their victimization. Grounded in theory, this practical model also addresses professional issues that confront counselors in their work with battered women. In Counseling to End Violence Against Women, Whalen reconstructs the role of counseling with victimized women and promotes a valuable model for use in treatment and training. Counselors and counseling students will find her perspective challenging and invaluable.

Originally published in 1981, this volume presents papers by the leading British theorists and practitioners in family therapy from its beginnings up to the 1980s. It collected together for the first time a number of important previously published articles which had relevance and interest for family therapists of the day, and includes other chapters specially written for this book which reflected the most recent thinking on the topics covered at the time. The book is divided into three parts. The first, which includes papers by John Bowlby, R.D. Laing and A.C.R. Skynner, deals with the theory behind family therapy. In the second part we see the application of family therapy to specific clinical situations such as adolescent psychiatry, illness, death and mourning in the family, and marital therapy. The third part of the book covers various differential approaches within family therapy, including psychoanalysis, the experiential approach and family construct psychology. The papers in all three parts weld together ideas from the behavioural and the psychodynamic spheres of interest. Addressed as they are to theoretical issues and clinical applications, they linked together the past and future of family therapy at that time.

The paradox of the contemporary family is that it is both patriarchal and father-absent. Family therapists reproduce these problems by blaming mothers, protecting fathers, ignoring issues of race and class, and settling for superficial symptom relief. In The Family Interpreted, Deborah Anna Luepnitz proposes a new practice grounded in psychoana-lytic feminism. Since its publication in 1988, this intelligent, irreverent, and incorrigibly witty book has become a classic, admired by the therapeutic community and feminist scholars. Luepnitz's work has permanently altered the debate about families, culture, and psychological change.

First published in 1997. Routledge is an imprint of Taylor & Francis, an informa company.

Outlines the principles of feminist family therapy, challenges gender stereotyping, and discusses actual cases.

This volume offers case-based discussions that address race, gender and class as they effect the personal problems of individual families. While keeping an explicit focus on clinical work, the book highlights power differentials in families and larger systems. Notable authors examine family issues such as couple intimacy, divorce, migration, lesbian mother families and parent-child conflict. The book should interest therapists who have been working with an individual focus to include feminist-family-therapy in their work.

​​​​Social workers, in whatever capacity they work, can expect to come into contact with women who have experienced/are experiencing violence and with women who are experiencing depression.  Therefore, a range of social work supports and interventions are required in order to meet the needs of diverse women and assist them in their recovery.  One of these methods is group work where women can share their experiences, learn from each other, reflect on their learnings and identify and achieve changes in their circumstances.  This book is based on original research by the author that sought to understand depression in women from a feminist and gender-informed perspective, develop a feminist-based group work response, and highlight the activities of consciousness-raising and resistance as methods for women to achieve change in their lives and in their selves.  An innovative and creative group work program, the Women's Journaling Group Program, was developed from this research and provides a new method of working with women who have experienced/are experiencing violence and mild-moderate depression. The Women's Journaling Group Program is research-informed, theoretically-grounded, practice-based and feminist and gender-focused. This book, and the program model within it, is an important contribution to the field of critical feminist social work practice.​

In recent years, female therapists and their clients have addressed the discrepancy between psychological theory and women's experiences. New therapies developed out of the collective efforts of women and their therapists to express their unique identity. This book presents the framework of innovative therapy, but more important, describes healing techniques - ego-state therapy, Jungian dreamwork, native healing for alcohol and child sexual abuse, techniques of metaphors, drawing, story telling and imagery, hypnosis in healing childhood trauma, overcoming guilt in incest and more. At the end of each chapter we hear the client's voice. As each woman is expert in her own experience, it's she who has the last word.

This is an interesting book. It may be useful for those who have not followed the debate on the experience of women in psychiatric services. It provides useful information on ways of working with more disturbed women. These are women whom psychiatric services often avoid or at least with whom they do little constructive work. The emphasis on offering therapy to these women instead of a bed in an institution was refreshing. --Andrea Bennett in Clinical Psychology Forum How can counselors and clinicians help empower women in a sexist, racist, and homophobic society? How can they help women reclaim their bodies? Or repair their violated bond with womenkind? Taking feminist therapy one step further, this enlightening volume focuses on a central problem in our society--violence against women--and explores practical, feminist ways of working with women′s responses to it: depression, cutting, splitting, troubled eating, and protest. Radical Feminist Therapy explores issues that are usually either omitted or pathologized in generalist feminist counseling texts such as women battered by their pimps, women who self-mutilate, and psychiatrized women. Other topics covered are working with lesbians; American Indian, African American, Jewish, and immigrant women; women with disabilities; working with heterosexual couples; sexual violation by therapists; and working with suicidal clients. A list of recommended readings follows each chapter. Radical Feminist Therapy addresses the needs of both students and practitioners in the areas of psychology, counseling, social work, and women′s studies who desire a comprehensive, enlightening text they will refer to again and again. "Burstow′s book should prove very useful as a resource for practitioners in a wide variety of areas dealing with violence against women. . . . The first part of the book presents the theoretical foundations; the remaining 12 chapters integrate theory and practice. Written from a well-articulated radical feminist position, the text is grounded in structuralist theory that situates problems in living within the systematic oppressions of classism, sexism, and racism. Respect for women and for their right to make their own decisions in therapy permeates the text." --Choice "This book fills a gap in the literature addressed by no other publication I have seen. There are numerous theoretical books on feminist counseling or therapy. But I have seen nothing which moves from theory to clear, practical suggestions on what to do and how to do it when working with women on different problems. Bonnie begins by presenting a clear feminist framework in which she sees violence against women in our society as the central problem in all women′s lives. She explains how this core issue plays itself out in different areas of women′s lives and how it is central to the personal problems women struggle with. She then goes on to give practical, concrete suggestions about how to actually work with women in therapy. She warns readers of common pitfalls and how to avoid them. It is an extremely cohesive and useful piece of work." --Linda Advokaat, Feminist Counselor, Sessional Instructor, Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada "As a presentation of theory translated into casework, this is the best I have seen in its field--a deft integration of politics and philosophy, made relevant and workable in the chosen context." --Counselling

The family begins with the parental couple; it is they who create the family. This book explores the way in which the child or any member of the family can carry unresolved projections arising from the parents' families of origin: their　family within, and the difficulties this internal family presents for the therapist. The model developed in this book explores psychoanalytically based ideas about infant development and applies them to the internal world of couples and families. It presents both a clear explanation of these theories as well as case histories that show how these ideas work in practice. The developmental model presented offers an original perspective on the wide range of problems that many couple and family therapists struggle with. These problems can be understood in the context of the family within, the way in which the family of origin dynamics have been internalised. This shared understanding between the couple and family and the therapist provides a path to greater maturity and therefore a greater capacity to cope with life's vicissitudes. Working with Developmental Anxieties in Couple and Family Psychotherapy presents both a clear theoretical framework for understanding the development of the couple and family, and a practical application for these ideas. Case studies bring the model to life through illustrating both the problems of the family or couple and the difficulties of the work. It will appeal to psychoanalysts, psychotherapists, couples and family therapists.

This book aims to create a foundation that respects theory, culture, and the mental health professions and to initiate the practical and needed discussions about how to work with immigrant families.

Counsellors and psychotherapists are faced with ever-increasing complexity in their work with adolescents. In this book, Bronagh Starrs offers an understanding of developmental and therapeutic process from a relational-phenomenological Gestalt perspective. Starrs shows how the adolescent's presenting symptom issues are statements of compromised lifespace integrity and demonstrates therapeutic sensibility to the adolescent's first-person experience. Throughout the book, the clinician is offered extensive relational and creative strategies to support integrity repair for the adolescent. The developmental impact of various lifespace contexts are discussed, including parental separation, complex family configuration, grief, adoption, and emerging sexual orientation and gender experience. Therapeutic responses to common creative adjustments are explored including anxiety, school refusal, depression, self-harm, suicide, eating disorders, alcohol and drug use, and sexual trauma. Adolescent Psychotherapy: A Radical Relational Approach will help counsellors and psychotherapists to develop deeper levels of competency in their work as adolescent psychotherapists, as they navigate the complex and fascinating experience of therapy with teenagers. This exceptional contribution is highly suitable for both experienced practitioners and students of counselling and psychotherapy.

Supportive yet challenging, this volume contains 30 useful hints and reminders to help both students and professionals in counseling examine and improve key areas of ther work. Developing Gestalt Counseling encourages counselors to focus on areas that they feel need special attention by covering topics such as relationship and dialogue, assessment in the Gestalt approach; contact, awareness, proactivity, and responsibility; and experimental and creative methods. Author Jennifer Mackewn provides an easy-to-read and informative book for readers who are already familiar with the fundamentals of counseling and have begun work with clients in counseling psychology and social work settings.

An international selection of authors provide a detailed exploration of Gestalt as a somatic and relational practice. Covering many aspects of this relationship, the chapters include discussion of our relationships with nature, the role of Eros, energy in Taoism, affect and methods of practice. Both theoretical and practical application of an embodied relational approach to GT are presented, and many chapters include case studies from the contributors' own work. The overall view of the book is that our bodies are inextricably embedded and co-creating with the environment, and that we know our body and the world through our embodiment.

An interdisciplinary account of phenomenal unity, investigating how experiential wholes can be characterized and how such characterizations can be analyzed computationally. How can we account for phenomenal unity? That is, how can we characterize and explain our experience of objects and groups of objects, bodily experiences, successions of events, and the attentional structure of consciousness as wholes? In this book, Wanja Wiese develops an interdisciplinary account of phenomenal unity, investigating how experiential wholes can be characterized and how such characterization can be analyzed conceptually as well as computationally. Wiese first addresses how the unity of consciousness can be characterized phenomenologically, discussing what it is like to experience wholes and what is the experiential contribution of phenomenal unity. Considering the associated conceptual and empirical issues, he draws connections to phenomenological accounts and research on Gestalt theory. The results show how the attentional structure of experience, the experience of temporal flow, and different types of experiential wholes contribute to our sense of phenomenal unity. Moreover, characterizing phenomenal unity in terms of the existence of a single global phenomenal state is neither necessary nor sufficient to adequately address the problem of phenomenal unity. Wiese then suggests that the concepts and ideas of predictive processing can be used to analyze phenomenal unity computationally. The result is both a conceptual framework and an interdisciplinary account: the regularity account of phenomenal unity. According to this account, experienced wholes correspond to a hierarchy of connecting regularities. The brain tracks these regularities by hierarchical prediction error minimization, which approximates hierarchical Bayesian inference.

This giant of modern psychology wrote that The Gestalt Approach was an exploration of a somewhat new approach to the entire subject of human behavior -- both in its actuality and its potentiality. Eyewitness contains film transcripts that Perls believed had significant teaching value.

The Gestalts of Mind and Text bridges literary studies and cognitive psychology to provide a unique contribution to the field of Cognitive Literary Studies. The book presents an investigation of metaphor in poetic texts, adopting and developing empirical methods used by Gestalt Psychology, while integrating concepts informed by Gestalt Psychology. The title indicates an intellectual tradition, to be termed the Gestalt of the Mind, that begins with the Würzburg School of Psychology and its subsequent development into Gestalt Psychology, which provides a rich heritage for the field of Cognitive Literary Studies. The title further indicates an intellectual and creative tradition, to be termed the Gestalt of the Text, applied to various literary schools (Medieval, Early Modern, Modernist). Finally, the Gestalt-Interaction Theory of Metaphor delineates the potentialities for different types of readings of poetic metaphor. This book further makes three significant contributions: the first is the focus on the empirical investigation of metaphor in poetic texts; the second is the integration of the aspects of problem-solving, bidirectionality of metaphor, embodied cognition and the grotesque, in analyzing poetic texts and verbal protocols; and the third is the focus on various literary traditions, spanning languages and periods. The goal of this book is to present an interdisciplinary study of the Gestalts of Mind and Text. This will be of interest to a varied audience, including cognitive psychologists, literary scholars, researchers in aesthetics, scholars of metaphor and those with an interest in intellectual history.

Gestalt Therapy is primarily an introductory textbook. It offers a clear and sober presentation of the values, theories, method, and techniques of gestalt therapy. In addition, it describes the various applications of gestalt therapy and the associated ethical and practical conditions. Originally, gestalt therapy was developed as a therapy of neurosis, but although its basic concepts remain the same, gestalt therapy has been expanded and refined in both theory and practice, and today it constitutes a modern form of psychotherapy suitable as both a form of developmental therapy and a treatment for a wide range of client categories with many different mental disorders. The book discusses the impact of the U.S. origins of gestalt therapy and underlines the importance of a high degree of sensitivity to cultural aspects as gestalt therapy spreads throughout the world. It is crucial that gestalt therapists consider the culture and the social conditions which form the context for their practice of gestalt therapy. Gestalt Therapy is aimed at gestalt therapy students, psychologists, students of psychology, and health professionals.

Gestalt Therapy: History, Theory, and Practice is an introductory text, written by major Gestalt theorists, that will engage those new to Gestalt therapy. Editors Ansel Woldt and Sarah M. Toman introduce the historical underpinnings and fundamental concepts of Gestalt therapy and illustrate applications of those concepts to therapeutic practice. The book is unique in that it is the first Gestalt text specifically designed for the academic and training institute settings. Gestalt Therapy takes both a conceptual and a practical approach to examining classic and cutting-edge constructs.

Gestalt therapy offers a present-focused, relational approach, central to which is the fundamental belief that the client knows the best way of adjusting to their situation. This new editionof Gestalt Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques　provides a concise, accessible guide to this flexible and far-reaching approach. Substantially updated throughout, topics discussed include: the theoretical assumptions underpinning gestalt therapy gestalt assessment and process diagnosis field theory, phenomenology and dialogue ethics and values evaluation and research. As such this book will be essential reading for gestalt trainees, as well as all counsellors and psychotherapists wanting to learn more about the gestalt approach.

The Gestalt approach is based on the philosophy that the human being is born with the healthy ability to regulate needs and wants in relationship with the environment in which she/he lives. Heightening of personal awareness and exploration of needs is enabled by the therapist who actively engages in supporting and assisting the therapeutic journey of the client. Gestalt Therapy: Advances in Theory and Practice is a collaboration of some of the best thinkers in the Gestalt therapy approach. It offers a summary of recent advances in theory and practice, and novel ideas for future development. Each chapter focuses on a different element of the Gestalt approach and, with contributors from around the world, each offers a different perspective of its ongoing evolution in relation to politics, religion and philosophy. Incorporating ideas about community, field theory, family and couple therapy, politics and spirituality, this book will be of interest not only to Gestalt therapists but also to non-Gestalt practitioners, counsellors, psychologists, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals. Counselling, behavioural science and psychotherapy students will also find this a valuable contribution to their learning.

This essential new book gives the reader an introduction to the fundamental concepts of gestalt therapy in a stimulating and accessible style. It supports the study and practice of gestalt therapy for clinicians of all backgrounds, reflecting a practice-based pedagogy that emphasises experiential learning. The content in this book builds on the curriculum taught at the Norwegian Gestalt Institute University College (NGI). The material is divided into four main sections. In the first section, the theoretical basis for gestalt therapy is presented with references to gestalt psychology, field theory, phenomenology, and existential philosophy. In the later parts, central theoretical terms and practical models are discussed, such as the paradoxical theory of change, creative adjustment, self, contact, contact forms, awareness, polarities, and process models. Clinical examples illustrate the therapy form's emphasis on the relational meeting between therapist and client. Detailed description of gestalt therapy theory from the time of the gestalt psychologists to today, with abundant examples from clinical practice, distinguishes this book from other texts. It will be of great value to therapists, coaches, and students of gestalt therapy.

In Human Interaction and Emotional Awareness in Gestalt Therapy　H. Peter Dreitzel explores a model of the contacting processes between human beings and their environments and presents a phenomenological exploration of the emotions guiding such contacts. The book makes an important contribution to our understanding of the role of psychotherapy in the modern world, especially in the context of change and crisis. Dreitzel sets out a new perspective of how we interact with each other, how we frame our encounters and differentiate them from one another, how we give them meaning, and how they are related to our needs and wants. This is followed by a unique phenomenological exploration of the emotions guiding such contacts, the first time the world of human feelings has been explored in depth and systematically analysed in Gestalt thought. These innovative explorations are framed first by a discussion of the historical development of Western conventions regarding everyday behaviour, and secondly by an examination of perspectives on climate change. Dreitzel analyses the mental and emotional states of potential clients as they are affected by these global processes and the book also includes an epilogue which evaluates how to work with climate anxiety. Dreitzel's conception of social change, with Gestalt therapy at its core, is relevant to all aspects of humanistic psychology. It elevates empathy, emotional development and the prevention of suffering at all levels of society, filling important gaps in Gestalt therapy theory and expanding it into exciting new territory. Human Interaction and Emotional Awareness in Gestalt Therapy also contains an insightful foreword by Michael Vincent Miller, PhD, and will be essential reading for Gestalt therapists, other professionals with an interest in Gestalt approaches and readers interested in social interaction, climate change and the role of psychotherapy in a changing world.

Integrative Gestalt Practice (IGP) is a new approach to understanding and working with complexity and wholeness in people's lives. Amongst the many published books on the market today focusing on the need for specialization and manualization, this book introduces an alternative approach to working professionally with people. By combining basic principles from the gestalt-approach with basic elements of integral theory introduced by Ken Wilber, IGP develops a frontline framework for integrating different forms of theoretical and practical knowledge of human life-processes. This, for instance, can sustain the integration of various psychotherapeutic approaches, and - on a more general level - raise a more common capacity for perspective taking and meaningful disagreements between people. The book shows in various ways how concepts of field theory, self-regulation, contact, awareness and creative experimentation can be directly applied in working with people. The IGP model can be used in many different contexts: in therapy, organisational work, coaching and pedagogy. The book contains a rich combination of theoretical elaborations and practical exercises.

The ideas of Max Wertheimer (1880-1943), a founder of Gestalt theory, are discussed in almost all general books on the history of psychology and in most introductory textbooks on psychology. This intellectual biography of Wertheimer is the first book-length treatment of a scholar whose ideas are recognized as of central importance to fields as varied as social psychology, cognitive neuroscience, problem solving, art, and visual neuroscience. King and Wertheimer trace the origins of Gestalt thought, demonstrating its continuing importance in fifteen chapters and several supplements to these chapters. They begin by reviewing Wertheimer's ancestry, family, childhood in central Europe, and his formal education. They elaborate on his activities during the period in which he developed the ideas that were later to become central to Gestalt psychology, documenting the formal emergence of this school of thought and tracing its development during World War I. The maturation of the Gestalt school at the University of Berlin during 1922-1929 is discussed in detail. Wertheimer's everyday life in America during his last decade is well documented, based in part on his son's recollections. The early reception of Gestalt theory in the United States is examined, with extensive references to articles in professional journals and periodicals. Wertheimer's relationships and interaction with three prominent psychologists of the time, Edwin Boring, Clark Hull, and Alexander Luria, are discussed based on previously unpublished correspondence. The final chapters discuss Wertheimer's essays on democracy, freedom, ethics, and truth, and detail personal challenges Wertheimer faced during his last years. His major work, published after his death, is Productive Thinking. Its reception is examined, and a concluding chapter considers recent responses to Max Wertheimer and Gestalt theory. This intellectual biography will be of interest to psychologists and readers interested in science, modern European history, and the Holocaust.

Gestalt therapists often work with groups. Group therapists from a variety of theoretical orientations frequently incorporate insights and methodology from gestalt therapy. New Directions in Gestalt Group Therapy: Relational Ground, Authentic Self was written with particular attention to both gestalt and group work specialists in providing a comprehensive reference for the practice of group therapy from a gestalt perspective. In includes an introduction to gestalt therapy terms and concepts written to make the gestalt approach understandable and accessible for mental health practitioners of all backgrounds. It is appropriate for students as well as seasoned psychotherapists. Peter Cole and Daisy Reese are the co-directors of the Sierra Institute for Contemporary Gestalt Therapy located in Berkeley, California. They are the co-authors of Mastering the Financial Dimension of Your Psychotherapy Practice and True Self, True Wealth: A Pathway to Prosperity. They are a married couple, with five children and four grandchildren between them.

Originally published in 1957, the primary aim of this study was to shed light upon the logical character of the psychology of perception. D.W. Hamlyn begins by delimiting the field of psychological inquiry into perception, then gives a detailed account of the types of explanation appropriate in the field. He maintains that these explanations have certain important peculiarities which distinguish them from other scientific inquiries. In view of the central importance of Gestalt Theory in this field an account is given of its origins, and its main features are critically discussed. The work should still be of considerable interest to both philosophers and psychologists, as well as to all those interested in the relations between the two subjects.

- Gestalt therapy has a large and growing international community, both in North America and Europe - There aren't any current competitive books on the market, meaning that this project fills a real gap in the available literature

Useful as a supplemental text in advanced theories and practicum courses, this fourth edition discusses the key concepts and techniques from many contemporary theories and how to develop an integrative approach to the counseling process to better meet individual client needs. Dr. Corey introduces the techniques that he draws from in his own integrative approach to counseling using a wide variety of case examples with diverse clients. Topics covered include assessing presenting issues; developing a productive working alliance; establishing therapeutic goals; understanding and addressing diversity; working with resistant clients; using evidence-based practice in cognitive, emotive, and behavioral work with clients; dealing with transference and countertransference; and incorporating trends in integrative therapies. To encourage active learning, reflective exercises throughout the text provide readers with opportunities to put themselves in the role of therapist and client. "No one knows more about theory-based counseling than Gerald Corey, who has spent the past 50+ years helping us to gain real insight into multiple models. In this book, Corey takes readers from forming a working alliance with clientsthrough the processes for setting and achieving goals. His skill at and understanding of the termination processes is worth the entire book. Not only will The Art of Integrative Counseling be the core text for counseling process and skills courses, it will provide the foundation for effective, truly integrated counseling throughout one's career." --James Robert Bitter, EdD, East Tennessee State University "Gerald Corey's fourth edition of The Art of Integrative Counseling provides important concepts to consider when developing an integrative approach to working with clients. For beginning counselors, it demonstrates how one can be integrative whether one is behaviorally, cognitively, or affectively oriented. For more advanced counselors, it reminds them of the wealth of information that all theories offer and how techniques or theories can be synthesized into a more effective approach. Whether you are a new counselor trying to figure out how to integrate the many theories you learned about, or a seasoned professional seeking new ways of working with clients, this book has something for you." --Edward Neukrug, EdD, Old Dominion University *Requests for digital versions from ACA can be found on www.wiley.com. *To purchase print copies, please visit the ACA website *Reproduction requests for material from books published by ACA should be directed to permissions@counseling.org 

This practical text fully integrates theory and technique of brief counseling while presenting the relationship as the key to any successful intervention. All chapters include ideas and tools for brief counseling and case studies that take the reader step-by-step through the techniques of the first session and beyond. The text is written to engage readers and invite them to participate in both self-exploration and discovery.

Hallucination-focused Integrative Treatment (HIT) is a specific treatment for auditory verbal hallucinations which integrates techniques from CBT, systems therapy, psychoeducation, coping training, rehabilitation and medication. It emphasises active family involvement, crisis intervention when required and specialised motivational strategies. In clinical trials HIT has been proven to have longer lasting and wider ranging effects than other therapies, high patient satisfaction scores and a low drop-out rate. In Hallucination-focused Integrative Therapy, Jack Jenner presents a full manual for using HIT with patients. Divided into five parts, the book offers a clear and straightforward explanation of each aspect of the treatment. Part One introduces auditory verbal hallucinations in their social and historical context. Part Two explains the need for an integrative approach to treating them and sets out the eleven-step diagnostic procedure. Part Three describes the treatment in full, including motivational strategies, the constituent modules and how to integrate them, flexible implementation of a tailor-made procedure and its overall effectiveness. It also demonstrates the use of HIT with specific patient groups, including those suffering from trauma, children and adolescents, those who are suicidal and those with learning difficulties. Part Four examines other hallucination-focused therapies. Finally, Part Five covers insight-oriented psychotherapies. The book also includes several appendices of supplementary material which enhance the content. Illustrated throughout with case studies and clinical material, Hallucination-focused Integrative Therapy will be of interest to psychiatrists, psychologists, psychiatric nurses and social workers working with patients who experience auditory verbal hallucinations.

Responding to what he perceives as the ever-increasing medicalization of psychotherapy in recent decades, whereby clients are seen as mostly passive recipients of services, Alphons J. Richert offers therapists a collaborative theory that reasserts the importance of a client-centered approach to therapy. To be most useful to the client, he maintains, therapists must not be entirely tied to a particular school or approach, but must have a guiding framework that enables them to work flexibly, engaging in different activities at different times and with different clients, but always with a clear understanding of why they are doing so. Rooted in a primarily constructivist framework, Richert sets out to develop an approach that uses both existential and narrative thinking regarding the process of change. After each of these approaches -- including the similarities and major differences between them -- are outlined, a more integrative method can be described, as Richert focuses on the interplay of bodily, lived experience and socially constructed meaning in the creation of the person's self and world. A client is best served, he argues, when the therapist attends carefully to such meaning-making processes, and a creative synthesis of existential and narrative approaches grants particular emphasis to the human process of meaning-making on both these internal and interpersonal levels. As a scholar and a practitioner, Richert also discusses the implications of this integrative position for the actual practice of therapy. Acknowledging the variety of needs, difficulties, and complex cases therapists must often address, this approach offers a systematic and purposeful approach to psychotherapy that simultaneously equips the therapist to adapt to the constantly developing therapeutic enterprise and to flexibly engage different clients with a diverse assortment of activities, interventions, and methods of treatment. Integrating Existential and Narrative Therapy will be of special interest to scholars and clinical psychologists who pursue either of these approaches to psychotherapy, as well as to those who seek to enhance a variety of other methodologies.

Integrative Couple Therapy in Action offers a comprehensive, user-friendly guide to handling the most common problems and crisis situations seen by couple therapists. Drawing on the latest literature and the author's experience of over 40 years, Nielsen investigates what makes certain issues, such as sex, or situations, such as extramarital affairs, so stressful for clients and challenging for therapists. Unlike most graduate programs and texts on couple therapy that focus on theory and technique, Integrated Couple Therapy in Action fills in the details. The chapters cover common presenting problems (sex, money, children, and the stresses of time, work, and simply living together) and then discuss catastrophic crisis situations (couples reeling from affairs, contemplating divorce, divorcing, or living in stepfamilies after divorcing). Integrative Couple Therapy in Action provides one-stop shopping for readers of all skill levels interested in understanding the subject matter that bedevils so many couples.

* Offers much-needed support for the training of systemic and integrative therapists. * Outlines a practical, problem-solving approach using IST. * Includes workbook exercises to facilitate learning. * Provides a range of scenarios that will challenge the reader to think through the specific steps for IST.

Integrative Therapies for Depression: Redefining Models for Assessment, Treatment and Prevention summarizes emerging theories and research findings on various nonpharmaceutical therapies to treat mood disorders. Supported by the review of nearly 3000 scientific studies, the book describes the concepts of inflammation, genetics, hormonal imbalance, gastrointestinal conditions, environmental stress, and nutritional deficiencies and their possible link to the pathogenesis of mood disorders. It also examines findings on various nonpharmaceutical therapies used to treat mood disorders including vitamins, botanicals, and other natural products as well as exercise, stress reduction, bright light, mind-body practices, and spiritual approaches. Also covered are evidence-based approaches to integrative management of mood disorders in pregnant women, adolescents, and the elderly. Separating facts from fiction, the book provides practical information that clinicians can implement and share with their patients. The book fills a significant gap in the conventional model of therapeutics for mood disorders. It is a valuable resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, family therapists, and all other clinicians who devote their days to caring for those afflicted with depression.

Integrative Therapy is a unifying approach that brings together physiological, affective, cognitive, contextual and behavioural systems, creating a multi-dimensional relational framework that can be created anew for each individual case. Integrative Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques provides a concise and accessible guide that allows professionals and students to look beyond specific approaches in order to draw upon ideas and techniques that will best help the client. Divided into helpful sections, areas of discussion include: the case for an integrative approach to therapy the centrality of relationship and dimensions of self development the process of integrative therapy techniques and strategies This book will be essential reading for all psychotherapists and counsellors, both in practice and training, who want to expand their perspectives and learn more about an integrative approach.

Winner of the Internationl Association for Jungian Studies (IAJS) Book Award for Best Clinical Book 2021 The Absent Father Effect on Daughters investigates the impact of absent - physically or emotionally - and inadequate fathers on the lives and psyches of their daughters through the perspective of Jungian analytical psychology. This book tells the stories of daughters who describe the insecurity of self, the splintering and disintegration of the personality, and the silencing of voice. Issues of fathers and daughters reach to the intra-psychic depths and archetypal roots, to issues of self and culture, both personal and collective. Susan E. Schwartz illustrates the maladies and disappointments of daughters who lack a father figure and incorporates clinical examples describing how daughters can break out of idealizations, betrayals, abandonments and losses to move towards repair and renewal. The book takes an interdisciplinary approach, expanding and elucidating Jungian concepts through dreams, personal stories, fairy tales and the poetry of Sylvia Plath, along with psychoanalytic theory, including Andre Green's 'dead father effect' and Julia Kristeva's theories on women and the body as abject. Examining daughters both personally and collectively affected by the lack of a father, The Absent Father Effect on Daughters is highly relevant for those wanting to understand the complex dynamics of daughters and fathers to become their authentic selves. It will be essential reading for anyone seeking understanding, analytical and depth psychologists, other therapy professionals, academics and students with Jungian and post-Jungian interests.

In 1935 Jung gave a now famous and controversial course of five lectures at the Tavistock Clinic in London. In them he presents, in lucid and compelling fashion, his theory of the mind and the methods he had used to arrive at his conclusions: dream analysis, word association and 'active imagination.' Immediately accessible to the general reader, the Tavistock lectures are a superb introduction to anyone coming to Jung's psychology for the first time and crucial for understanding analytical psychology. A fascinating feature of the book is the inclusion of some of the questions posed to Jung at the end of each lecture. These questions, including those from leading psychoanalysts such as Wilfrid Bion, and the discussions that follow offer an outstanding example of a great thinker at the peak of their powers. Also amongst the audience was Samuel Beckett, who was deeply affected by what Jung had to say. With a new foreword by Kevin Lu

How can we make sense of ourselves within a world of change? In Analytical Psychology in a Changing World, an international range of contributors examine some of the common pitfalls, challenges and rewards that we encounter in our efforts to carve out identities of a personal or collective nature, and question the extent to which analytical psychology as a school of thought and therapeutic approach must also adapt to meet our changing needs. The contributors assess contemporary concerns about our sense of who we are and where we are going, some in light of recent social and natural disasters and changes to our social climates, others by revisiting existential concerns and philosophical responses to our human situation in order to assess their validity for today. How we use our urban environments and its structures to make sense of our pathologies and shortcomings; the relevance of images and the dynamic forms that underpin our experience of the world; how analytical psychology can effectively manage issues and problems of cultural, religious and existential identity - these broad themes, and others besides, are vividly illustrated by striking case-studies and unique personal insights that give real lucidity to the ideas and arguments presented. Analytical Psychology in a Changing World will be essential reading for Jungian and post-Jungian scholars and clinicians of depth psychology, as well as sociologists, philosophers and any reader with a critical interest in the important cultural ideas of our time.

Controversial claims that C.G. Jung, founder of analytical psychology, was a charlatan and a self-appointed demi-god have recently brought his legacy under renewed scrutiny. The basis of the attack on Jung is a previously unknown text, said to be Jung's inaugural address at the founding of his 'cult', otherwise known as the Psychological Club, in Zurich in 1916. It is claimed that this cult is alive and well in Jungian psychology as it is practised today, in a movement which continues to masquerade as a genuine professional discipline, whilst selling false dreams of spiritual redemption. In Cult Fictions, leading Jung scholar Sonu Shamdasani looks into the evidence for such claims and draws on previously unpublished documents to show that they are fallacious. This accurate and revealing account of the history of the Jungian movement, from the founding of the Psychological Club to the reformulation of Jung's approach by his followers, establishes a fresh agenda for the historical evaluation of analytical psychology today.

Presented in five parts, this comprehensive collection offers an in-depth understanding of the core competencies in Jungian psychoanalysis. It is aligned with the main task of analytical training and practice--that of integrating the unconscious aspects of experience and developing a living relationship with it--and defines a set of key resources and skills for recognizing the emergence of the unconscious and its multiple manifestations, while offering ways to relate to it that fit individual clients and encourage growth and healing. Featuring contributions from renowned Jungian analysts from across the globe, the book sheds light on how Jungians integrate common therapeutic methods in their practices and how they utilize others that are unique to their personal experiences, making the book an essential read for Jungian professionals, trainees, and students.

Religion, more than sexuality, cast psychoanalysis in controversy and onto the world stage even as it threatened to dismantle the psychoanalytic collective. In the founding years of the first psychoanalytic periodicals, relational dynamics shaped the psychoanalytic corpus on religion. The psychoanalytic pioneers developed their ideas in tandem even if in protest to one another. Religion is a topic worthy of engagement, not least because the symbolized terrain in the history of religion was so often deployed as a vehicle for motivating, disciplining, or editing out a member of the psychoanalytic community in publication. This book offers an interdisciplinary approach to religion and psychology, including a compelling denouement that reveals new narratives about longstanding rumours in the early history of the psychoanalytic movement. Above all, this volume demonstrates that the first generation of psychoanalysts succeeded in writing themselves into the history of religious thought and sacralizing the origins of psychoanalysis.

How do gender and sexual difference influence the erotic transference? Gender, Countertransference and the Erotic Transference offers new insights into working with complex transference and countertransference phenomena. Including views from a wide spectrum of theoretical backgrounds, it makes a unique contribution to discourse on the themes of gender, sexuality and the erotic transference. The contributors are highly experienced clinicians with international reputations as theorists in the fields of analytical psychology, psychoanalysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Illustrated with closely observed clinical examples and detailed theoretical discussion, innovations in technique are introduced on themes including developmental mourning, female perversion, the meaning and purpose of the erotic transference, the dying patient, lesbian homoerotic transference and supervision of the erotic transference. Countertransference is vividly explored in chapters on sexual difference, the therapist's body and the challenging topic of perversion in the analyst. The book is divided into four sections: gender and the erotic transference the erotic transference and the symbolic function women working with women historical perspectives on women working with men. Gender, Countertransference and the Erotic Transference extends existing theory, highlighting the symbolic nature of the transference/countertransference dynamic. It will be compelling reading for experienced clinicians, students and trainees in the fields of psychoanalysis, analytical psychology and psychoanalytic psychotherapy, as well as counselling, the arts therapies and social work.

Intergenerational Complexes in Analytical Psychology: The Suffering of Ghosts draws attention to human suffering and how it relates to unacknowledged and unrecognized traumatic cultural histories that continue to haunt us in the present. The book shows the many ways that our internal lives are organized and patterned by both racial, ethnic, and national identities, and personal experiences. This book shows how the cultural unconscious with its multiple group dynamics, identities, nationalities, seething differences of conflicts, polarizations, and individual personalities are organized by cultural complexes and narrated by archetypal story formations, which the author calls phantom narratives. The emotional dynamics generated constitute potential transitional spaces or holding containers that allow us to work with these issues psychologically at both the individual and group levels, offering opportunities for healing. The chapters of the book provide numerous examples of the applications of these terms to natural and cultural catastrophes as well as expressions as uncanny phenomena. Intergenerational Complexes in Analytical Psychology is essential reading for analytical psychologists, Jungian psychotherapists, and other professionals seeking to understand the impact of intergenerational trauma on individuals and groups. It is also relevant to the work of academics and scholars of Jungian studies, sociology, trauma studies, politics, and social justice.

Jungian Art Therapy aims to provide a clear, introductory manual for art therapists on how to navigate Jung's model of working with the psyche. This exciting new text circumambulates Jung's map of the mind so as to reinforce the theoretical foundations of analytical psychology while simultaneously defining key concepts to help orient practitioners, students, and teachers alike. The book provides several methods, which illustrate how to work with the numerous images originating from the unconscious and glean understanding from them. Throughout the text readers will enjoy clinical vignettes to support each chapter and illuminate important lessons.

In Jungian Perspectives on Indeterminate States: Betwixt and Between Borders, Elizabeth Brodersen and Pilar Amezaga bring together leading international contributors to analyse and interpret the psychological impact of contemporary border crossing - both literally and figuratively. Each chapter assesses key themes such as migration, culture, gender and identity formation, through a Jungian lens. All the contributors sensitively explore how creative forms can help mitigate the trauma experienced when one is forced to leave safety and enter unknown territory, and examines the specific role of indeterminacy, liminality and symbols as transformers at the border between culture, race and gender. The book asks whether we are able to hold these indeterminate states as creative liminal manifestations pointing to new forms, integrate the shadow 'other' as potential, and allow sufficient cross-border migration and fertilization as permissible. It makes clear that societal conflict represents a struggle for recognition and identity and elucidates the negative experiences of authoritarian structures attached to disrespect and misrecognitions. This interdisciplinary collection will offer key insight for Jungian analysts in practice and in training, psychotherapists, anthropologists, political and cultural theorists, and postgraduate researchers in psychosocial studies. It will also be of great interest to readers interested in migration, sexuality, gender, race and ethnicity studies.

It is well known that Jung's investigation of Eastern religions and cultures supplied him with an abundance of cross-cultural comparative material, useful to support his hypotheses of the existence of archetypes, the collective unconscious and other manifestations of psychic reality. However, the specific literature dealing with this aspect has previously been quite scarce. This unique edited collection brings together contributors writing on a range of topics that represent an introduction to the differences between Eastern and Western approaches to Jungian psychology. Readers will discover that one interesting feature of this book is the realization of how much Western Jungians are implicitly or explicitly inspired by Eastern traditions - including Japanese - and, at the same time, how Jungian psychology - the product of a Western author - has been widely accepted and developed by Japanese scholars and clinicians. Scholars and students of Jungian studies will find many new ideas, theories and practices gravitating around Jungian psychology, generated by the encounter between East and West. Another feature that will be appealing to many readers is that this book may represent an introduction to Japanese philosophy and clinical techniques related to Jungian psychology.

Practicing wholeness is an everyday activity which Murray Stein relates to many areas of life: to the private world of inner experience, to religious beliefs, images and rituals, to organisational dynamics and involvements, and to cultural paradigms. His general theory of wholeness integrates Jung's theory of instincts and archetypes. He then turns his eye on daily life and the clinical aspects of treatment that confront the practicing therapist and patient. These include reconstructing personal history, the therapeutic relationship, and psychopathological problems that stand in the way of wholeness.

This volume will be of enormous interest and value to the growing number of people qualified both in the established and the new training societies for analysts and therapists, or studying to enter them. Within it theory and practice are closely interwoven, demonstrating how theories and models emerge, both from the study of earlier pioneering publications and from day to day experience, and are tested time and time again in the process of a group of practitioners accepting them as viable. An impressive and creative blend of the characteristics which this profession demands of its practitioners is in evidence here, combining originality with passion for their subject and the flexibility required to develop their own pattern of thought. 'In the practice of modern analytical psychology it has become of central importance to reorganise, analyse and interpret projections and introjections of many sorts, the patient's transference, the analyst's counter-transference, and the dialectical interaction between the two, which is descriptively termed transference/counter-transference.

In The Therapeutic Relationship in Analytical Psychology: Theory and Practice Claus Braun presents a thorough exploration of the importance of the therapeutic relationship and explains how to encourage and develop it. Drawing on Braun's decades of clinical experience, the book clearly demonstrates the significance of establishing an intensive and living connection between client and analyst. The book examines the crucial steps of the psychotherapeutic process, illustrated with a detailed case study that presents the personal development of an analysand through a series of dreams and drawings. Braun connects key concepts in analytical psychology, such as complexes, symbols, archetypes and amplification, with conscious and unconscious processes and the development of the therapeutic relationship during the analytic process. The book also examines why C. G. Jung put such a special emphasis on the therapeutic relationship and explores the ethical demands and social responsibilities of the analyst. Comprehensive and insightful, it skillfully makes the connection between Jung's analytical psychology and practical psychotherapeutic work. The Therapeutic Relationship in Analytical Psychology will be an essential text for Jungian analysts and psychotherapists in practice and in training and a key reference for academics and students of analytical psychology, psychotherapy and Jungian studies.

Are you tired of being told by others--self-help books included--what you should do? Drs. Allan Zuckoff and Bonnie Gorscak understand. That's why this book is different. Whether it's breaking an unhealthy habit, pursuing that dream job, or ending harmful patterns in relationships, the key to moving ahead with your life lies in discovering what direction is truly right for you, and how you can get there. The proven counseling approach known as motivational interviewing (MI) can help. Drs. Zuckoff and Gorscak present powerful self-help strategies and practical tools that help you understand why you're stuck, break free of unhelpful pressure to change, and build confidence for developing a personal change plan. Vivid stories of five men and women confronting different types of challenges illustrate the techniques and accompany you on your journey. MI has a track record of helping people resolve long-standing dilemmas in a remarkably short time. Now you can try it for yourself--and unlock your own capacity for positive action.  

Revised and updated to reflect the most recent developments in the field, the second edition of the Handbook of Motivational Counseling presents comprehensive coverage of the development and identification of motivational problems and the most effective treatment techniques.  Equips clinicians with specific instructions for enhancing clients' motivation for change by targeting their maladaptive motivational patterns Provides step-by-step instructions in the administration, scoring, and interpretation of the motivational assessments, along with details of how to implement the counseling procedures Updated to reflect the most current research and effective treatment techniques, along with all-new chapters on motive-based approaches, motivational counseling with the dually diagnosed, cognitive and motivational retraining, meaning-centered counseling, and motivation in sport Showcases various basic motivational techniques and their adaptations, such as bibliotherapy, individual therapy, and group counseling, while demonstrating specialized uses of the techniques, such as in work settings and rehabilitation medicine 

Motivation is a pervasive force that can affect well-being in a variety of life situations, from the more minor through to the ability to overcome addictions and other serious psychological problems. This book presents empirically supported theories (featuring current concerns theory), questionnaires based on these theories (highlighting the Motivational Structure Questionnaire) and varied interventions based on these, with special emphasis on Systematic Motivational Counselling but also including chapters on such approaches as Personality Systems Interaction Theory, expectancy-based approaches, Motivational Interviewing, logotherapy and several others.

Integrating Motivational Interviewing and Cognitive Behavior Therapy in Clinical Practice shows counseling and other mental health professionals how the theoretical bases and evidence-based practices of motivational interviewing (MI) and cognitive behavior therapy (CBT) can be used together to maximize client outcomes. Chapters outline effective methods for integrating MI and CBT and show how these can be applied to clients in a diverse range of mental health, substance use and addiction, and correctional settings. Written in a clear and applicable style, the text features case studies, resources for skill development, and "Voices From the Field" sections, as well as chapters devoted to specific topics such as depression, anxiety, and more. Building on foundational frameworks for integrative practice, this is a valuable resource for counseling and psychotherapy practitioners looking to incorporate MI and CBT into their clinical practices.

This informative and straightforward book explores the emergence of motivational interviewing (MI) and cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT), with specific attention given to the increasing focus on the central importance of the therapeutic alliance in improving client outcomes. Comprising 30 short chapters divided into two parts - theory and practice - this entry in the popular "CBT Distinctive Features Series" covers the key features of MI-informed CBT, offering essential guidance for students and practitioners experienced in both MI and CBT, as well as practitioners from other theoretical orientations who require an accessible guide to this developing approach.

Motivational Dialogue explores the application of motivational interviewing in various contexts, with a view to enhancing understanding and improving practice. The book describes the research and practice of motivational interviewing as a stand alone intervention, as an adjunct to further treatment, and as a style of delivery of social and behavioural interventions. The contributors draw on their expertise and experience as researchers, teachers and practitioners to encourage the reader to appreciate the broad applicability of motivational dialogue. The book is divided into five sections, which cover: reflections and a model the evidence base learning and practice four studies of motivational therapy in practice motivational dialogue and stepped care. Motivational Dialogue will be of great interest to psychiatrists, clinical psychologists and anyone in the social and health care professions who is involved in assisting people to challenge addictive behaviours.

This bestselling work for professionals and students is the authoritative presentation of motivational interviewing (MI), the powerful approach to facilitating change. The book elucidates the four processes of MI--engaging, focusing, evoking, and planning--and vividly demonstrates what they look like in action. A wealth of vignettes and interview examples illustrate the "dos and don'ts" of successful implementation in diverse contexts. Highly accessible, the book is infused with respect and compassion for clients. The companion webpage provides additional helpful resources, including reflection questions, an extended bibliography, and annotated case material. This book is in the Applications of Motivational Interviewing series, edited by Stephen Rollnick, William R. Miller, and Theresa B. Moyers.   New to This Edition: *Reflects major advances in understanding and teaching MI. *Fully restructured around the new four-process model. *Additional case examples and counseling situations. *Reviews the growing evidence base and covers ways to assess MI fidelity.   Pedagogical Features Include: *Online reflection questions and annotated cases, ideal for classroom discussion. *Key points at the end of each chapter. *Engaging boxes with special topics and personal reflections. *Extended bibliography and quick-reference glossary.

Motivational Interviewing has becoming increasingly widespread among counselors and therapists, but no book to date has focused exclusively on applying Motivational Interviewing to domestic and partner violence. Written by established authorities in the field, the chapters in this volume represent important applications of motivational enhancement strategies to intimate partner violence with both victims and batterers. These studies include descriptive research on victims and perpetrators of abuse, measurement issues in assessing stages of change, and real-world applications of motivational interviewing. Murphy and Maiuro illustrate both the benefits and challenges inherent in this growing area of research."

Written expressly for leaders in health care and the social services, this accessible book shows how motivational interviewing (MI) can transform conversations about change within an organization. The authors demonstrate powerful ways to use MI to generate solutions and get employees and organizations unstuck, whether mentoring a staff member in a new role, addressing performance problems, or redesigning procedures or programs. Readers are guided to skillfully and ethically apply the core MI processes--engaging, focusing, evoking, and planning--in the management context. User-friendly features include reproducible worksheets, end-of-chapter self-reflection exercises, and extended case vignettes. Purchasers get access to a companion website where they can download and print these materials in a convenient 8 ½" x 11" size. This book is in the Applications of Motivational Interviewing series, edited by Stephen Rollnick, William R. Miller, and Theresa B. Moyers.

Motivational Interviewing in Clinical Mental Health Counseling is a cutting-edge guide to empowering counselors with the philosophical and actionable elements of motivational interviewing. This textbook, appropriate for primary or supplementary use in counseling coursework, is a practitioner and student-friendly text appropriate for readers across all levels of familiarity with motivational interviewing. Chapters integrate and present the newest conceptual and empirical literature, and the relevant, up-to-date content in each chapter is accompanied by a detailed case study and specific training exercises that will enhance counselors' proficiency in core skills. Motivational Interviewing in Clinical Mental Health Counseling introduces new learners to the skills and philosophy of motivational interviewing, enhances the skills of veterans familiar to the framework, and is the perfect companion for students of motivational interviewing across a variety of mental health counseling courses.

This book has been replaced by Motivational Interviewing in Health Care, Second Edition, ISBN 978-1-4625-5037-1.

This pragmatic guide spells out how to use motivational interviewing (MI) to have productive conversations about behavior change with adolescents and young adults in any clinical context. Filled with vivid examples, sample dialogues, and "dos and don'ts," the book shows how conducting MI from a developmentally informed standpoint can help practitioners quickly build rapport with young patients, enhance their motivation to make healthy changes, and overcome ambivalence. Experts on specific adolescent problems describe MI applications in such key areas as substance abuse, smoking, sexual risk taking, eating disorders and obesity, chronic illness management, and externalizing and internalizing behavior problems. This book is in the Applications of Motivational Interviewing series, edited by Stephen Rollnick, William R. Miller, and Theresa B. Moyers.

From experts on working with court-mandated populations, this book shows how motivational interviewing (MI) can help offenders move beyond resistance or superficial compliance and achieve meaningful behavior change. Using this evidence-based approach promotes successful rehabilitation and reentry by drawing on clients' values, goals, and strengths--not simply telling them what to do. The authors clearly describe the core techniques of MI and bring them to life with examples and sample dialogues from a range of criminal justice and forensic settings. Of crucial importance, the book addresses MI implementation in real-world offender service systems, including practical strategies for overcoming obstacles. This book is in the Applications of Motivational Interviewing series, edited by Stephen Rollnick, William R. Miller, and Theresa B. Moyers.

This book presents original research outlining the key elements in responding to parental misuse of drugs and alcohol. Offers a definition of "misuse" and "addiction" and the factors that influence the nature of misuse or addiction Reviews extensively the nature and impact of parental substance misuse on children and families using the latest evidence Explores how research and theories might help inform professionals or non-professionals assessing families affected by parents who misuse drugs or alcohol Provides an in-depth discussion of Motivational Interviewing, including a critical discussion of the challenges and limitations involved in using it in child and family settings Considers the wider implications of the findings for practice and policy and argues that these responses can be used across the field of work with vulnerable children and their families

A Toolkit of Motivational Skills, Third Edition, draws on the latest research to show how the Motivational Interviewing approach can be effectively utilized to draw out and sustain an individual's internal motivation for behavioral change. Updated with a wide range of applications and practical examples of motivational techniques which have effectively helped others to change Updated with a wide range of applications and practical examples of motivational techniques which have effectively helped others to change Features a variety of supplemental resources including 16 online video examples of MI in action, with a workbook chapter that helps readers analyse each video in detail Includes new illustrations and diagrams designed to amplify the text and make it an engaging and enjoyable reading experience

Working with Challenging Youth, Second Edition is a practical, reader-friendly guide through the pitfalls and problems that arise when working with at-risk youth. As in the first edition, the new Working with Challenging Youth builds on a solid theoretical base in reality therapy, cognitive-behavioral therapy, solution-focused therapy, systems theory, and humanistic philosophy to answer the question "What distinguishes the really effective professionals from the rest?" This second edition includes new sections on specialized, evidence-based approaches such as dialectical behavior therapy, mindfulness, collaborative problem-solving, motivational interviewing, and multisystemic therapy. This book also offers 7 guiding principles and 50 specific lessons to help bridge the gap between helping professionals and youth.

Art, Play, and Narrative Therapy shows mental health professionals how the blending of expressive arts, psychotherapy, and metaphorical communication can both support and enhance clinical practice. This book illuminates the ways in which metaphorical representations form who we are, how we interact, and how we understand our larger environment. Author Lisa Moschini explains how to couple clients' words, language, stories, and artwork with treatment interventions that aid empathic understanding, promote a collaborative alliance, and encourage conflict resolution. Chapters include numerous illustrations, exercises, and examples that give clinicians inspiration for both theoretical and practical interventions.

How do experiences of hope and despair impact upon our capacity to meet life's challenges in narrative and family therapy? Clients' experiences of hope and despair can be complex, reflecting individual and family histories, current patterns and dynamics, the stresses of everyday life, and the social contexts of families' lives. This book analyses how therapists meet and engage with these dichotomous aspects of human experience. The editors place the themes of hope and despair at the centre of a series of reflections on practice and theory. Contributors from all over the world are brought together, incorporating a range of perspectives from narrative, systemic and social constructionist frameworks. The book is divided into three sections, covering: reflections on hope and despair facing adversity: practices of hope reflections on reconciliation and forgiveness. Hope and Despair in Narrative and Family Therapy looks at the importance of hope in bringing about positive therapeutic change. This book will be of great use to family therapists, psychotherapists, counsellors, and students on therapeutic training courses.

The Language of the Soul in Narrative Therapy uniquely bridges the gap between narrative therapy and spirituality to describe how the theory and practice of narrative therapy may be expanded and enriched by incorporating the language of the soul. Divided into three parts, the book begins by contextualizing the approach of narrative therapy and spirituality. Chapters then debate the complexity of the 'soul' as a term drawing on the work of Christian mystics and philosophers, such as Teresa of Avila, Edith Stein, Merleau-Ponty, and Bakhtin, to show how their theoretical ideas can be incorporated in counseling practice and spiritual direction. The book concludes by discussing how the language of the soul can be integrated and applied in postmodern practice. With case examples from faith belief systems, such as Christianity, Buddhism, Paganism, Wicca, and Yazidism, throughout, this book is essential reading for therapists, clinical social workers, and counsellors in practice and graduate training, as well as spiritual directors and pastoral counselors interested in the ideas and practices of narrative therapy.

Michael White, one of the founders of narrative therapy, is back with his first major publication since the seminal Narrative Means to Therapeutic Ends, which Norton published in 1990. Maps of Narrative Practice provides brand new practical and accessible accounts of the major areas of narrative practice that White has developed and taught over the years, so that readers may feel confident when utilizing this approach in their practices. The book covers each of the five main areas of narrative practice-re-authoring conversations, remembering conversations, scaffolding conversations, definitional ceremony, externalizing conversations, and rite of passage maps-to provide readers with an explanation of the practical implications, for therapeutic growth, of these conversations. The book is filled with transcripts and commentary, skills training exercises for the reader, and charts that outline the conversations in diagrammatic form. Readers both well-versed in narrative therapy as well as those new to its concepts, will find this fresh statement of purpose and practice essential to their clinical work.

Tom Andersen, Harlene Anderson, and Michael White have shaped the landscapes of dialogical, collaborative, and narrative therapies. This unique book archives one of their gatherings and, in the spirit of therapeutic practice, is conversational and captures the presentations and exchanges between the three main contributors and international discussants. Tom Andersen invites us along to navigate the 'forks in the road' he faced in his emerging career, and he revisits the development of his pioneering ideas such as reflecting teams. Harlene Anderson paints the picture of her experiences in collaboration with women in Bosnia.nbsp; Michael White, co-founder of the narrative therapy tradition, then provides a clear example of the frontiers of collaborative post-modern therapies.nbsp; Through the introduction of the theory and application of Vygotskian ideas Michael excites the reader about what is possible to know and do in a therapeutic conversation.

New edition of the Narrative Exposure Therapy manual, an effective, short-term, culturally universal intervention for trauma victims - including the latest insights and new treatments for dissociation and social pain. Narrative Exposure Therapy (NET) is a successful and culturally universal intervention for the treatment of survivors of multiple and severe traumatic events, such as organized violence, torture, war, rape, and childhood abuse. Field tests in contexts of ongoing adversity and disaster areas, as well as controlled trials in various countries, have shown that three to six sessions can be sufficient to provide considerable relief. The new edition of the clearly structured and easy-to-follow NET manual now includes the latest insights and new treatments for dissociation and social pain. The first part of the book describes the theoretical background. The second part shows how to use the NET approach step by step, with practical advice and tools, including how to deal with special issues (such as dealing with challenging moments, defense mechanisms for the therapist, and ethical issues). Appendices include an informed consent form, checklists for the therapist, and FAQs.

Narrative Therapies with Children and their Families introduces and develops the principles of narrative approaches to systemic therapeutic work, and shows how they can provide a powerful framework for engaging troubled children and their families. Written by eminent and leading clinicians, known nationally and internationally for their research and theory development in the field of child and family mental health, the book covers a broad range of difficult and sensitive topics, including trauma, abuse and youth offending. It illustrates the wide application of these principles in the context of the particular issues and challenges presented when working with children and families. Since publication of the first edition, the importance of narrative therapy has continued to grow, and this new edition provides an updated and revised overview of the field, along with three new chapters to keep apace with developments in child mental health trauma work. This book remains a key text in the field of systemic narrative training and practice. With clinical examples throughout, this practical book will be welcomed by family and systemic therapists and other professionals in the field of child, adolescent and family mental health.  

Narrative Therapy: Making Meaning, Making Lives offers a comprehensive introduction to the history and theory of narrative therapy. Influenced by feminist, postmodern, and critical theory, this edited volume illustrates how we make sense of our lives and experiences by ascribing meaning through stories that arise within social conversations and culturally available discourses.

Drawing on the ideas of Michael White and David Epston, this fully revised, extended and updated Second Edition incorporates the progression of their thinking over the past five years and introduces developments initiated by other narrative therapists worldwide. New material has been added around counseling for post-traumatic reactions, couples conflict and a sense of personal failure.

Narrative therapy is an exciting and evolving psychotherapeutic approach. Narrative Therapy Approaches for Physical Health Problems takes the reader on a journey across the territory of narrative therapy theories, principles, and practices, and its application to the field of physical health. It explicitly considers a person's context and explores ways of intervening that go beyond the individual. This includes working with medical teams, engaging in conversations about broader narratives of health and wellness, alongside ideas for adapting practice to take account of particular settings and client groups. Although a lot of theoretical ground is covered, the overarching remit of this book is as a practical guide. The book is peppered with examples, which help explain concepts and illustrate how ideas look in practice. Narrative Therapy Approaches for Physical Health Problems is a book for all professionals who are therapeutically supporting people with physical health problems, across the lifespan. It is intended for those that have an interest in understanding more about how to address the emotional needs of the people with whom they work.

Narrative Therapy with Spanish Speakers provides counselors, social workers, and other mental health professionals with a variety of culturally responsive bilingual activities developed for use with clients of all ages. Each short chapter covers topics such as fear, acceptance, and trust; the chapters also employ short fictions, sayings, and quotes, all in both Spanish and English, that professionals can share directly with clients. Additional materials on the book's website include audio resources for both counselors and clients, and the book is replete with icons and guides to help counselors quickly find relevant material.

Winner of the AASECT Book Award for General Audience 2022! Queering Your Therapy Practice: Queer Theory, Narrative Therapy, and Imagining New Identities is the first practice-based book for therapists that presents queer theory and narrative therapy as praxis allies. This book offers fresh, hopeful resources for therapists committed to culturally responsive work with queer and trans people and the important others in their lives. It features clinical vignettes from the author's practice that bring to life the application of queer theory through the practice of narrative therapy and serve as teaching tools for the specific concepts and practices highlighted in individual, relational, and family therapy contexts. The text also weaves in questions for reflection and discussion, and Q-tips summarizing key points and practices. A practical resource for both seasoned therapists and students, Queering Your Practice Theory demonstrates how therapeutic practice can be informed, improved, and deepened by queer theory.

This book takes an innovative approach to using narrative therapy in counselling people who have been subject to childhood sexual abuse. Reclaiming Lives from Sexual Violence presents an illustrative case study of the authors, Tim the therapist in consultation with Dale the client, who was sexually abused as a child by a clergy member. The book is unique in documenting their therapeutic work using transcripts taken directly from their sessions together. This narrative approach invites the reader to consider different ways of engaging in therapy in order to challenge the dominant social discourses around masculinity and shame. Looking at shame from a position of value awareness rather than a deficit perspective, this book extends counselling to consider the individual experience as political and one that must be shared outside the one-to-one therapy environment. This will be an essential resource for beginning or established therapists and practitioners working with clients who have been victims of sexual violence.

Reimagining Narrative Therapy Through Practice Stories and Autoethnography takes a new pedagogical approach to teaching and learning in contemporary narrative therapy, based in autoethnography and storytelling. The individual client stories aim to paint each therapeutic meeting in such detail that the reader will come to feel as though they actually know the two or more people in the room. This approach moves beyond the standard narrative practice of teaching by transcripts and steps into teaching narrative therapy through autoethnography. The intention of these 'teaching tales' is to offer the reader an opportunity to enter into the very 'heart and soul' of narrative therapy practice, much like reading a novel has you enter into the lives of the characters that inhabit it. This work has been used by the authors in MA and PhD level classrooms, workshops, week-long intensive courses, and conferences around the world, where it has received commendations from both newcomer and veteran narrative therapists. The aim of this book is to introduce narrative therapy and the value of integrating autoethnographic methods to students and new clinicians. It can also serve as a useful tool for advanced teachers of narrative practices. In addition, it will appeal to established clinicians who are curious about narrative therapy (who may be looking to add it to their practice), as well as students and scholars of autoethnography and qualitative inquiry and methods.

This text provides a full statement of Dr Gardner's use of story-telling ranging from the free fantasies provided by the child when utilising the mutual story-telling technique, to the bibliotherapeutic stories provided by the therapist.

With contributions from well-respected figures in the field, this book explores the use of narrative and image in the therapeutic treatment of trauma and addiction. The book considers topics such as early trauma and its impacts, therapeutic methods based on images and narrative, and recovery and post-traumatic growth through community engagement. Despite a close practical association between the two, trauma and addiction are often addressed or treated separately. By considering them together, this book offers a rare perspective and is an invaluable tool for art and narrative therapists, as well as professionals supporting those dealing with addiction or trauma.

This comprehensive volume addresses attachment theory's history as well as its integration with neurobiology, psychophysiology, theories of emotion, regulation theory, and mentalization theory. It explores how clinicians can connect with their clients so that they feel completely seen and heard. Attachment theory speaks to one's biological drive to connect, to relate, and to feel heard. The author aims to achieve this by condensing the enormous and diverse literature of the field into a singular, manageable work that clinicians can use to foster these connections. The book traces the history of attachment theory and describes how neurobiological research has influenced the expansion of attachment theory, and how emotions and psychophysiology have become critical to our understanding of human attachment connections. It concludes with a detailed examination of how to apply these theories in clinical practice. This practical book addresses attachment theory's take on integrating the mind, body, and emotion when striving toward well-being. It will be of great importance for psychotherapy students, beginning therapists, and experienced clinicians with an interest in attachment theory.

Neurotherapy, sometimes called EEG biofeedback and/or neurobiofeedback involves techniques designed to manipulate brain waves through non-invasive means and are used as treatment for a variety of psychological and medical disorders. The disorders covered include ADHD, mood regulation, addiction, pain, sleep disorders, and traumatic brain injury. This book introduces specific techniques, related equipment and necessary training for the clinical practitioner. Sections focus on treatment for specific disorders and which individual techniques can be used to treat the same disorder and examples of application and the evidence base for use are described.

Collaborative Therapy and Neurobiology is the book many clinicians have been waiting for: an integration of twenty years of scientific and therapeutic cutting-edge ideas into concrete clinical practices. Interpersonal neurobiology and the development of exciting new technologies that allow us to better understand the brain have provided us with an enriched perspective on human experience. Yet, many clinicians wonder how to use this knowledge, and how these discoveries can actually benefit their clients. In particular, what are the concrete practices that each field uses to help clients overcome the issues in their lives, and how can these fields build on each other's ideas? Could minimally developed concepts in each field be combined into innovative and powerful practices to foster client wellbeing? This book offers a collection of writings which provide theoretical food for thought, research evidence, and most importantly hands-on, concrete clinical ideas to enrich therapists' work with a variety of clients. Illustrated with numerous transcripts of conversations and clinical stories, the ideas in this book will stimulate the work of people interested in renewing their practice with new ideas.

This book is an essential resource describing a wide range of approaches and technologies in the areas of quantitative EEG (QEEG) and neurotherapy including neurofeedback and neuromodulation approaches. It emphasizes practical, clinically useful methods, reported by experienced clinicians who have developed and used these approaches first hand. These chapters describe how the authors approach and use their particular combinations of technology, and how clients are evaluated and treated. This resource, which is encyclopedic in scope, provides a valuable and broad, yet sufficiently detailed account, to help clinicians guide the future directions in client assessment and neurotherapeutic treatment. Each contribution includes literature citations, practical information related to clinical interventions, and clinical outcome information.

This comprehensive handbook provides counselors in training, counselor educators, and professional counselors with the latest information on major contemporary issues impacting the field. The design of the book is both conceptual and practical, reflecting current trends and issues from the perspective of expert counselor educators, and provides an up-to-date discussion of the importance of multicultural awareness and skills. The book is split into helpful sections covering a range of areas including social and cultural diversity, neuroscience, risk prevention in counseling, writing and publishing research, and career development. Grounded in contemporary research and aligned with the 2016 CACREP core content areas, the Handbook of Counseling and Counselor Education is an indispensable resource for both graduate-level trainees and professional counselors alike. ke.

The fields of neurobiology and neuropsychology are growing rapidly, and neuroscientists now understand that the human brain has the capability to adapt and develop new living neurons by engaging new tasks and challenges throughout our lives, essentially allowing the brain to rewire itself. In Neurotherapy and Neurofeedback, accomplished clinicians and scholars Lori Russell-Chapin and Ted Chapin illustrate the importance of these advances and introduce counselors to the growing body of research demonstrating that the brain can be taught to self-regulate and become more efficient through neurofeedback (NF), a type of biofeedback for the brain. Students and clinicians will come away from this book with a strong sense of how brain dysregulation occurs and what kinds of interventions clinicians can use when counseling and medication prove insufficient for treating behavioral and psychological symptoms.

Somatic Methods for Affect Regulation is a unique resource that presents a variety of approaches for working somatically with youth. Chapters provide an overview of the relevant neuroscience research with a specific focus on affect regulation. The somatic techniques showcased in the book are evidence-based and illustrated with case studies showing their impact. Importantly, the chapters are also chock full of practical information, including strategies for working with dysregulated youth, information for collaborative and cooperative care, and an appendix with checklists and worksheets to help clinicians plan, guide, and assess their work.

In sharp contrast with the current top-down medicalized method to treating addiction, this book presents the felt sense polyvagal model (FSPM), a paradigm-shifting, bottom-up approach that considers addiction as an adaptive attempt to regulate emotional states and trauma. The felt sense polyvagal model draws from Porges' polyvagal theory, Gendelin's felt sense, and Lewis' learning model of addiction to offer a graphically illustrated and deeply embodied way of conceptualizing and treating addiction through supporting autonomic regulation. This model de-pathologizes addiction as it teaches embodied practices through tapping into the felt sense, the body's inner wisdom. Chapters first present a theoretical framework and demonstrate the graphic model in both clinician and client versions and then teach the clinician how to use the model in practice by providing detailed treatment strategies. This text's informed, compassionate approach to understanding and treating trauma and addiction is adaptable to any school of psychotherapy and will appeal to addiction experts, trauma specialists, and clinicians in all mental health fields.

A masterful synthesis of relational and attachment theory, neurobiology, and contemporary psychoanalysis, Understanding and Treating Chronic Shame has been internationally recognized as an essential text on shame. Integrating new theory about trauma, shame resilience, and self-compassion, this second edition further clarifies the relational, right-brain essence of being in and with the suffering of shame. New chapters carry theory further into praxis. In the time of a national Truth and Reconciliation Commission and a global Black Lives Matter movement, "Societies of Chronic Shame" invites therapists to deepen their awareness of collective societal trauma and of their own place within dissociated societal shame. "Three Faces of Shame" organizes the clinical wisdom of the book into clear guidelines for differential diagnosis and treatment. Lucid and compassionate, this book engages with the most profound challenges of clinical practice and touches into the depths of being human.

This book applies modern object-relations theory to a population for which the treatment du jour is increasingly cognitive-behavioral. Taking his lead from the delinquent adolescents in his practice, he presents a treatment approach in which adolescents are related to as people, rather than as transitory objects passing through a 'stage.' The book presents theory and case examples in a dialectical relationship, illuminating the seamlessness of theory and application.

This book examines the role of British object relations theory in order to explore our understanding and treatment of depression. It challenges current conceptualizations of depression while simultaneously discussing the complex nature of depression, its long-lasting and chronic implications and the susceptibility to relapse many may face. Illuminated throughout by case studies, areas of discussion include: Freud's theory of depression analytic subtypes of depression a theoretical contribution to the problem of relapse the correlation between dream work and the work of mourning. Object Relations in Depression offers a psychoanalytic discussion of the multifaceted nature of depression and as such will be of great interest to all those in the psychoanalytic field.

Relational Family Therapy introduces a cutting-edge family and couple therapy model that synthesizes relational theories and integrates object relations theory with interpersonal psychoanalysis and self-psychology. The model holds that individuals deal with conflicts rooted in the frustrated and threatening environment they grew up in by later forming intimate relationships that are comparable to the core experiences from their primary family systems. The book outlines the three levels of experience--systemic, interpersonal, and intrapsychic--and provide concrete ways for the therapist to address client problems and promote affect regulation. Chapters include transcripts of actual family therapy sessions as well as genograms so readers can see the model in action.

Trauma and Primitive Mental States: An Object Relations Perspective offers a clinically based framework through which adult survivors of early childhood trauma can re-engage with painful past events to create meaningful futures for themselves. The book highlights the use of the body and the mind in working with these early unmentalized and unrepresented states, illustrating the value of finding language that embodies emotions, and working in the here and now of transference and counter-transference. Including a range of examples of how early trauma can thus be re-presented and clinically understood, the book illustrates how patients can discover themselves and leave their repetitive patterns of suffering behind. Written by a clinician with over 30 years' experience, this will be fascinating reading for psychoanalysts and psychotherapists as well as any mental health professional working with childhood trauma.

Can the person-centred approach work in time-limited counselling and psychotherapy? This is a question that many practitioners grapple with as demand for brief therapy increases - particularly in the public sector. Brief Person-Centred Therapies is the first book to tackle the subject, bringing together the experience and insights of a leading international team of person-centred specialists. The book examines the "theoretical fit" between the person-centred approach and brief therapy. It also explores the issues which arise when working briefly in a range of different settings, including primary care, higher education and business. Brief Person-Centred Therapies is essential reading for all person-centered trainees and for practitioners who want to work in services where brief work is called for.

Featuring 21 papers by important contributors from academia and clinical practice, this volume examines the major developments in the client-centered approach to therapy which took place in the U.S. and Europe during the 1970's and early 1980's.

Counseling for Eating Disorders in Women focuses on women whose eating patterns have generated side-effects on other aspects of their lives such as work, health and family. Women with problems connected with over-eating, under-eating, and poor eating form a significant proportion of counselors' lists with a distinctive set of problems and challenges. This book adopts the unique approach of the Living Therapy series, using fictitious dialogue to illustrate the person-centered approach enabling the reader to experience directly the diverse and challenging issues surrounding patients. This is difficult to achieve with conventional text books. This book is invaluable for trainees and experienced counselors, members of support organizations, and women suffering from eating disorders, their friends and families.

"Richard has caught wonderfully in this text the sensitivity and delicacies of therapeutic interaction as well as the complex processes through which young people have to steer in their development towards adulthood. Richard's important and engaging text combines believable stories of young people with the provision of theoretical comment and developmental questions for the practitioner. I trust that this book will reach a wide audience of all those who are interested in and committed to the welfare and development of young people.' Colin Lago, in his Foreword 'This book goes a long way in explaining why the person-centred approach is so powerful with young people. It teases apart many of the fears, hurts, disappointments, familiar problems and social assaults that encourage adolescents to close off, turn to drugs, and attack others. After a clear and concise explanation of the theory, Richard takes us on amazing journeys into the heart and mind of the clients described in the book. They are struggling with many of the obstacles in the path of most children trying to grow up in this period of social toxicity. The book is a real gift to anybody interested in raising and counselling young people." -- Peggy Natiello, in the Foreword

Featuring contributions from leading figures in the person-centred world, this volume provides a comprehensive, in-depth and cutting-edge overview of the field. With its numerous case vignettes and extensive references, it is set to become the 'bible' of person-centred therapy for students and practitioners.

This book provides a practical framework for using a person based cognitive therapy approach for addressing the range of problems experienced by people with psychosis. Chapters 1-4 provide a context for the approach and chapters 5-12 cover the clinical application of the approach. Key features include; the integration of the author's work on Mindfulness (simple meditation technique that is similarly creating a lot of interest at present) for people with psychosis; inclusion of the two-chair method; plus a chapter on group therapy.

Angelo V. Boy is Professor of Education, University of New Hampshire, Durham, New Hampshire.

In Person-Centered Psychotherapies, David J. Cain discusses the history, theory, research and practice of this seminal approach whose basic premises have influenced the practice of most therapeutic systems. Person-centered therapy, also called client-centered therapy, was created by Carl Rogers almost 70 years ago. In polls of psychotherapists conducted in 1982 and 2007, Carl Rogers was voted the most influential psychotherapist in history. His original approach gave rise to a number of variations on the original, all of which may be classified as person-centered psychotherapies because of their basis in Rogers' core therapeutic conditions of empathy, unconditional positive regard, and congruence. This model emphasizes the client - therapist relationship, focusing on how the quality of moment-to-moment engagement between therapist and client can create optimal conditions for client growth. Person-centered therapies view clients as resourceful persons capable finding their own directions and solutions for their problems, and a fundamental value of the person-centered therapist is to honor and preserve the client's autonomy and choice. In this book, Dr. Cain presents and explores person-centered psychotherapy, its theory, history, therapy process, primary change mechanisms, the empirical basis for its effectiveness, and contemporary developments that have refined theory and expanded how it may be practiced. In recent years dialogical, experiential, existential and expressive-creative influences have been integrated in practice. This essential primer, amply illustrated with case examples featuring diverse clients, is perfect for graduate students studying theories of therapy and counseling as well as for seasoned practitioners interested in understanding how it has evolved in recent decades.

How can you enable people to develop themselves? How do you build a relationship of trust with a community? How do you create an environment in which clients respond positively?Facilitators from various professions will find that the second edition of Person-centred Communication continues to enhance their communication, listening, and empathic skills. It demonstrates how to live the values of the person-centred approach developed by Carl Rogers, by showing respect forclients and empowering them to take responsibility for themselves.Building on the feedback from readers of the first edition, this new edition focuses even more strongly on the self, including the self of the facilitator. The importance of self-reflection, thought-processes,values, and actions are creatively addressed. This is an indispensable guide to working with individuals, groups, and communities in a humane and respectful way.

`well written and succinct. Within each chapter are short punchy sections, which maintain interest. The author addresses some of the main criticisms of the approach and does so in a clear and concise manner. Each chapter ends with helpful suggestions for further reading. Also included are case studies which help to illustrate key points throughout′ - The Journal of Critical Psychology, Counselling & Psychotherapy `Size-wise, these books span an open palm and have a very handy flap on the back and front as an integral feature of the cover which can be used as a bookmark. They are concise, yet thorough, providing introductions to the key elements of the theory and practice underpinning major therapeutic approaches... [An] ideal ′intro′... I would recommend these books because, ′in a nutshell′, they work′ - Therapy Today Person-Centred Counselling in a Nutshell provides a short, accessible guide to one of the most popular approaches to counselling. Based on the ideas of Carl Rogers, the approach′s main premise is that clients knows themselves better than anyone else. It is the job of the person-centred practitioner to enable the client to discover and utilise their inner resources in order to change and grow. Using examples drawn from practice, Roger Casemore outlines the main principles of the person-centred approach including the core therapeutic conditions: o congruence o unconditional positive regard, and o empathy. Person-Centred Counselling in a Nutshell is ideal first reading for all who are new to learning about counselling.

Person-Centred Counselling Psychology is an introduction to the philosophy, theory and practice of the person-centred approach. Focusing on the psychological underpinnings of the approach, Ewan Gillon describes the theory of personality on which it is based and the nature of the therapeutic which is characterised by: " unconditional positive regard " empathy" congruence. The book is an applied, accessible text, providing a dialogue between the psychological basis of person-centred therapy and its application within real world. It shows how the person-centred approach relates to others within counselling psychology and to contemporary practices in mental health generally. It also gives guidance to readers on how to research, train and work as a person-centred practitioner.As well as psychology students, it will be of interest to those from other disciplines, counselling trainees, those within the caring professions, and person-centred therapists from a non-psychological background.Ewan Gillon is Lecturer in Psychology, Glasgow Caledonian University in the U.K.

Person-centred therapy, rooted in the experience and ideas of the eminent psychotherapist Carl Rogers, is widely practised in the UK and throughout the world. It has applications in health and social care, the voluntary sector and is relevant to work with people who are severely mentally and emotionally distressed. As well as being a valuable sourcebook and offering a comprehensive overview, this edition includes updated references and a new section on recent developments and advances. The book begins with a consideration of the principles and philosophy underpinning person-centred therapy before moving to a comprehensive discussion of the classical theory upon which practice is based. Further areas of discussion include: The model of the person, including the origins of mental and emotional distress The process of constructive change A review of revisions of and additions to person-centred theory Child development, styles of processing and configurations of self The quality of presence and working at relational depth Criticisms of the approach are addressed and rebutted and the application of theory to practice is discussed. The new final section is concerned with advances and developments in theory and practice including: Counselling for Depression The Social Dimension to Person-Centred Therapy Person-Centred Practice with People experiencing Severe and Enduring Distress and at the 'Difficult Edge' A Review of Research Throughout the book, attention is drawn to the wider person-centred literature to which it is a valuable key. Person-Centred Therapy will be of particular use to students, scholars and practitioners of person-centred therapy as well as to anyone who wants to know more about one of the major psychotherapeutic modalities.　

Personal Process in Child-Centred Play Therapy provides a very specific exploration of the play therapy process from the personal perspective of the play therapist. This volume examines the personal challenges, opportunities, losses and gains, and numerous obstacles that one has to negotiate through the course of both training to become a play therapist and working as a qualified clinician with children who have complex life difficulties. The book aims to offer a forum within which the role, function and process of the "personal" within play therapy can be explored. Bringing together a number of experienced play therapists, the book shares often deeply personal accounts of their experience of training and clinical practice. Chapters challenge the unspoken therapist taboos of shame, childhood trauma, vulnerability and grief, shining a light on the more hidden areas of therapist experience. Clinical issues around the unconscious process are also explored, but once again from the personal position of the play therapist, rather than the child. With a unique and distinct perspective on the therapeutic process, this book is specifically intended for both trainee and experienced play therapists, but will be relevant to all psychotherapists involved in working therapeutically with children and young people.

Almost a million people die by suicide every year (WHO estimate) The sheer numbers have made suicide prevention a major health target, but effective prevention is not straightforward. Suicide is a complex event, more complex than most of us imagine, calling for an equally complex response. Psychotherapy with Suicidal People provides a multi-component approach, with rich clinical data including many case histories, to guide the reader. Based on decades of research from across the globe, Antoon A. Leenaars takes the reader into the mind of the suicidal person, from the young to the elderly, from the anonymous to the famous. There is no better way to know, and thus to treat, a person. A plethora of special features makes this volume an international classic and includes: Reflections of many suicidologists such as Heraclitus, Plato, Sigmund Freud, Emile Durkheim and Edwin Shneidman. A unique window on the clinical mind of the author. Empirically supported definition, with applications across age, gender, historical time, as well as culture. The report of the International Working Group on Ethical and Legal Issues in Suicidology. Psychotherapy with Suicidal People: A Person-centred Approach is essential reading for clinical psychologists, psychiatrists and their trainees, and all clinicians who work with suicidal people.

By exploring various ways to assimilate recent progressive developments and to renew its vital links with its radical roots, Re-Visioning Person-Centred Therapy: Theory and Practice of a Radical Paradigm takes a fresh look at this revolutionary therapeutic approach. Bringing together leading figures in PCT and new writers from around the world, the essays in this book create fertile links with phenomenology, meditation and spirituality, critical theory, contemporary thought and culture, and philosophy of science. In doing so, they create an outline that renews and re-visions person-centred therapy's radical paradigm, providing fertile material in both theory and practice. Shot through with clinical studies, vignettes and in-depth discussions on aspects of theory, Re-Visioning Person-Centred Therapy will be stimulating reading for therapists in training and practice, as well as those interested in the development of PCT.

Sommerbeck provides a straightforward appreciation of the problems and offers solutions to working with clients with severe mental health problems. The book examines situations when the therapist feels outside their comfort zone and how to deal with them. In essence, it covers the areas that many academic courses don't teach.

This comprehensive volume addresses attachment theory's history as well as its integration with neurobiology, psychophysiology, theories of emotion, regulation theory, and mentalization theory. It explores how clinicians can connect with their clients so that they feel completely seen and heard. Attachment theory speaks to one's biological drive to connect, to relate, and to feel heard. The author aims to achieve this by condensing the enormous and diverse literature of the field into a singular, manageable work that clinicians can use to foster these connections. The book traces the history of attachment theory and describes how neurobiological research has influenced the expansion of attachment theory, and how emotions and psychophysiology have become critical to our understanding of human attachment connections. It concludes with a detailed examination of how to apply these theories in clinical practice. This practical book addresses attachment theory's take on integrating the mind, body, and emotion when striving toward well-being. It will be of great importance for psychotherapy students, beginning therapists, and experienced clinicians with an interest in attachment theory.

Somatic Methods for Affect Regulation is a unique resource that presents a variety of approaches for working somatically with youth. Chapters provide an overview of the relevant neuroscience research with a specific focus on affect regulation. The somatic techniques showcased in the book are evidence-based and illustrated with case studies showing their impact. Importantly, the chapters are also chock full of practical information, including strategies for working with dysregulated youth, information for collaborative and cooperative care, and an appendix with checklists and worksheets to help clinicians plan, guide, and assess their work.

In sharp contrast with the current top-down medicalized method to treating addiction, this book presents the felt sense polyvagal model (FSPM), a paradigm-shifting, bottom-up approach that considers addiction as an adaptive attempt to regulate emotional states and trauma. The felt sense polyvagal model draws from Porges' polyvagal theory, Gendelin's felt sense, and Lewis' learning model of addiction to offer a graphically illustrated and deeply embodied way of conceptualizing and treating addiction through supporting autonomic regulation. This model de-pathologizes addiction as it teaches embodied practices through tapping into the felt sense, the body's inner wisdom. Chapters first present a theoretical framework and demonstrate the graphic model in both clinician and client versions and then teach the clinician how to use the model in practice by providing detailed treatment strategies. This text's informed, compassionate approach to understanding and treating trauma and addiction is adaptable to any school of psychotherapy and will appeal to addiction experts, trauma specialists, and clinicians in all mental health fields.

A masterful synthesis of relational and attachment theory, neurobiology, and contemporary psychoanalysis, Understanding and Treating Chronic Shame has been internationally recognized as an essential text on shame. Integrating new theory about trauma, shame resilience, and self-compassion, this second edition further clarifies the relational, right-brain essence of being in and with the suffering of shame. New chapters carry theory further into praxis. In the time of a national Truth and Reconciliation Commission and a global Black Lives Matter movement, "Societies of Chronic Shame" invites therapists to deepen their awareness of collective societal trauma and of their own place within dissociated societal shame. "Three Faces of Shame" organizes the clinical wisdom of the book into clear guidelines for differential diagnosis and treatment. Lucid and compassionate, this book engages with the most profound challenges of clinical practice and touches into the depths of being human.

An interdisciplinary handbook about strengths-based clinical practices, this book finds the common factors in specific models from social work, psychology, and counseling. The book ends with a grounded theory informed method that pulls together what each of the chapters report, and posits a theory based on that work. Comprised of 23 chapters and written by leaders in the human services fields, Handbook of Strengths-Based Clinical Practices shows how professionals and students can facilitate change and resiliency in those with whom they work.

Fully revised, Learning the Language of Addiction Counseling, Fourth Edition introduces students and mental health professionals to the field of addiction counseling and helps them develop the knowledge, understanding, and skills needed to counsel people who are caught in the destructive cycle of addiction. Drawing from her years of experience working in the addiction-counseling field, Geri Miller provides an engaging, balanced overview of the major theoretical underpinnings and clinical practices in the field. From assessment and diagnosis of addiction to preparing for certification and licensure as an addiction professional, this comprehensive book covers all of the essentials.

The volume will be a collection of chapters about current theory, research, and practice related to multiculturalism and positive psychology. This book will serve as a reference to any who are interested in the intersection of positive psychology and multicultural context. While many in the field of positive psychology have begun to move more strongly towards a culturally-embedded approach that recognizes the importance of context in discussing, viewing and cultivating strengths in individuals from different backgrounds, there is still a dearth of research in this area compared with studies that take a cross-cultural approach (comparing people from different countries) or one that is purported to be "culture-free" or universal in its application. While it is becoming more common to see various articles or chapters published on these topics, there is still no comprehensive text aimed at discussion of the collection of these topics presented in a cohesive and structured way. This book aims to fill this gap in the literature. In this book, a broad definition of culture is utilized that includes such facets as race, ethnicity, socioeconomic or social class status, disability, religion, sexual orientation and gender. This book is intended to present research, theory and suggestions for practice that are grounded in diverse cultural contexts and current scholarship. It will assist researchers, students and practitioners who are studying and working within diverse populations. Currently there exists no comprehensive text that addresses the intersection of positive psychology and multiculturalism. Several edited volumes address positive psychology constructs (e.g., well-being, optimal experience, autonomy) across cultures, but they do not focus on multicultural populations within the United States. Other books focus more specifically on mental health applications and stress and coping among multicultural populations, however these books do not provide a broad perspective on psychology beyond this application piece. The proposed book will review current theory and research about constructs in addition to applications across contexts. Finally, other published books have focused on youth within multicultural society; this volume is more broad in its address of issues of positive psychology across the lifespan and across various aspects of identity including disability, gender, social class and sexual orientation.

The best minds in positive psychology survey the state of the field Positive Psychology in Practice, Second Edition moves beyond the theoretical to show how positive psychology is being used in real-world settings, and the new directions emerging in the field. An international team of contributors representing the best and brightest in the discipline review the latest research, discuss how the findings are being used in practice, explore new ideas for application, and discuss focus points for future research. This updated edition contains new chapters that explore the intersection between positive psychology and humanistic psychology, salugenesis, hedonism, and eudaimonism, and more, with deep discussion of how the field is integrating with the new areas of self-help, life coaching, social work, rehabilitation psychology, and recovery-oriented service systems. This book explores the challenges and opportunities in the field, providing readers with the latest research and consensus on practical application. Get up to date on the latest research and practice findings Integrate positive psychology into assessments, life coaching, and other therapies Learn how positive psychology is being used in schools Explore possible directions for new research to push the field forward Positive psychology is being used in areas as diverse as clinical, counseling, forensic, health, educational, and industrial/organizational settings, in a wide variety of interventions and applications. Psychologists and other mental health professionals who want to promote human flourishing and well-being will find the second edition of Positive Psychology in Practice to be an informative, comprehensive guide.

Since the turn of the twenty-first century, the field of positive psychology has sought to implement a science of human flourishing so that we may lead happier, more fulfilling lives. It has found expression not only in academic papers but also popular books and, increasingly, in government policy. The Routledge International Handbook of Critical Positive Psychology is the first volume dedicated to a critical appraisal of this influential but controversial field of study. The book critically examines not only the scientific foundations of positive psychology, but also the sociocultural and political tenets on which the field rests. It evaluates the current field of knowledge and practice, and includes chapters analysing the methodological constructs of the field, as well as others that question what positive psychology actually means by ideas such as happiness or well-being. Taking the debate further, the book then discusses how positive psychology can be applied in a wider variety of settings than is presently the case, helping communities and individuals by acknowledging the reality of people's lives rather than adhering strictly to debateable theoretical constructs. Including contributions from disciplines ranging from psychoanalysis to existential therapy, theology to philosophy, and contributors from throughout the world, The Routledge International Handbook of Critical Positive Psychology will be enlightening reading for anyone interested in how psychology has sought to understand human well-being.

Positive psychology - essentially the scientific study of the strengths that enable individuals and communities to thrive - is a relatively new discipline that has experienced substantial growth in the last 5-10 years. Research suggests that the principles and theories from this area of study are highly relevant to the practice of counseling and psychotherapy, and positive psychology presents clinicians and patients with a much needed balance to the more traditional focus on pathology and the disease model of mental health. This book provides a comprehensive introduction to the best-researched positive psychological interventions. It emphasizes clinical application, providing a detailed view of how the research can be applied to patients. Covering the broaden-and-build theory, strengths-based therapy, mentoring modalities and more, the volume will provide numerous assessment tools, exercises and worksheets for use throughout the counseling and psychotherapy process.

This book is for everyone interested in counseling, whether as practitioners, students, "consumers," or general readers. It will bring to the professional and lay reader alike a compilation of practical counseling approaches written by experienced counselors about topics that will be both contemporary and timeless. Above all, it will be useful to a wide range of counselors--psychologists, nurses, clergy, teachers, social workers, school counselors, doctors, and other helpers.

For both students and practicing counselors, this book fills the gaps that exist between many current academic programs and practitioner's needs for focused training on how to better assist clients with dream interpretations.  Its main focus is on dreams concerning family members and other major figures in the dreamer's life with whom he or she interacts.  Readers will first learn how to understand and use their own dreams, and then how to apply this in order to facilitate their clients' interpretations of dreams.  They will be amazed and fascinated by the issues, emotions, and problem-solving suggestions that are often revealed as they guide their clients' use of a personalized dream interpretation　method developed by the author. Through the use of a detailed case example of a client and her dreams, the author shows how each step of this method can be applied and carried out in practice and is easily integrated with contemporary psychotherapies, especially cognitive behavior therapies.

This book presents the application of key psychoanalytic concepts in thinking about the dynamics in the couple relationship. The contributions to the first part, mainly theory, discuss how different psychoanalytic ideas can be used in conceptualizing the nature of couple interaction. In the second part, on clinical practice, four couples tell their stories during their clinical sessions. Couple Stories conveys a lively experience of the couple's relationships as these occur in the consulting room and there are several commentaries for each 'couple story'. Commentaries explore the concepts described in the earlier part of the book, as well as clinical themes that couples bring to their sessions and the difficulties that they have encountered in the course of their relationship. Commentaries also provide an insight into how psychoanalytic couple therapists think about the clinical material, what they might select as a focus, and how they may go about developing a hypothesis about the nature of the relationship between the partners.

Religion, more than sexuality, cast psychoanalysis in controversy and onto the world stage even as it threatened to dismantle the psychoanalytic collective. In the founding years of the first psychoanalytic periodicals, relational dynamics shaped the psychoanalytic corpus on religion. The psychoanalytic pioneers developed their ideas in tandem even if in protest to one another. Religion is a topic worthy of engagement, not least because the symbolized terrain in the history of religion was so often deployed as a vehicle for motivating, disciplining, or editing out a member of the psychoanalytic community in publication. This book offers an interdisciplinary approach to religion and psychology, including a compelling denouement that reveals new narratives about longstanding rumours in the early history of the psychoanalytic movement. Above all, this volume demonstrates that the first generation of psychoanalysts succeeded in writing themselves into the history of religious thought and sacralizing the origins of psychoanalysis.

This book uses clear language, modern contexts and key psychoanalytic concepts to exemplify how Sigmund Freud's thinking and legacy is directly relevant to contemporary therapists. Interweaving theory with history, Freudian Thought for the Contemporary Clinician allows readers to take a walk in Freud's shoes, offering a new framework for understanding his arcane language and the cultural mores of the early 20th century. Robert Mendelsohn explores topics including sexuality and gender, racial injustice and cultural differences with direct reference to Freud's cases, demonstrating how traditional psychoanalytic ideas may inform solutions to issues we face today. Featuring clinical examples and philosophical explorations delivered in an accessible style, Freudian Thought for the Contemporary Clinician will be a key text for psychoanalytic clinicians in practice and in training. It will also be of great interest to academics and scholars of psychoanalytic studies, the history of psychology and the history of ideas.

What is a novel education like? The surprising reply supposes that fiction affects the crisis of understanding work within the human professions of teaching and psychoanalysis. The studies of learning and not learning presented begin with the delicate surprise made from representing affective experiences and conflicts within self/other relations. Freud's question of presenting psychoanalysis to others, and the accidental pedagogy made, continues to animate our debates on the uses of affected learning. Novel Educationanalyzes the perils and pleasures of inviting, narrating, and interpreting emotional experience in learning and not learning. Drawing upon contemporary psychoanalytic debates on the relation between understanding and therapeutic action, these studies open discussion on the unusual world of psychoanalytic methods and link free association and the transference to the aesthetic conflicts made from thinking about sexuality, and the difficulties of inhibition in learning, listening, and the teacher's memory of remembering learning to teach. Novel Educationhighlights a discussion of the teacher's depression and the difficulty of formulating subjective knowledge from practices, philosophies, and theories in the human professions. It raises the question of how fields of thought and practice affect themselves. How may we describe the human idiom made in pedagogical and psychoanalytic relationships? And why join learning to not learning? This thought-provoking book is essential reading on a broad range of fields for undergraduate and graduate students, as well as faculty members.

This groundbreaking book presents a new model for incorporating the human body, and specifically physical touch, into psychoanalysis and psychotherapy, particularly for patients who have experienced trauma. Novak's model of informed and disciplined touch articulates five categories of touch and three phases of therapeutic body work, all of which can help move the patient and therapist directly into bodily experiences that enable trauma memories to be processed, and then analyzed and transformed. This transformation leads to patients experiencing their bodies in fundamentally new ways, both relationally and intrapsychically. The book also grapples with the risks and ethics of working directly with patients' bodies, outlining theoretical and clinical elements that help create a safe and sacred therapeutic structure. Novak's model offers a continuum of touch from everyday physical interactions, such as handshakes or hugs, to more complex and complete ways of working with the body that are safe and meaningful and that create an integrated experience of the patient's mind and body. Physical Touch in Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy is of interest to therapists at all levels of experience in the fields of counseling, social work, psychotherapy, and psychoanalysis. Practitioners in other helping professions such as healthcare, massage therapy, and physical therapy, as well as providers of wholistic medicine, will also be able to make use of the comprehensive clinical model and case studies detailed in the book.

Wholeness is a difficult concept to understand in any field. Psychology and psychotherapy are no exceptions. If wholeness is the goal of our deepest human desire, how best can we work toward that goal over our lifetime? What path is right for us? In this book, Murray Stein argues that practicing wholeness is relevant to many areas of our lives: our private inner worlds; our religious beliefs, images, and rituals; our organizational involvements; and our cultural paradigms. Practicing wholeness is a daily activity with implications at cognitive, emotional, physical, and spiritual levels. Stein sets out a general concept of wholeness and attempts to detail what it is made up of by using Jung's theory of instincts and archetypes. He focuses on daily life and on the clinical practice of psychotherapy, exploring the relation of psychotherapeutic treatment to human nature. Finally, he examines several aspects of treatment as these confront the practicing therapist and the patient: the reconstruction of personal history and its meaning; the nature of the relationship between therapist and patient, and the role this plays in the healing process; and some psychopathological problems that stand in the way of practicing wholeness. Murray Stein, Ph.D. is a supervising training analyst and former president of The International School of Analytical Psychology in Zurich, Switzerland (ISAP Zurich). His most recent books include Outside Inside and All Around, Minding the Self and The Principle of Individuation. From 2001 to 2004 he was president of the International Association for Analytical Psychology. He lectures internationally on topics related to Analytical Psychology and its applications in the contemporary world. He is publisher emeritus of Chiron Publications and is the focus of many Asheville Jung Center online seminars.

Psychoanalytic Approaches to Loss: Mourning, Melancholia and Couples applies psychoanalytic ideas to the　clinically complex issue of loss in couples and families and outlines a new model for the treatment of associated unresolved grief. In line with contemporary approaches to couple and family psychoanalysis, this integrated object relations and link theory model provides a clear framework and approach for assessing and treating this clinical　presentation. The book brings together contributions from internationally known and respected clinicians and authors who focus on loss, including repeated pregnancy loss, the loss of a child or parent and the loss of a relationship itself. These psychoanalytic couple therapists take the reader inside their consulting rooms, enabling observation of their approaches to the treatment of couples experiencing loss and associated unresolved grief. Psychoanalytic Approaches to Loss: Mourning, Melancholia and Coupleswill make an important contribution to the literature on grief and mourning and the application of psychoanalytic thinking　to couples presenting with difficulties linked to unresolved grief, following loss. It　represents an essential resource to psychotherapists, counsellors, family therapists, mental health professionals and many others supporting those experiencing loss.

Explores psychoanalytic counseling from both a theoretical and clinical perspective. Introductory in nature, it illustrates how the counselor, acting as a scientist/practitioner may use psychoanalytic theory as a template for understanding client interview behavior, for intervening in the flow of that behavior, and as a means of assessing the efficacy of those interventions. The focus is on the importance of the counselor acting as scientist/practitioner in helping the client. Coverage encompasses history and analysis of psychoanalytic ideas and their development, the authors' interpretations of Freud's classic theory, Kohut's theory of the self and their own ideas about the interview process. They present technical considerations, cite research literature, and deal with the psychoanalytic counseling of women, ethics and research.

In this book, Philip Rosenbaum and Richard Webb consider the complexities of working as counselors and psychotherapists for college students, and offer a broad and detailed account of the developmental issues essential to understanding adolescent experience. Drawing on existentialism, cultural psychology and relational and object relations theories in psychoanalysis, this book offers a perspective that is sensitive to both clinical concerns and the broader context of college counseling and working with adolescents. Particular attention is paid to the emergence of adolescent identities through a relationship with "otherness," and several considerations are explored as a result. These include the emergence and reconciliation of destructive feelings, suicidal phenomenology and the effects of trauma. By taking a fresh look at clinical developmental theories as they affect adolescents and young adults, Rosenbaum and Webb provide a view of college-student development that is theoretically rich and clinically applicable in a way that warrants renewed appreciation and practice among counselors, psychotherapists and psychoanalysts working with college-age clients.

The outcomes of psychoanalysis, as with other psychotherapies, vary considerably. Psychoanalytic Treatment in Adults examines the results of a longitudinal study of change during psychoanalysis, illuminating the characteristics of patients, analysts and analyses which can help to predict outcomes of treatment. Written by experienced psychologists and psychoanalysts, chapters in the book draw upon sixty case studies to consider how patients with very different analytic outcomes respond at both the beginning and end of their analysis. Psychoanalysts used a clinician report measure, the Shedler-Westen Assessment Procedure, to describe a patient at the beginning of psychoanalysis and every six months until the analysis ended. This allowed the authors to learn about changes over analysis and, in turn, improved treatment planning and practice for the well-being of other patients. Chapters explore five outcomes: a negative therapeutic reaction; attrition when the patient drops out; attrition due to external events; mutual agreement between patient and analyst without maximum benefits; and mutual agreement between patient and analyst with maximum benefits. The findings from these chapters will be of interest to researchers and academics in the fields of psychoanalysis, psychotherapy, psychodynamic therapy, psychoanalytic education, psychiatry and psychology. The results should also help clinicians recognize potential problems early in analytic treatments so that they can work more effectively with patients.

Winner of the 2020 Gradiva Award The Psychoanalytic Zero: A Decolonizing Study of Therapeutic Dialogues is written from the unique perspective of a Western-trained Asian psychoanalyst and applies principles of Eastern philosophy to understand the psychoanalytic relationship, psychoanalytic processes, and their uses--and limitations--for alleviating human suffering. Bringing a unique Eastern perspective to a previously Western-dominated discipline and framed within the current relational and ethical trends in psychoanalysis, the book enables readers to develop a language for understanding an Eastern ethical viewpoint and explore how this language can change our awareness of psychoanalytic practice and human suffering. Chapters are devoted to the Eastern concepts of nothingness, emptiness, surrender, sincerity, silence and narrative, and issues including existential "guilt of being," trauma, contingency, informed consent, the sense of being human, and uncertainty. Discussions are illustrated and illuminated through vivid recreations and careful elaboration of therapeutic case studies with traumatized patients. The studies demonstrate the process by which patients regain a sense of being human. This enriched perspective will, it is hoped, help the analyst treat traumatized patients who are unable to relate to others, and who do not experience themselves as being human. The Psychoanalytic Zero will enrich an analyst's sensitivity to the appearance of the moment without context--the psychoanalytic zero--which opens infinite opportunities for continued growth in a psychoanalytic relationship. It will be of great appeal to psychoanalysts and psychoanalytic psychotherapists interested in self-psychological, intersubjective, and relational theories.

Reinterpreting the Borderline is a timely and comprehensive analysis of Heidegger's philosophy and its relevance to the clinical fields of psychiatry, psychotherapy, and psychoanalysis. Cammell presents the key elements of Heidegger's philosophy and further explores affiliations with other key philosophers influenced by Heidegger. By applying these philosophical ideas to developmental models and clinical treatments of borderline personality disorder, Cammell develops a system of ideas he terms "hermeneutic ontology," exploring the fundamentally relational, embodied, affective, temporal, and technical aspects of existence that become problematized in the experience of "the borderline"--both for the suffering individual and the concerned clinician. Cammell posits that "borderline experience" extends beyond the suffering individual to the context of the psychotherapy itself, something in which the therapist and suffering individual must collaborate to overcome. Reinterpreting the Borderline provides a rich and complex study toward simultaneously overcoming the divide between theory and practice, philosophy and psychotherapy, and finally the borderline between suffering individuals and their concerned clinicians.

The Routledge History of Madness and Mental Health explores the history and historiography of madness from the ancient and medieval worlds to the present day. Global in scope, it includes case studies from Africa, Asia, and South America as well as Europe and North America, drawing together the latest scholarship and source material in this growing field and allowing for fresh comparisons to be made across time and space. Thematically organised and written by leading academics, chapters discuss broad topics such as the representation of madness in literature and the visual arts, the material culture of madness, the perpetual difficulty of creating a classification system for madness and mental health, madness within life histories, the increased globalisation of knowledge and treatment practices, and the persistence of spiritual and supernatural conceptualisations of experiences associated with madness. This volume also examines the challenges involved in analysing primary sources in this area and how key themes such as class, gender, and race have influenced the treatment and diagnosis of madness throughout history. Chronologically and geographically wide-ranging, and providing a fascinating overview of the current state of the field, this is essential reading for all students of the history of madness, mental health, psychiatry, and medicine.

The fifth edition of Richard Nelson-Jones′ Theory and Practice of Counselling and Therapy provides an essential introduction to the major theoretical approaches in counselling and psychotherapy today. This comprehensive and accessible book has been substantially revised and updated, and now includes two brand new chapters on solution-focused therapy and narrative therapy by Alasdair Macdonald and Martin Payne. Following a clearly-defined structure, each chapter describes the origin of the therapeutic approach, a biography of its originator, its theory and practice, discusses case material and further developments, and suggests further reading. Each chapter also contains review and personal questions. Richard Nelson-Jones′ authoritative and practical textbook is the ideal companion for students on introductory courses and those embarking on professional training.

Eating disorders such as anorexia and bulimia are increasingly prevalent in today's society and of great concern to a wide range of health-related professionals, including counsellors and psychotherapists. This important new text, written in an intelligent yet accessible style, provides an authoritative and practical introduction to therapeutic work with this large client group. Taking a psychodynamic approach, Working with Eating Disorders also embraces an appreciation of cultural influences and uniquely illustrates the context of eating disorders in today's society.

A psychoanalytic understanding of violence is key to successful treatment strategies. This book draws on the expanding discipline of forensic psychotherapy to explore the theory behind violent behaviour in adults. With key definitions and practical case studies, it offers an accessible framework for mental health workers.

Hanna Levenson discusses the approach of brief dynamic therapy in general, but focuses on one example, time-limited dynamic psychotherapy, to give readers a richer understanding of this popular model.

Short-term therapy doesn't have to be second-best! This valuable book explores a variety of brief therapy approaches with young adults between 17 and 25. Each case discussion thoroughly covers the salient points of the client, the problem, and the treatment, as well as segments of the treatment transcripts that illustrate the critical aspects of the counseling. A post-hoc question-and-answer section explores alternative ways the therapist could have handled the client and allows in-depth examination of successful treatment approaches. Case Book of Brief Psychotherapy with College Students offers constructive suggestions for dealing with common presenting problems, including: depression individuation issues PTSD impulse control in mandated psychotherapy cult membership post-rape trauma bereavement issues With comprehensive references and a fascinating variety of presenting problems, Case Book of Brief Psychotherapy with College Students is a helpful resource for any psychologist, social worker, or therapist whose clients include young adults.

Contemporary Psychodynamic Theory and Practice introduces the contributions of the key thinkers in the broader psychodynamic tradition, demonstrating the relevance of relational perspectives and recent developments for psychotherapy and psychosocial intervention. William Borden presents thedevelopmental perspectives and clinical approaches of divergent theorists, from Freud, Jung, and Adler to Winnicott and Kohut, and shows how their views enlarge understanding of essential concerns in clinical practice.

Building on the success of Working with the Elderly and their Carers, this new edition pursues an in depth understanding of therapy with older people. A wide range of clinical material and 3 new chapters draw on developments in psychodynamic theory and the author's experience to offer valuable insights for trainees and experienced practitioners.

Empathy and Mental Health shows mental health professionals how to employ a deeper understanding of subjective, objective, and interpersonal modalities of empathy in their practice. Chapters are full of case studies and examples that demonstrate empathy's role in challenging and complex encounters, and as each concept and process is introduced, Dr. Clark discusses strategies for responding empathically. The book has a sound theoretical grounding that is informed by extensive material on empathy and empathic understanding from the counseling and psychotherapy literature and related fields of inquiry. Drawing from psychodynamic, existential-humanistic, cognitive behavioral, and other contemporary orientations, this text makes empathy immediately useful and understandable to students and practitioners.

Essential Psychodynamic Psychotherapy: An Acquired Art provides an essential, accessible grounding in current psychodynamic theory and practice for a wide range of readers. For trainees, it offers a very useful toolset to help them make the transition from purely theoretical training to the uncharted territory of clinical practice. For more seasoned therapists and those seeking to deepen their understanding of psychodynamic therapy, it provides conceptual clarity, and may also serve as a stepping stone to more complex and denser psychoanalytic works written for advanced clinicians. Essential Psychodynamic Psychotherapy: An Acquired Art is an introduction to how to think and work psychodynamically. It is written primarily for those training at a postgraduate level in psychoanalysis and psychodynamic psychotherapy, but reaches well beyond that audience. It is grounded in contemporary psychoanalytic theory, drawing on the work of Winnicott, Bion, and Ogden, all of whom are pivotal in current psychodynamic thought and practice. It also integrates attachment theory and research, and includes fresh contributions from neuropsychological research. The voice of the book is honest and intimate. The tone is practical. It is written with a clear-minded understanding of contemporary psychodynamic theory that allows the new therapist to access the deepest and richest parts of the therapy itself. It translates many of the key theoretical tenets of psychodynamic psychotherapy, giving the reader a clear (but non-formulaic) guide as to how handle the contours of any analytic session; how to open one's perceptual and emotional apertures as clinician; how to work in and understand "the relationship"; and how to work with the most common intra- and interpersonal problems patients present. This publication will be a valuable guide for new analysts and therapists, and also for those seeking to understand what the world of psychodynamic therapy may hold for them, no matter where they are in their clinical careers. Dr. Teri Quatman is an Associate Professor of Counseling Psychology in the Graduate Department of Counseling Psychology at Santa Clara University. She earned her Ph.D. from Stanford University in 1990, and has studied, practiced, and taught psychodynamic psychotherapy to graduate students for the past 25 years. 　 　 　 　 　

Christians engaged in the fields of psychology, psychotherapy and counseling are living in a unique moment. Over the last couple decades, these fields have grown more and more open to religious belief and religion-accommodative therapies. At the same time, Christian counselors and psychotherapists encounter pressure (for example, from insurance companies) to demonstrate that their accommodative therapies are as beneficial as secular therapies. This raises the need for evidence to support Christian practices and treatments.This essay by Keith J. Edwards and Edward B. Davis was originally published as chapter 7 in the book Evidence-Based Practices for Christian Counseling and Psychotherapy, edited by Everett L. Worthington Jr., Eric L. Johnson, Joshua N. Hook and Jamie D. Aten. Edwards and Davis provide an overview of theory and research supporting approaches to psychotherapy that are based in psychodynamic theory and practice, particularly exploring emotion and attachment within relationships with significant adults and with God. Since people develop their sense of self in relationships, those relationships can become the curative focus in psychotherapy. Although no Christian-accomodative RCTs exist at this point, the general approach is strongy supported by secular research. The chapter is particularly strong in practical advice regarding conducting this type of psychotherapy.Like the other essays in the full-length volume, Edwards's andn Davis's essay contributes to a field of inquiry that, while still in its infancy, promises to have enormous implications for future work in Christian counseling and psychotherapy.

This highly innovative new book reconsiders the structure of basic emotions, the self and the mind. It clinically covers mental disorders, therapeutic interventions, defense mechanisms, consciousness and personality and results in a comprehensive discussion of human responses to the environmental crisis. For openers, a novel psychodynamic model of happiness, sadness, fear and anger is presented that captures their object relational features. It offers a look through the eyes of these specific emotions and delineates how they influence the interaction with other persons. As regulation of the emotional state is the core task of the self, dysregulation can lead to mental disorders. Clinical cases of post-traumatic stress disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder and depression are discussed, using the model to outline the emotional turbulence underneath. Finally, the elaborated theory is used to analyse personal responses to the environmental crisis and political strategies that capitalise on them. This book will appeal to scholars, psychotherapists and psychiatrists with an interest in emotions and who wish to challenge their own implicit theory of emotion with an explicit new model. It will also be of interest for academic researchers and professionals in fields where emotional processes play a pivotal role.

Despite the explosion of interest in recent years in techniques for dynamic brief psychotherapy, few training programs in clinical psychology and psychiatry teach short-term methods. Here is an invaluable reference for students, teachers, clinicians, and researchers. For the first time in one volume, the creators of both the major and lesser-known approaches to this subject present in their own words the theoretical underpinnings and the clinical models for their therapeutic strategies.The contributors thoroughly describe ten different approaches to short-term dynamic psychotherapy, covering in each instance the history of the method, inclusion and exclusion criteria, treatment goals, theory of change, techniques, case examples, problems with specific populations, and empirical evidence. The book first surveys the traditional short therapies, including Time Limited Psychotherapy devised by James Mann, Short-Term Anxiety-Provoking Psychotherapy (STAPP) first developed by Peter Sifneos, and Intensive Short-Term Dynamic Psychotherapy originated by Habib Davanloo. The volume then turns to newer approaches, ranging from the Vanderbilt Approach to Time-Limited Dynamic Psychotherapy (TDLP), to Short-Term Dynamic Therapy of Stress Response Syndromes, from Dynamic Supportive Psychotherapy to Brief Adaptive Psychotherapy.The editors’ own detailed history and comparison of techniques adds further insight into this widely used method of therapy. They also discuss the arguments against the use of brief dynamic therapy from a long-form therapy perspective. The book concludes with guidelines for sorting out the potentially confusing array of treatment methods that now exist in this exciting area.

This clinically based manual takes readers through the Core Conflictual Relationship Theme (CCRT) which is the basis of a specific form of brief psychodynamic psychotherapy (BPP). The CCRT method is research-supported and easily operationalized.

Inside Out and Outside In has established itself as a foundational book for mental health practitioners in a variety of disciplines who work with clients in complex social environments. It is unique in its focus on the forces that shape people from within and also from their social worlds, with sensitivity to race, gender, sexuality, and class. The fifth edition features new material and revisions throughout while maintaining the respectful and accessible style for which the book is known. It has been fully updated to reflect the changing political and social landscape, regarding women's issues, immigration issues, and racism, to name just a few. Two new chapters have been added on Biopsychosocial Assessment and Neurobiology. In addition, the authors reinforce intersectionality and diversity through case studies in every chapter. The fifth edition of Inside Out and Outside In is an up-to-date and essential resource for mental health professionals and students practicing in today's increasingly complex environment.

Short-term dynamic interpersonal psychotherapy is an integrated, trauma-informed, contemporary, dynamic way of working with a range of mental health difficulties. Flexible though structured, phase-oriented, focused and time-limited, it is informed by the Conversational Model, Attachment and Interpersonal Theories and Brief Psychodynamic Psychotherapies, which are briefly described. It provides clinicians with a way of working with patients whose difficulties do not warrant long term therapy, who prefer a talking therapy or who have failed cognitive/behaviour therapies. With the help of examples, it guides the process of assessment and therapy with trauma in mind: using Conversational Model techniques where empathy replaces confrontation; resistance is seen as a fear of re-traumatization; defence mechanisms are regarded as adaptive coping mechanisms which later become maladaptive; transference interventions replace interpretations, and self-reflective capacity is encouraged rather than just insight. Separation anxiety is addressed and anxiety-provoking techniques are avoided, given that anxiety is a large part of most presentations.

This key book in the Basic Texts in Counselling and Psychotherapy series is an authoritative and accessible introduction to psychodynamic counselling and its basic principles. The author, Laurence Spurling, is a leading figure in the discipline and, here, he examines the underlying psychodynamic approach, its main theoretical ideas and principles of practice, the techniques associated with it and ways of thinking about the conduct of counselling. Looking at two major themes in particular, namely the involvement of counsellors working with clients with severe emotional and psychological problems and the influence of organisational settings on counselling work, this book is an essential guide for students and practitioners of counselling or psychotherapy, along with those from other professions, such as nurses and teachers, who are called upon to use counselling skills in their work. New to this Edition: - Includes a brand-new chapter on developing competence in working with social difference and diversity within the therapeutic relationship - Discusses the different phases of counselling work, from referral through to the final session and beyond - Examines the role of organisational settings in therapists' everyday practice, providing insight into managing institutional demands - Explores the challenges of working with clients with more severe emotional and psychological problems

This practical and scholarly text presents a comprehensive review and evaluation of the theory, research, and practice of psychodynamically oriented brief psychotherapy. Offering in-depth discussions of the major clinical and theoretical approaches; chapters explore commonalities and differences in patient selection, theory of personality and psychopathology, theory of change, and techniques of therapy. The book addresses general questions about the efficacy of each approach and gives special attention to treatment of "difficult" patients, children, adolescents, and the elderly.

Treating borderline patients is one of the most challenging areas in psychotherapy because of the patient's extreme emotional expressions, the strain it places on the therapist, and the danger of the patient acting out and harming himself or the therapeutic relationship. Many clinicians consider this patient population difficult, if not impossible, to treat. However, in recent years dedicated experts have focused their clinical and research efforts on the borderline patient and have produced treatments that increase our success in working with borderline patients. Transference-Focused Therapy (TFP) is psychodynamic treatment designed especially for borderline patients. This book provides a concise and comprehensive introduction to TFP that will be useful both to experienced clinicians and also to students of psychotherapy. TFP has its roots in object relations and it emphasizes that the transference is the key to understanding and producing change. The patient's internal world of object representations unfolds and is lived in the transference with the therapist. The therapist listens for and makes use of the relationship that is revealed through words, silence, or, as often occurs in the case of individuals with some borderline personality disorder, acting out in subtle or not-so-subtle ways. This primer offers clinicians a way to understand and then use the transference and countertransference for change in the patient.

Psychodynamic Approaches to the Experience of Dementia: Perspectives from Observation, Theory and Practice demonstrates the impact of healthcare approaches that take into account not only the practical needs but also the emotional experience of the patient, their partners, families and friends, lay carers and professional staff. Currently there is no cure for dementia, but the psychosocial and therapeutic approaches described in this volume have appeared to help people, both patients and carers, feel more contained and less lonely and isolated. Psychoanalytic theory provides a disciplined way of thinking about the internal world of an individual and their relationships. Each author provides their own commentary on the personal and interpersonal effects of dementia, endeavouring to understand behaviours and emotions which may otherwise seem incomprehensible. The subject is approached from a psychodynamic perspective, considering the unconscious, previous and current experiences and relationships, including those between patients and staff. Psychodynamic Approaches to the Experience of Dementia illustrates the practical and theoretical thinking of clinicians from a wide range of disciplines who are engaged in the care of people in late life with a diagnosis of dementia. It will be essential reading for mental health and health professionals in practice and training in the field of dementia.

Susan Howard explains in a clear, jargon-free style, the concepts at the heart of the psychodynamic approach, and, drawing on case material, describes the therapeutic practice which rests on those ideas. Assuming no previous knowledge of the subject, the book introduces: the history of the approach main key concepts practical techniques used by practitioners In the first chapter, you are introduced to a client, Layla, whose case you′ll revisit throughout the book, helping you connect theory and practice. This edition also includes new material on working with diversity and difference, neuroscience and extended discussion on ethics.

On the surface, people go to work and come home again. They sometimes manage people while most are managed themselves. But beneath the function and structures of the work itself, a whole range of emotions affects the success of the relationship between employee and manager and ultimately the organisation they both belong to. Psychodynamic Organisational Theory: Key Concepts and Cases provides a comprehensive but accessible introduction to this fascinating field of study. Featuring case vignettes which bring the various concepts to life, the book is divided into four parts. Part I looks at how the individual relates to the organisation and the unconscious energies they bring, while Part II examines group dynamics and how they affect productivity, including a chapter on meetings. Part III explores the realm of leadership and what roles a manager can play in managing their staff, while Part IV introduces the idea of personality and describes how the manager's personality influences management dynamics as well as the wider organisational culture. Central to the book, as well as the idea that organisational phenomena are often unconscious, is the understanding that relationships are always reciprocal. Through complex psychological dynamics manager and employee influence and change each other during the process of managing and being managed. This text will be essential reading for students and scholars of leadership, HRM, and organizational psychology, as well as consultants and managers looking for practical insights into how human relationships affect the success of every organisation.

This engaging and accessible textbook introduces psychodynamic theory in a way that helps readers better understand complex theories and how these can enrich their practice. Five chapters on classic theorists explore their life stories and the ideas, and are illustrated with captivating case studies. Contemporary developments relating to psychodynamic theory are explored, such as the links with neurobiology and how attachment shapes a baby's brain, and how to make sense of the anxieties contained in the organisations of hospitals and day care nurseries. It also examines psychodynamic evidence based theory and practiceAn insightful introduction to core psychodynamic theory, this refreshingly clear book is invaluable reading for all students, trainees and practitioners in counselling and psychotherapy, and of interest to those studying and working in the fields of nursing, social work and counselling psychology.

This new edition reflects the growing use of short term therapy across a variety of settings. Packed with new material on key issues, the book explores the therapeutic relationship, the length of therapy and the evidence base for various forms of therapy. This is key reading for anyone wishing to incorporate a psychodynamic element in their work.

Transference-Focused Psychotherapy for Borderline Personality Disorder: A Clinical Guide presents a model of borderline personality disorder (BPD) and its treatment that is based on contemporary psychoanalytic object relations theory as developed by the leading thinker in the field, Otto Kernberg, M.D., who is also one of the authors of this insightful manual. The model is supported and enhanced by material on current phenomenological and neurobiological research and is grounded in real-world cases that deftly illustrate principles of intervention in ways that mental health professionals can use with their patients. The book first provides clinicians with a model of borderline pathology that is essential for expert assessment and treatment planning and then addresses the empirical underpinnings and specific therapeutic strategies of transference-focused psychotherapy (TFP). * From the chapter on clinical assessment, the clinician learns how to select the type of treatment on the basis of the level of personality organization, the symptoms the patient experiences, and the areas of compromised functioning. In order to decide on the type of treatment, the clinician must examine the patient's subjective experience (such as symptoms of anxiety or depression), observable behaviors (such as investments in relationships and deficits in functioning), and psychological structures (such as identity, defenses, and reality testing). * Next, the clinician learns to establish the conditions of treatment through negotiating a verbal treatment contract or understanding with the patient. The contract defines the responsibilities of each of the participants and defines what the reality of the therapeutic relationship is. * Techniques of treatment interventions and tactics to address particularly difficult clinical challenges are addressed next, equipping the therapist to employ the four primary techniques of TFP (interpretation, transference analysis, technical neutrality, and use of countertransference) and setting the stage for and guiding the proper use of those techniques within the individual session.* What to expect in the course of long-term treatment to ameliorate symptoms and to effect personality change is covered, with sections on the early, middle, and late phases of treatment. This material prepares the clinician to deal with predictable phases, such as tests of the frame, impulse containment, movement toward integration, episodes of regression, and termination.* Finally, the text is accompanied by supremely instructive online videos that demonstrate a variety of clinical situations, helping the clinician with assessment and modeling critical therapeutic strategies. The book recognizes that each BPD patient presents a unique treatment challenge. Grounded in the latest research and rich with clinical insight, Transference-Focused Psychotherapy for Borderline Personality Disorder: A Clinical Guide will prove indispensable to mental health professionals seeking to provide thoughtful, effective care to these patients.

This hands-on manual from Leigh McCullough and associates teaches the nuts and bolts of practicing short-term dynamic psychotherapy, the research-supported model first presented in Changing Character, McCullough's foundational text. Reflecting the ongoing evolution of the approach, the manual emphasizes "affect phobia," or conflict about feelings. It shows how such proven behavioral techniques as systemic desensitization can be applied effectively within a psychodynamic framework, and offers clear guidelines for when and how to intervene. Demonstrated are procedures for assessing patients, formulating core conflicts, and restructuring defenses, affects, and relationship to the self and others. In an easy-to-use, large-size format, the book features a wealth of case examples and write-in exercises for building key clinical skills. The companion website (www.affectphobiatherapy.com) offers useful supplemental resources, including Psychotherapy Assessment Checklist (PAC) forms and instructions.

​​​​The cornerstone of Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy isits ABC framework which helps therapists make sense of clients' problems. As it turns out, however, this model is often misunderstood by both clients and professionals. Research investigation on this misunderstanding forms the basis of this book. It addresses the doubts, reservations and objections clients had to the ABC framework in a research study of an REBT-based program in a psychiatric hospital. Additionally, errors and confusions on the part of those writing about the therapy is reviewed. Further, study was made on the accuracy of REBTtherapists, themselves, in teaching this therapy to students. Also included is an analysis of how Albert Ellis, himself, has explicated the ABC's. This book is the first to systematically study how different groups conceptualise the ABCs of REBT and the errors that are commonly made in interpreting and putting them into practice. It will be of value to students and practitioners of REBT, and those teaching REBT in academic settings. 

First published in 1996. Routledge is an imprint of Taylor & Francis, an informa company.

Since its launching in 1955, rational-emotive therapy (RET) has become one of the most influential forms of counseling and psychotherapy used by literally thousands of mental health practitioners throughout the world. From its beginnings, RET has dealt with problems of human disturbance. It presents a theory of how people primarily disturb themselves and what they can do, particularly with the help of a therapist or counselor, to reduce their disturbances (Ellis, 1957a,b, 1958a,b, 1962). Almost im­ mediately after the creation of RET, it became obvious that the meth­ odology could be used in many other fields-especially those involving human relations (Ellis & Harper, 1961a), and in love, sex, and marital relationships (Ellis, 1958a, 1960, 1963a,b; Ellis & Harper, 1961b). The evident popularity and clinical utility of RET in different cultures and its increasing application to contemporary problems of living indicate that rational-emotive therapy continues to be vital and dynamic. The growing appeal of RET may be due in part to its essentially optimistic outlook and humanistic orientation; optimistic because it pro­ vides people with the possibility and the means for change. Showing to people how their attitudes and beliefs are responsible for their emo­ tional distress and interpersonal problems (and not some out-of-con­ scious early childhood experience), awakens in them the hope that, in reality, they have some control over their destiny.

The book addresses the problems that couples experience through the life cycle. Each chapter includes an up-to-date review of the literature pertinent to the topic, with a focus on practical interventions which are generally based upon, but not limited to, cognitive and rational emotive behavioral principles. Case studies or vignettes further illustrate application of principles. Worksheets, checklists, or other resources that would be useful in working with couples are also  included where relevant. This book presents interventions based upon research, theory, and most of all on practice. And is relevant to marriage and family therapists, mental health counselors, psychologists and psychiatrists, nurse practitioners, family law experts, social workers and relationship coaches. In addition, it can serve as a textbook for students in marriage and family therapy.

Practitioners are increasingly aware that religious persons present unique problems and challenges in therapy. Rational-Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT) is among the most widely practiced, highly structured and active directive approaches to treating emotional and behavioral problems. Introduced by Albert Ellis in the early 1950s, REBT is the original cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy and its efficacy has been supported by hundreds of treatment outcome studies. A uniquely belief-focused therapy, REBT is usually quite appealing to clients from Christian, Jewish, Muslim, Hindu, and other religious traditions, who respond favorably to REBT's focus on right belief, active engagement in the work of therapy, and reading/practice focused homework. In this practical and user-friendly guide, the authors outline the congruence between the therapeutic approach of REBT and the presenting problems and concerns of religious persons. They describe an approach to reconciling the sacred traditions and beliefs of religious clients with the no nonsense techniques of REBT. They review the essential components of practice with religious clients--including assessment, diagnosis and problem formulation, disputation of irrational beliefs, and other REBT techniques, highlight the primary obstacles facing the therapist when treating religious clients, and offer many case examples from work with this important client population. Mental health professionals from all backgrounds will benefit from the detailed yet manual-focused approach to helping religious clients overcome all forms of emotional distress.

Learn to look at marriage and couples counseling through the lens of Rational Emotive Couples Therapy. Dr. Russell Grieger walks the reader through the RECT process and includes numerous exercises that are appropriate for clinicians to use with their clients, for those couples who are in therapy and need a little extra help, and for couples working to improve their relationship on their own. Along with explaining the process of Rational Emotive Couples Therapy, Dr. Grieger makes the distinction between relationship difficulties, which are small disagreements and dissatisfactions, and relationship disturbances, which occur when a couple becomes emotionally distressed and entrenched in negativity. He walks readers through the couple diagnosis and presents eight powerful strategies for helping resolve both couple difficulties and disturbances to find relationship harmony. Dr. Grieger addresses such issues as ridding hurt, anger, fear, and insecurity, enhancing closeness and intimacy, win-win conflict resolution, and building couple commitment and connection. Replete with exercises that empower couples to take action and solve their problems, The Couples Therapy Companion also helps readers to sustain the positive momentum learned in therapy in everyday life.

This unique volume integrates history, mythology/folklore, and theory and research to bridge the gap between Western and Middle Eastern approaches to and understanding of psychotherapy, particularly Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT) and Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT). Part I lays the foundation with an overview of the theoretical essentials of REBT and CBT in the West, the goals and assumptions of REBT and CBT in the Middle East, and what Middle Eastern clients understand about cognitive distortions, irrational beliefs, and emotions. In Part II, chapters delve more deeply into how psychology is placed in the context of Middle Eastern folklore. The author provides a summary of the history of psychology in the Middle East; an analysis of the relevance of Sufism to self-acceptance, acceptance of others, and life acceptance; and an evaluation of the use of metaphor in psychotherapy from the Middle Eastern perspective. Finally, the author provides case studies that show how these concepts are applied in practice. This text is ideal reading for researchers and clinicians who study Middle Eastern psychology and who work with Middle Eastern clients, as well as for Middle Eastern psychologists and clients.

Dealing with Emotional Problems offers clear, practical advice on how to deal with some of the most common emotional difficulties. Rational-Emotive Cognitive Behaviour Therapy (RECBT) is a technique that encourages a direct focus on emotional problems, helping you to understand the thoughts, beliefs and behaviours that cause you to maintain these problems. This understanding will enable you to overcome problems and lead a happier and more fulfilling life. The book begins by outlining foundations of emotional problems. Each problem is then presented in a similar way, allowing the reader to compare and contrast similarities and differences between each emotion, and how to cope with it. This book covers: anxiety depression guilt shame hurt unhealthy anger unhealthy jealousy unhealthy envy. Dealing with Emotional Problems Using Rational-Emotive Cognitive Behaviour Therapy can be used on your own or in conjunction with a therapist who can use the Practitioner's Guide.

Seminars by Professor Windy Dryden. See the man live and in action. To find out more and to book your place go to www.cityminds.com ________________________________________ Treating adult children of alcoholics, clients suffering from chronic pain, sudden infant death syndrome, pathological gambling, fear of flying and performance anxiety are among the topics explored in this volume, which presents new findings in the field of rational-emotive therapy (RET). Albert Ellis, the pioneer of RET, provides an up-to-date overview of the fundamentals of RET in the opening chapter. Contributors then each describe the clinical problem of a specific population, and present both a rational-emotive conceptualization of the problem and a treatment strategy.

Michael Neenan and Windy Dryden are experienced teachers ofRational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT). Over the years, theyhave noticed a large number of common errors which studentsregularly make: in fact, they can reliably predict what most ofthese errors will be. Initially, Neenan and Dryden aimed for 50 or60 errors, thinking that this would be the limit, but in fact theyreached 101. They assembled the errors in to seven categories:general, assessment, goal-setting, disputing, homework, workingthrough, and self-maintenance. In dealing with each error, theyexplain what has gone wrong and how to put it right. The excerpts of dialogue are not verbatim accounts of therapy orsupervision but illustrative examples of the points the authors aremaking. Students reading this book should be able to pinpoint theseerrors at an earlier stage in their training thereby enabling themto make faster progress towards becoming competent REBTtherapists.

New Directions in Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy brings together leading figures from the world of Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT), both as a testament to the work of Albert Ellis and as a reminder of the vibrancy and vigour of the approach. The chapters in this book, taken together, show that REB therapists are open to broader developments in the fields of counselling and psychotherapy in general and can also contribute to these developments. The book introduces REBT to readers who are more familiar with CBT and locates REBT within the broader fields of CBT and modern psychotherapy. The book will interest REBT and CBT therapists and more broadly it will interest those in the helping professions wishing to explore what REBT can currently offer them and how this approach can be practiced.

Extensively updated to include clinical findings over the last two decades, this third edition of A Practitioner's Guide to Rational-Emotive Behavior Therapy reviews the philosophy, theory, and clinical practice of Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT). This model is based on the work of Albert Ellis, who had an enormous influence on the field of psychotherapy over his 50 years of practice and scholarly writing. Designed for both therapists-in-training and seasoned professionals, this practical treatment manual and guide introduces the basic principles of rational-emotive behavior therapy, explains general therapeutic strategies, and offers many illustrative dialogues between therapist and patient. The volume breaks down each stage of therapy to present the exact procedures and skills therapists need, and numerous case studies illustrate how to use these skills. The authors describe both technical and specific strategic interventions, and they stress taking an integrative approach. The importance of building a therapeutic alliance and the use of cognitive, emotive, evocative, imaginal, and behavioral interventions serves as the unifying theme of the approach. Intervention models are presented for the treatment of anxiety, depression, trauma, anger, personality disorders, and addictions. Psychologists, clinical social workers, mental health counselors, psychotherapists, and students and trainees in these areas will find this book useful in learning to apply rational-emotive behavior therapy in practice.

This new edition provides a concise but systematic guide to the basics of REBT-a valuable approach for helping clients overcome emotional and behavioral difficulties. The authors have updated this practical resource to reflect recent developments in REBT theory and practice. Part I: Briefly outlines the principles considered central to an understanding of REBT. Part II: Details a sequence of 20 REBT steps recommended for use during peer counseling and clinical work. Part III: illustrates the application of the REBT process to a specific case. The brief overview of REBT practice presented in this primer is designed to complement rather than replace comprehensive texts for conducting REBT at a more advanced level.

Since the groundbreaking first edition of Rational Emotive Approaches to the Problems of Childhood by Albert Ellis and Michael Bernard two decades ago, our understanding of the nature and treatment of children's problems has grown considerably. Now in a completely new volume, Albert Ellis and children's REBT specialist Professor Michael Bernard have revised and updated this pioneering volume to reflect both the latest in clinical practice and research. Fourteen expert contributors (including many from the original) share with the editors a deep commitment to integrating REBT with other cognitive-behavioral methods, and to providing young people with developmentally appropriate care. Together they give readers a practical framework for conducting assessment, treatment, and prevention with individuals, clients and groups as well as in family and school settings. Key features of this new edition include: Developmental considerations in using REBT with children and adolescents Specific chapters devoted to major disorders -- aggression, phobias anxiety, depression, academic underachievement, and ADHD Latest strategies for challenging and changing the irrational beliefs of young people Techniques for building key REBT skills: emotional resilience and frustration tolerance Extensive research findings on the efficacy of REBT with young people Brand-new material on special issues -- involving parents, conducting group sessions, and working with exceptional children An overview of Rational Emotive Education and You Can Do It! Education, school-based applications of REBT With coverage this thorough, Ellis, Bernard, and collaborators have created a resource of immediate value to child and adolescent mental health practitioners including school psychologists, school counselors, school social workers, behavior therapists, and family therapists, and educators involved in helping young people overcome behavioral disorders.

Created in the 1950s by the legendary Albert Ellis, rational emotive behavior therapy (REBT) teaches clients to challenge their irrational thinking. REBT is based on the simple idea that it is not external circumstances that make a person happy or unhappy, but rather internal thoughts about events or oneself. Thinking, feeling, and behavior are seen as linked and influencing one another. Because changing one's thinking is usually the simplest tactic in a given situation, it tends to be the focus of therapy, alongside the humanistic core REBT philosophies of unconditional self-acceptance, unconditional other-acceptance, and unconditional life-acceptance. This essential primer, amply illustrated with case examples featuring diverse clients, is perfect for graduate students studying theories of therapy and counseling, as well as for seasoned practitioners interested in understanding how this approach has evolved and how it might be used in their practice. This second edition includes updated clinical research, as well as a thorough examination of the important distinctions between REBT and cognitive-behavior approaches.

Updated resource for practicing therapists from the father of rational therapy. Modern cognitive-behavioral therapy has its roots in the rational approach created by Ellis in the 1950s. Now known as Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT), Ellis's systematic integrative approach has grown and matured into a powerful mainstream psychotherapy. Hundreds of thousands of patients have benefited from the active interventions of therapists using REBT. Includes a thorough description of REBT theory and procedures, case examples, exercises. Major themes include: The Theory of Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy; The Practice of REBT; The Main Cognitive Techniques of REBT; The Main Emotive and Experiential Techniques of REBT; The Main Behavioral Techniques of REBT; The Integration of REBT with Other Psychotherapies; Summary and Conclusions.

Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT) is one of the most widely used counselling approaches in the world and is one of the original forms of Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT). Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy in Sport and Exercise is the first and only book to date to examine the use of REBT in sport and exercise. It brings together leading international experts and practitioners to reflect on the use of REBT in sport and exercise, and examine the techniques used. Each chapter contains a case study, contextualising theory into practice, giving a rare and detailed insight into the use of REBT across a diverse range of issues. Some of the topics covered include: * the theory and practice of REBT * REBT intervention for competition anxiety * the use of REBT interventions in Paralympic soccer * the use of REBT in managing injury and loss * using REBT to address symptoms of exercise dependence * REBT intervention to improve low frustration tolerance Offering an invaluable insight into the practical application of REBT, this book is essential reading for undergraduates, postgraduates, trainee and qualified sport and exercise psychologists, and counsellors wishing to move into sport and exercise.

This is the first book devoted to group therapy applications of Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT). REBT is an active-directive, psychoeducational approach to psychotherapy and as such it is very well suited to being practised with groups. This book shows the range of these applications from regular group therapy to specialised group interventions such as nine hour intensives and Albert Ellis's famous ?Friday Night Workshop.' Also featured are chapters on a brief, group-based, structured educational approach to teaching unconditional self-acceptance using REBT and the use of the group in training and supervising REBT therapists in training.

This straightforward guide introduces the newcomer to the core theoretical principles and therapeutic strategies of Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT). Starting with the ABC model of emotion popularized by Albert Ellis from the outset when he developed his approach to CBT, the guide then shows how REBT distinguishes between unhealthy and healthy negative emotions. From there it outlines the four irrational attitudes theorized to be at the core of emotional and behavioural disturbance. Finally, the newcomer to REBT will develop an appreciation for how REBT inoculates clients against future problems and teaches them to maintain and extend their treatment gains. This Newcomer's Guide will be a useful contribution to counsellors and psychotherapists in training, either in Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy or another cognitive-behavioural approach.

Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy in a Nutshell provides a concise overview of a popular therapeutic approach, starting with the ABCDE Model of Emotional Disturbance and Change. Written by leading REBT specialists, Michael Neenan and Windy Dryden, the book goes on to explain the core of the therapeutic process:AssessmentDisputingHomeworkWorking throughPromoting self-changeAs an introduction to the basics of the approach, this updated and revised edition is the ideal first text and a springboard to further study.

Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy in India: Very Brief Therapy for Problems of Daily Livingis the first book of its kind to look specifically at using Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT) for helping people with problems that are common in India. Based on training workshops given by Professor Windy Dryden in Mumbai, this book presents transcripts of the workshop sessions alongside professional commentary, followed by reflections from the volunteers themselves. With the emphasis on everyday problems, and clear examples of how REBT is applied, Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy in Indiawill be essential reading for psychotherapists, students, and other mental health professionals working in India, and anyone interested in the cross-cultural application of psychotherapy.

The Relevance of Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy for Modern CBT and Psychotherapy explores the contemporary relevance of this treatment for modern psychotherapy, from the point of view of a leading contributor. First founded in 1955 by Albert Ellis, REBT still has much to offer the field. Despite this, the therapy has been increasingly neglected by cognitive behaviour therapy and other practitioners. To demonstrate its contributed relevance, Professor Windy Dryden outlines in this book his current thinking and practice in regard to REBT. He advocates its key features of flexibility and non-extremeness, and explores what he believes REBT has to contribute to the discussion surrounding contemporary issues in psychotherapy. The Relevance of Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy for Modern CBT and Psychotherapy is an excellent resource for CBT and other therapists who would like to know more about the relevance of REBT to their work.

In this overview of one of the most successful forms of psychotherapy -- Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT) -- its creator and chief advocate, Albert Ellis, explains at length the principles underlying this therapeutic approach and shows how beneficial it can be, not only for therapy but also as a basic philosophy of life. As the title indicates, REBT promotes an attitude of tolerance, an open-minded willingness to accept the frailties, less-than-ideal behaviors, and unique characteristics of both others and ourselves. Ellis persuasively demonstrates that lack of tolerance of our own imperfections can easily lead to emotional disturbances and unhappiness. And intolerance of others, which fails to account for the great diversity of human personalities and behaviors, can become a serious disruptive force in today's highly diverse, multicultural global society. To counter such negative tendencies, Ellis advocates the adoption and practice of three basic attitudes of tolerance: (1) Unconditional Self-Acceptance (USA); (2) Unconditional Other-Acceptance (UOA); and (3) Unconditional Life-Acceptance (ULA). He discusses the philosophical foundations of these principles and then devotes a number of chapters to comparing REBT to spiritual and religious philosophies. He points out the dangers of fanatical tendencies in religion while also showing how the basic principles of REBT are similar to some ancient religious philosophies such as Zen Buddhism and the Judeo-Christian Golden Rule. In addition, he criticizes certain secular philosophies for their extremism, including Fascism and Ayn Rand's Objectivism, and he also discusses the ramifications of applying REBT in the social, political, and economic sphere. In emphasizing how easy it is for all of us to think, feel, and act intolerantly, Ellis brilliantly shows that tolerance is a deliberate, rational choice that we can all make, both for the good of ourselves and for the good of the world.

Single-Session 'One-at-a-Time' Therapy: A Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy Approach details a specific approach to Single-Session Therapy (SST) known as 'One-At-A-Time' (OAAT) Therapy and shows how this can be implemented from a Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy (REBT) perspective. Windy Dryden argues that OAAT Therapy is a time-efficient, cost-effective means of providing help according to need. Single-Session 'One-at-a-Time' Therapy outlines an innovative and experimental approach to improving mental health and will appeal to psychotherapists and counsellors looking for an accessible and authoritative guide to brief therapeutic work.

The Working Alliance in Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy explores the principles and practice of REBT from the perspective of working alliance theory. Windy Dryden seeks to debunk the myth that REBT neglects the therapeutic relationship by breaking down working alliance theory into specific domains in order to highlight its potential in this form of therapy. He introduces the reader to the ABCs of REBT and its basic practice, followed by the working alliance concept that forms the basis of this book. He then shows how the practice of REBT can be enhanced by the therapist attending to each of the four components of the alliance: bonds, views, goals and tasks. The book is written for trainees and established therapists within REBT.

The interactive computer-generated world of virtual reality has been successful in treat­ing phobias and other anxiety-related conditions, in part because of its distinct advan­tages over traditional in vivo exposure. Yet many clinicians still think of VR technology as it was in the 1990s-bulky, costly, technically difficult-with little knowledge of its evolution toward more modern, evidence-based, practice-friendly treatment. These updates, and their clinical usefulness, are the subject of Advances in Virtual Re­ality and Anxiety Disorders, a timely guidebook geared toward integrating up-to-date VR methods into everyday practice. Introductory material covers key virtual reality concepts, provides a brief history of VR as used in therapy for anxiety disorders, ad­dresses the concept of presence, and explains the side effects, known as cybersickness, that affect a small percentage of clients. Chapters in the book's main section detail current techniques and review study findings for using VR in the treatment of: ·                     Claustrophobia. ·                     Panic disorder, agoraphobia, and driving phobia. ·                     Acrophobia and aviophobia. ·                     Arachnophobia. ·                     Social phobia. ·                     Generalized anxiety disorder and OCD. ·                     PTSD. ·                     Plus clinical guidelines for establishing a VR clinic.  An in-depth framework for effective (and cost-effective) therapeutic innovations for entrenched problems, Advances in Virtual Reality and Anxiety Disorders will find an engaged audience among psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, and mental health counselors.eractive

Contemporary Issues in Couples Counseling explores the most difficult issues that people in the helping professions face when treating couples and provides concrete solutions for addressing them effectively. Using the revolutionary choice theory and reality therapy approaches to couples counseling, the book shows clinicians how to combine a relationship-based approach with the pragmatism of cognitive-behavior therapies. Both experienced and beginning clinicians will find Contemporary Issues in Couples Counseling ideal for helping clients focus on the here and now, not the past, and for creating treatment plans that meet clients' individual needs while also addressing the needs of their partners.

"Case studies provide the reader with a variety of interesting examples of ways that control theory can be translated into the practice of reality therapy. . . . Dr. Glasser's] commentaries . . . are one of the strengths of the book."--Gerald Corey

In Counseling with Choice Theory, Dr. William Glasser takes readers into his consulting room and illustrates, through a series of conversations with his patients, exactly how he puts his popular therapeutic theories into practice. These vivid, almost novelistic case histories bring Dr. Glasser's therapy to life and show readers how to get rid of the controlling, punishing I know what's right for you psychology that crops up in most situations when people face conflict with one another. Practical and readable, Counseling with Choice Theory is Dr. Glasser's most accessible book in years.

This practical resource is a follow-on from the hugely successful Counselling with Reality Therapy. The second edition provides a jargon-free and practical explanation of a theory and method of counselling which can be used in any therapeutic relationship. It presents a comprehensive, succinct and practical overview of Reality Therapy and also contains ideas which can be used by parents, spouses, partners, children, family and anyone wishing for more satisfying relationships.  This book forms an easy-to-use introduction to this approach and includes: a discussion of the concepts behind reality therapy, choice theory, the counselling environment, procedures and special applications; information on how this approach has a wide application, including developing responsibility, motivation, self-esteem, improving relationships, dealing with discipline and problems and addictions; details of how this approach can be used in schools, by the probation and prison services, at work, within clinics and the health service and in many other areas where counselling is applicable. Contents: A Brief History of Reality Therapy; Choice Theory: The Psychology Underlying Reality Therapy - An Overview; Creating the Counselling Relationship Parts 1 and 2; The Procedures that Lead to change: The 'WDEP System'; Reality Therapy and Group Counselling; Application to Schools; Relationship Counselling; Reality Therapy and Addictions Treatment; and Paradoxical Techniques. Robert E. Wubbolding EdD, LPCC, BCC, is an internationally known teacher, author and practitioner of Reality Therapy. John Brickell DC is Director of the Centre for Reality Therapy (UK) and a senior faculty member of the European Association for Reality Therapy (EART) and the William Glasser International (WGI) organisation.

First published in 1998. Routledge is an imprint of Taylor & Francis, an informa company.

In Reality Therapy, Robert E. Wubbolding explores the history, theory, research, and practice of this choice-focused approach to psychotherapy. William Glasser first developed the ideas behind reality therapy in the 1950s and 1960s when he formulated the basis of choice theory, which concerns the way human beings choose their own behavior and how these choices can either satisfy or not satisfy basic drives and goals. Using this theoretical basis, reality therapy helps clients to learn to be more aware of their choices and how these choices may be inefficient in achieving their goals. Framing behavior as a choice, a choice made by client's internal control, leads clients to feel more responsible and in command of their lives. Reality Therapy is structured around the WDEP system (wants, doing, evaluation, and planning): The reality therapist works with clients to explore their wants and what they are doing to achieve those wants, evaluating whether what they are doing is helpful or harmful to their goals, and finally helping the client plan ways to change their behavior. In this book, Wubbolding presents and explores this approach, its theory, history, therapy process, primary change mechanisms, the empirical basis for its effectiveness, and contemporary and future developments. This essential primer, amply illustrated with case examples featuring diverse clients, is perfect for graduate students studying theories of therapy and counseling, as well as for seasoned practitioners interested in understanding how this approach has evolved and how it might be used in their practice.

Glasser's classic bestseller, with more than 500,000 copies sold, examines his alternative to Freudian psychoanalytic procedures, explains the procedure, contrasts it to conventional treatment, and describes different individual cases in which it was successful.

This text aims to be a comprehensive, practical, clearly illustrated examination of reality therapy. It includes an historically significant interview with William Glasser, MD, multicultural applications and research based studies. Its goal is to enhance the skills of helpers so that clients may live a more effective life through a total balance of love, health, and happiness. To help teach reality therapy, the author encapsulates the delivery system into the acronym "WDEP". It is expanded to include 22 types of self-evaluation which counsellors and therapists can use to shorten therapy time in the current managed care environment. Each component of the delivery system is illustrated with dialogues so that the reader can see exactly how the system is practical and immediately usable.

Child and Family Practice: A Relational Perspective, Second Edition presents important guidelines and principles for working with children, their families, and their service-providing organizations. It is grounded in the traditional social work theories of relationship with emphasis on threecore concepts: relational connection, evidence-guided knowledge, and reflexivity. With this text students can connect theory to evidence-based practice and use realistic case studies for classroom role-play and engaging discussion. Cohen Konrad's goal is to help students connect science, theory, andthe human qualities necessary to effect positive change and inspire hope in the lives of children and families.

Self-examination and self-critique: for psychoanalytic patients, this is the conduit to growth. Yet within the field, psychoanalysts haven't sufficiently utilized their own methodology or subjected their own preferred approaches to systematic and critical self-examination. Across theoretical divides, psychoanalytic writers and clinicians have too often responded to criticism with defensiveness rather than reflectivity. De-Idealizing Relational Theory attempts to rectify this for the relational field. This book is a first in the history of psychoanalysis; it takes internal dissension and difference seriously rather than defensively. Rather than saying that the other's reading of relational theory is wrong, distorted, or a misrepresentation, this book is interested in querying how theory lends itself to such characterizations. How have psychoanalysts participated in conveying this portrayal to their critics? Might this dissension illuminate blind-spot(s) and highlight new areas of growth? It's a challenge to engage in psychoanalytic self-critique. To do so requires that we move beyond our own assumptions and deeply held beliefs about what moves the treatment process and how we can best function within it. To step aside from ourselves, to question the assumed, to take the critiques of others seriously, demands more than an absence of defensiveness. It requires that we step into the shoes of the psychoanalytic Other and suspend not only our theories, but our emotional investment in them. There are a range of ways in which our authors took up that challenge. Some revisted the assumptions that underlay early relational thinking and expanded their sources (Greenberg & Aron). Some took up specific aspects of relational technique and unpacked their roots and evolution (Mark, Cooper). Some offered an expanded view of what constitutes relational theory and technique (Seligman, Corbett, Grossmark). Some more directly critiqued aspects of relational theory and technique (Berman, Stern). And some took on a broader critique of relational theory or technique (Layton, Slochower). Unsurprisingly, no single essay examined the totality of relational thinking, its theoretical and clinical implications. This task would be herculean both practically and psychologically. We're all invested in aspects of what we think and what we do; at best, we examine some, but never all of our assumptions and ideas. We recognize, retrospectively, how very challenging a task this was; it asked writers to engage in what we might think of as a self-analysis of the countertransference. Taken together these essays represent a significant effort at self-critique and we are enormously proud of it. Each chapter critically assesses and examines aspects of relational theory and technique, considers its current state and its relations to other psychoanalytic approaches. De-Idealizing Relational Theory will appeal to all relational psychoanalysts and psychoanalytic psychotherapists.

With contributions from distinguished scholars and clinicians who view human erotic desire from modern developmental, relational, societal, and cross-cultural perspectives, Eroticism: Developmental, Cultural, and Clinical Realms offers a multifaceted and up-to-date glimpse into what we find sexually attractive and why. While psychoanalysis has unshackled itself from the narrow confines of instinct theory to include ego psychology, object relations theory, self psychology, and the contemporary relational paradigm, such heuristic and clinical advance is sorely needed to further our grasp of human eroticism and love. Accommodation also needs to be made for the cultural changes that have occurred over the last five or six decades. These include the feminist corrective to the phallocentrism of 'classical' psychoanalysis, the new insights into human subjectivity and personality development provided by the gay and lesbian movement, the contemporary de-centering of the essentialist and binary gender formulations, and the post-colonial voices of the non-Western people. By providing theoretically anchored clinical guidelines, Eroticism provides not only an update on the early analytic understanding of human eroticism but advances clinical praxis as well.

During the course of psychoanalytic psychotherapy with couples, the practicing clinician is commonly faced with problems and issues that at times can seem nearly insoluble. In Object Relations and Relationality in Couple Therapy: Exploring the Middle Ground, James L. Poulton, PhD, surveys those problems and offers practical suggestions for their resolution. Through the use of extensive clinical material from couple cases, each chapter presents a specific issue, reviews the theoretical background that is essential for understanding it, and offers detailed illustrations of effective clinical interventions. The issues addressed by this book include the following: vthe influence of intergenerational trauma on the couple's functioning; vdynamics of violence and sacrifice within the couple; vthe narcissistic couple and disillusionment with the therapeutic process; vintensification of emotional stress that results when both partners share unconscious anxieties; vappropriate and inappropriate uses of the therapist's self-disclosure; vintegration of cultural issues in couple therapy; vnegotiating individual and shared transferences in couple therapy; vthe place of truth and certainty in the couple's capacity to heal. Object Relations and Relationality in Couple Therapy: Exploring the Middle Ground draws upon leading-edge innovations in both theory and technique to offer creative solutions to the common dilemmas in couple therapy. In current discussions of psychoanalytic treatment, two distinct but interrelated theoretical approaches predominate: object relations and relational theory. This book emphasizes the continuities and commonalities between these two approaches, particularly in their application to the treatment of couples, and argues that modern relational theories can be read as clinically useful elaborations of similar intuitions that have already been developing in the object relations oeuvre. The chapters in this book illustrate that there is a firm middle ground in which ideas and techniques from both theories can be integrated into a consistent therapeutic approach that provides a broad foundation for conceptualizing couple interactions and for designing interventions that facilitate the couple's growth.

This volume explains a new theory of grief and loss that is designed to represent the realities not addressed in current conventional views of grief. First and last, McCabe's is a relational theory of grief. Inherent in this theory is the reality that the lost one remains and ongoing part of our existence and that a major dimension of grieving involves reintegrating our lives around the lost presence. This process does not have stages or prescribed time limits as those cited in traditional theory. The experience proceeds, rather, in terms of the griever's prior, ongoing, dynamic relationship with the loved one as well as others, and the griever's personal resources for reconstituting life in the face of personal loss. This volume will be useful to scholars and practioners whose work brings them in touch with death issues. Academics in psychology, sociology, nursing and religion will find this of interest, as will practitioners in bereavement counseling, menetal health, religion, social work, nursing and medicine.

Reflections on Long-Term Relational Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysisexplores how relational analysts think about and pursue long-term therapeutic relationships in their practices. Most therapists will work intensively with several of their clients over many years, but more examination and exploration are needed into what is taking place inside of these mutual long-term relationships. Each contributor offers theoretical material, case examples, and some discussion about their views and experiences with long-term work. The chapters cover a range of topics that focus on aspects of the therapeutic relationship that are unique to long-term psychoanalytic work. They include work with various issues such as trauma, death and dying, cross-cultural issues, suffering, mourning, neuropsychoanalysis, unique endings, attachment, intimacy, and the many ways in which therapists change along with their clients as they go through life stages together. Reflections on Long-Term Relational Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis will be of great interest to psychoanalysts, psychodynamic psychotherapists, psychologists, social workers, workers in other mental health fields, graduate students, and anyone who is interested in change processes.

Trauma and Primitive Mental States: An Object Relations Perspective offers a clinically based framework through which adult survivors of early childhood trauma can re-engage with painful past events to create meaningful futures for themselves. The book highlights the use of the body and the mind in working with these early unmentalized and unrepresented states, illustrating the value of finding language that embodies emotions, and working in the here and now of transference and counter-transference. Including a range of examples of how early trauma can thus be re-presented and clinically understood, the book illustrates how patients can discover themselves and leave their repetitive patterns of suffering behind. Written by a clinician with over 30 years' experience, this will be fascinating reading for psychoanalysts and psychotherapists as well as any mental health professional working with childhood trauma.

Psychoanalysts increasingly find themselves working with patients and states that are not amenable to verbal and dialogic engagement. Such patients are challenging for a psychoanalytic approach that assumes that the patient relates in the verbal realm and is capable of reflective function. Both the classical stance of neutrality and abstinence and a contemporary relational approach that works with mutuality and intersubjectivity, can often ask too much of patients. The Unobtrusive Relational Analyst introduces a new psychoanalytic register for working with such patients and states, involving a present and engaged analyst who is unobtrusive to the unfolding of the patient's inner world and the flow of mutual enactments. For the unobtrusive relational analyst, the world and idiom of the patient becomes the defining signature of the clinical interaction and process. Rather than seeking to bring patients into greater dialogic relatedness, the analyst companions the patient in the flow of enactive engagement and into the damaged and constrained landscapes of their inner worlds. Being known and companioned in these areas of deep pain, shame and fragmentation is the foundation on which psychoanalytic transformation and healing rests. In a series of illuminating chapters that include vivid examples drawn from his work with individuals and with groups, Robert Grossmark illustrates the work of the unobtrusive relational analyst. He reconfigures the role of action and enactment in psychoanalysis and group-analysis, and expands the understanding of the analyst's subjectivity to embrace receptivity, surrender and companioning. Offering fresh concepts regarding therapeutic action and psychoanalytic engagement, The Unobtrusive Relational Analyst will be of great interest to all psychoanalysts and psychoanalytic psychotherapists.

Breaking Negative Thinking Patterns is the first schema-mode focused resource guide aimed at schema therapy patients and self-help readers seeking to understand and overcome negative patterns of thinking and behaviour. Represents the first resource for general readers on the mode approach to schema therapy Features a wealth of case studies that serve to clarify schemas and modes and illustrate techniques for overcoming dysfunctional modes and behavior patterns Offers a series of exercises that readers can immediately apply to real-world challenges and emotional problems as well as the complex difficulties typically tackled with schema therapy Includes original illustrations that demonstrate the modes and approaches in action, along with 20 self-help mode materials which are also available online Written by authors closely associated with the development of schema therapy and the schema mode approach

This book provides up-to-date information on the evaluation and utility of the schema concept and core beliefs as they apply to the research and treatment of a variety of clinical problems, including both major and chronic depression, posttraumatic stress disorder, substance use disorders, obsessive - compulsive disorder, schizophrenia, eating disorders, and dissatisfaction in intimate relationships.

Creative Methods in Schema Therapy captures current trends and developments in Schema Therapy in rich clinical detail, with a vividness that inspires and equips the reader to integrate these new ways of working directly into their practice. It begins with creative adaptations to assessment and formulation, including the integration of body methods to promote engagement and to bring about early emotional change. Other chapters introduce innovative methods to lift a formulation off the page and it goes on to bring to life new developments across all aspects of the ST change repertoire, including limited reparenting, imagery, trauma processing, chair work, the therapy relationship, empathic confrontation and endings. For the specialist, there are chapters on working with forensic modes, eating disorders and couples work. Finally, the book includes chapters on the integration of key principles and techniques from Cognitive Behavioural Therapy, Emotion Focused Therapy and Compassionate Mind work into a core schema model. The book will appeal not only to full-fledged schema therapists, but also to junior therapists and therapists from other modalities who are willing to enhance their ways of working.

This book presents innovative tools for helping patients to understand their emotional schemas--such as the conviction that painful feelings are unbearable, shameful, or will last indefinitely--and develop new ways of accepting and coping with affective experience. Therapists can integrate emotional schema therapy into the treatment approaches they already use to add a vital new dimension to their work. Rich case material illustrates applications for a wide range of clinical problems; assessment guidelines and sample worksheets and forms further enhance the book's utility.

Emotional Schema Therapy: Distinctive Features offers a concise overview to what is distinctive about this new approach to helping clients cope with "difficult" emotions. Written by a researcher with many years of clinical experience, it provides an accessible, bitesize overview. Using the popular Distinctive Features format, this book　describes 15 theoretical features and 15 practical techniques of Emotional Schema Therapy. 　 Emotional Schema Therapy will be a valuable source that is written for psychotherapists, clinical, health and counselling psychologists, counsellors, psychiatrists, and all who wish to know more about the role of emotions and emotion regulation.　

Group Schema Therapy for Borderline Personality Disorder represents the first treatment manual for group schema therapy and is based on the only group ST model validated by published empirical evidence. Presents an original adaptation of schema therapy for use in a group setting Provides a detailed manual and patient materials in a user-friendly format Represents a cost-effective ST alternative with the potential to assist in the public health problem of making evidence-based BPD treatment widely available Includes 'guest' chapters from international ST experts Jeff Young, Arnoud Arntz, Hannie van Genderen, George Lockwood, Poul Perris, Neele Reiss, Heather Fretwell and Michiel van Vreeswijk

Mindfulness and Schema Therapy presents an eight-session + two follow up sessions protocol for schema mindfulness for therapists and their patients.   Represents the first book to integrate the theory of schema therapy with the techniques of mindfulness Enhances schema therapy with techniques drawn from mindfulness-based cognitive therapy (MBCT) - a unique integration of two of the most popular treatment approaches in clinical psychology today. Merges two of the hottest topics in contemporary clinical psychology and psychotherapy Offers a practical guide for training and practice, with detailed coverage of theory followed by dedicated sections for therapists and patients Features a variety of exercises enabling readers to immediately implement the protocol Written by authors with expertise and experience in both schema therapy and mindfulness Includes a Foreword by Mark Williams, renowned for his contribution to the development of MBCT

The Schema Therapy Clinician's Guide is a complete clinical resource for psychotherapists implementing schema therapy, group schema therapy or a combination of both in a structured, cost-effective way. The authors provide ready-made individual and group sessions with patient hand-outs.   A unique resource providing ready-made individual and group schema therapy sessions, linked across schema modes, allowing clinicians to pick and choose what they need or adopt a full integrated individual and group program which can be delivered over a range of treatment lengths from a six week intensive program to a one year outpatient treatment Approaches treatment by targeting maladaptive Schema Modes rather than specific disorders, thus increasing clinical flexibility and ensuring shelf life through changes in diagnostic classification Provides step-by-step instructions and tips for therapists, along with a wealth of unique clinical resources including sample scripts, handouts, session exercises, assignment forms and patient materials Meets the current need for effective clinical treatments that can provide tangible effects on time and on budget  

Provides clear guidance on utilizing Schema Therapy to reduce BPD symptoms and bring about lasting changes in the patient's personality People with Borderline Personality Disorder (BPD) struggle with a range of problems that negatively impact virtually every aspect of their lives, such as constantly changing moods, blurred personal identities, impulsive behaviors, interpersonal problems, and episodes of rage. BPD patients are at high risk of self-harm and substance abuse, with approximately 10% of BPD patients dying from suicide. BPD severely affects the education, employment, personal relationships, and physical and emotional wellbeing of those suffering from the disorder. Schema Therapy (ST), based on cognitive behavioral therapy and techniques derived from experiential therapies, has been shown to achieve substantial personality improvements in BPD patients. Shema Therapy for Borderline Personality Disorder describes the pioneering BPD therapy based on insights from cognitive, behavioral, psychodynamic, humanistic, and developmental theories. Schema Therapy emphasizes the emotional processing of traumatic experiences and the use of the therapeutic relationship to bring about positive change. The text describes ST treatment for BPD in detail, covering the aims and phases of the therapy, treatment planning, cognitive and behavioral methods, specific techniques appropriate to each schema mode, behavioral pattern-breaking, termination of therapy, and more. This authoritative volume: Describes a treatment for patients with Borderline Personality Disorder (BPD) that yields substantial clinical improvement or recovery in most cases Explains the schema mode model of BPD that helps both patients and therapist understand the problems experienced by BPD patients, and that is central in ST for BPD. Explains Schema Therapy (ST) for BPD based on the schema mode model, discussing different treatment methods and techniques geared to specific schema modes Covers the latest developments in the field of ST, such as Group Schema Therapy and the application of ST for couples. Includes handouts to give to patients, including a biographical diary, forms for homework assignments and problem solving, and a positive self-statement log Schema Therapy for Borderline Personality Disorder is essential reading for clinical psychologists, psychotherapists, psychopathologists, psychiatrists, mental health practitioners, and advanced undergraduate and graduate students in relevant fields.

Options can be limited for those who do not respond to standard eating disorder treatments. Schema therapy is one of the new exciting frontiers in the treatment of this clinical population, offering a much-needed model that integrates both developmental and deeper level personality factors. Schema Therapy for Eating Disorders is the first book of its kind, guiding clinicians to deliver the schema model to those with entrenched or enduring eating pathology, and in turn encouraging further clinical research on this approach to treatment. Written by an international team of leading schema therapy experts, and with a foreword by Wendy Behary and Jeffrey Young, this book draws on their clinical knowledge and research experience. Comprehensive and practical, this book introduces the rapidly growing evidence base for schema therapy, outlines the application of this model across eating disorder diagnostic groups, as well as individual and group modalities, and explores practical considerations, common challenges and the therapeutic process. The book includes detailed case examples, which provide a theoretical and practical basis for working with therapist-client schema chemistry and transference, and outlines methods of ensuring therapist self-care in the face of difficult and often long-term work. Innovative and accessible, this fresh look at the treatment of eating disorders will be an invaluable resource for clinicians in the field.

Schema Therapy for Couples represents the first practitioner guide to detail effective Schema Therapy techniques in couple and relationship therapy. Shows how the distinctive features of ST make it ideal for addressing the cognitive and emotion-focused problems typical in couple relationships Presents and integrates a series of innovative tools and interventions such as Schema Therapy with Needs versus Wants, Mode Cycle Clash Cards, limited re-parenting visualization, and chair work Authored by an international team of experts in couples therapy and Schema Therapy

The Wiley-Blackwell Handbook of Schema Therapy provides a comprehensive overview of developments in the theory, diagnosis, treatment, research, implementation, and management of schema therapy. Presents a comprehensive overview of schema therapy - goes far beyond all previous books on the subject to cover theoretical, research and practical perspectives Covers the latest developments, including work on mindfulness and borderline personality disorder, as well as new applications of schema therapy beyond personality disorders Includes chapters by leaders in the field including Wendy Behary and Arnoud Arntz, as well as a foreword by Jeffrey Young, the founder of schema therapy

What is Solution-Focused Therapy? Solution Focused Therapy (SFT) is a unique, goal-directed therapy aimed at helping clients regain autonomy by determining and achieving their own goals. Solution focused therapists encourage clients to focus on solutions, not problems, and help clients effectively plan how to reach their goals. Unlike other therapies, SFT holds an abiding belief in clients' abilities to know what is best for them, rather than have a therapist tell them. Why this book? This book not only provides an overview of the Solution Focused therapy model, its basic tenets, and theories; it also presents intimate interviews with expert practitioners-all of whom use SFT in their own practice. To this end, the book offers a wealth of insight into the theory and practice of SFT, to help practitioners decide whether SFT is right for them and their clients. These experts offer details of their apprehensions, goals, breakthroughs, and overall experiences with the therapy. The team of expert contributors includes Eve Lipchik, Yvonne Dolan, Alasdair Macdonald, Thorana Nelson, and many more. Questions the experts address include: How did you discover that SFT was the model that fit your clients' needs? What characteristics of this model drew you towards it? How has SFT impacted your personal life? What is it about SFT that makes it so effective? What are your favorite cases and how did they affect your work as a therapist?

With large caseloads, counsellors cannot afford to spend countless hours on traditional approaches to individual problems. Solution-Focused Brief Counseling (SFBC) offers counsellors an effective approach that leads to rapid, observable change in students. Brief Counseling That Works, Second Edition, combines step-by-step instructions with vivid case examples to provide a comprehensive and practical overview of the fundamental principles of SFBC. Author Gerald B. Sklare has extensively revised this second edition to include new adaptations of solution-focused methods, more opportunities to practice the SFBC model, and an expanded discussion of ways school administrators can use SFBC. This concise guidebook contains many valuable tools, including: reproducible materials for use with Solution-Focused Guided Imagery; short case studies and session transcripts to illustrate what SFBC looks like in practice; guidelines for using solution-focused methods with refereed discipline cases; practice exercises to help readers apply the techniques; and sample forms to use in SFBC. This essential resource for counsellors will also be helpful to teachers and school administrators who advise elementary and secondary students, as well as psychologists and social workers who work with youth both in and out of the school setting.

In straightforward, clear, and pragmatic language, McFarlandpresents a model that focuses on strengths rather than weaknesses,on solutions rather than problems, and on hope rather than despair.Her book should be on the shelf of every clinician who works withclients who have eating problems. --Scott D. Miller, Brief Therapy Network Drawing from her own clinical experience, Barbara McFarlanddemonstrates how solution-focused brief therapy is one of the moreefficient approaches in treating eating disorders. Her practical,hands on strategies and interventions guides you through each stepof the treatment process.

This book provides a solution-focused approach to working alongside students, parents, and teachers that decreases misbehaviors, encourages mental health and growth mindset in students, and provides social emotional learning opportunities. Grounded in the notion that focusing on problems often leads to frustration when tried and true remedies fail, the book provides an efficient and simple three-step approach to having solution-focused conversations with students, parents, and in response to intervention (RTI) and team meetings. This systemic approach enlists the client rather than the counselor to conjure a preferred plan for success, consequently reducing future counseling visits and promoting independent success in students. Each chapter includes a specific topic that was developed from the issues and situations faced by school counselors today, including consideration for working with all students, including LGBTQ students, and those with traumatic experiences or substance abuse. Complete with specific dialogues for students of all ages, and case studies, this text provides school counselors with a road map to looking beyond problems and seeking solutions with students, creating grit and resilience.

Many books on solution-focused brief therapy provide histories, overviews, and uses of the approach. Doing Something Different does not do any of those things. Instead, it provides those interested in the solution-focused approach with a plethora of ideas for practice, training, and simply enjoying the solution-focused approach and its practice in therapy, consulting, coaching, and training. It contains a varied and rich array of interventions, training ideas, uses with different populations andnbsp;approaches, and resources written by contributors who represent many countries and viewpoints, and who are well known in the training and practice of the solution-focused approach. Chapters are presented in simple language, as befits the solution-focused approach, and complement the many serious and whimsical sections of the book, which include practice and training ideas, favorite quotes and stories, "outrageous" moments in therapy, and a list of solution-focused songs. Anyone who enjoys the approach in any manner should find something that grabs the interest and tickles the senses and sensibilities. Readers will come away informed, thoughtful, and entertained.

When it was first published in 1995, Linda Metcalf's book Counseling Toward Solutions became an instant bestseller. The book offered a new and positive program for changing individual behavior that helped K-12 students with their own problems and gave them self-esteem in the process. Now, The Field Guide to Counseling Toward Solutions offers school counselors, teachers, and administrators a complete program for changing the way that schools deal with a variety of issues. From an alternative school program that enlists the power of teacher mentors to the elementary program that involves the teacher, parent, and student in the counseling process, this book shows how to make change happen and how to make it last.

`On a scale of 0-10 I would give the Handbook of Solution Focused Therapy a nine - it met my best hopes in terms of an insight into the theory and mechanics of SFT, and gave me ideas for extending my current use of the therapy. I found it engaging, readable and well-presented, with useful reference lists within each chapter to guide further reading′ - Solution News `This collection of fifteen chapters, each written by a different specialist in the SFT field, is a valuable contribution to the Solution-Focused therapist′s bookshelf. A must-read for any informed SF therapy practitioner - Mark McKergow, The Solutions Focus `This book has 14 chapters on diverse applications of Solution-Focus, between introductory and closing chapters by Bill O′Connell. The book relates to work being done in the UK and in Ireland, excepting Alasdair MacDonald′s piece on research in SFT, which is an up-to-date and welcome review of research findings world-wide. All the chapters are succinct and they convey a clear impression of the lightness and excitement of this approach, for service-users and therapists alike. The book is a good read for any therapist, professional helper or service manager′ - Robert Cumming , Nurturing Potential Solution-Focused therapy is an increasingly popular approach, used by practitioners in a wide range of contexts and settings. Illustrating the breadth and depth of contemporary practice, the Handbook of Solution-Focused Therapy brings together contributions from leading practitioners in fields such as social work, education and health care to show how solution-focused techniques can be effective in many different situations. Beginning with an introduction to the origins and theory of the approach, the book examines different areas of practice, explaining how and why the solution-focused approach is applicable and highlighting the issues specific to each context. Each chapter features a case-example, which demonstrates the practical advantages and difficulties, involved in using the solution-focused approach. The Handbook of Solution-Focused Therapy is an ideal text for training courses in solution-focused therapy and a source of new ideas for practitioners trained in other approaches who want to integrate solution-focused techniques with their existing practice. Bill O′Connell is a Senior Lecturer in Counselling at University of Birmingham and author of Solution-Focused Therapy (SAGE 1998) and Solution-Focused Stress Counselling (Continuum 2001). Professor Stephen Palmer is Director of the Centre for Stress Management and the Centre for Coaching, London. He has written and edited over 25 books.

Learning Solution-Focused Therapy: An Illustrated Guide bridges the gap between the traditional medical model of problem-focused assessment and treatment and the newer, increasingly popular strength-based treatment approach. The author's objective is to provide another therapeutic dimension, thus enhancing problem-focused treatment and supporting competency in this strength-based modality. Psychiatrists, pediatricians, family practitioners, nurses, and other mental health providers will appreciate the how-to focus of the text, its compelling, case-based approach to learning, and its informal, conversational writing style. The book's structure and features are designed to facilitate learning: * The book begins with an overview of the core tenets of solution-focused therapy, starting with solution-focused case review and examining both solution-focused core assumptions and core questions. This helps the reader understand the foundation of this modality and put it into context.* A primary objective is building the skills necessary to effective solution-based therapy, and the book includes instruction on conducting a solution-focused interview, establishing a framework of strengths and resources, developing a yes-set, negotiating goals, amplifying ambivalence, and dealing with crisis. * Solution-focused techniques are integrated within supervision and consultation, an approach that clinicians who work with students and residents, and supervisors who work within agencies will find immensely useful.* Solution-focused psychopharmacotherapy and addiction therapy merit complete chapters, providing information that clinicians will find invaluable when applying solution-focused techniques in these situations.* The case illustrations vividly render the dialogue of patient and therapist, and are accompanied by detailed explanations and commentary in italics to help the reader learn how to practice this model of treatment. * Companion videos (available online) present commonly used techniques that illustrate key features of solution-focused therapy in a compelling and enlightening way. Learning Solution-Focused Therapy: An Illustrated Guide provides learning exercises and case illustrations that will help the reader implement practical strategies immediately with patients, students, supervisees and trainees. Practical, engaging, and evidence-based, this book will enhance the clinician's ability to connect with and help the patient in a positive way.

The most current trends in solution-focused counseling theory, research, and practice are explored in the latest edition of this updated and expanded text. Dr. Guterman provides a comprehensive and straightforward discussion of solution-focused theory and the stages of the model throughout the therapeutic process. By emphasizing solutions rather than problems, this approach helps clients to identify and harness their natural resources, strengths, skills to promote positive change Clinical applications, techniques, and detailed case studies illustrate counseling with clients experiencing a range of problems, including depression, substance abuse, grief, morbid jealousy, and trichotillomania. New chapters and sections in this edition address anxiety, eating disorders, suicide, psychotic disorders, migraine headache, self-injurious behavior, and spiritual and religious issues. The final chapter titled ''The Future of Solution-Focused Counseling'' considers new directions for the model as well as developments in research, clinical settings, and technology.

Written by pioneering experts in the field, More Than Miracles remains the authoritative text on solution-focused brief therapy (SFBT). The final work of the world-renowned family therapists and original developers of SFBT, the late Steve de Shazer and Insoo Kim Berg, this comprehensive resource informs practitioners and students in how to apply this practical, internationally acclaimed approach. With a new preface, this classic edition outlines the latest developments in the fields of family therapy, brief therapy, and psychotherapy training and practice. A succinct overview orients the reader to the current landscape of SFBT and provides three real-life case transcripts that illustrate the practical applications of SFBT techniques. The seminar format of the text allows readers to: sit in on surprising psychotherapy sessions eavesdrop on the authors' commentary about the sessions gain a comprehensive overview on the current state of SFBT review and understand the major tenets of SFBT learn specific interventions, including the miracle question and the reasons for asking it understand treatment applicability read actual session transcripts understand the "miracle scale" get insight into the unique relationship between Wittgenstein's philosophy and SFBT better understand SFBT and emotions examine misconceptions about SFBT and more Suitable for both advanced practitioners and ambitious beginners, this book is the ideal resource for anyone seeking an in-depth understanding of the SFBT approach, the concepts that inform it, and the specific techniques that characterize its implementation.

The Next Generation of Solution Focused Practice shows how practitioners help create change by 'stretching the world' of their clients. The book brings new ideas from enactive cognition which show how skilled attention on the client and their words is important both practically and conceptually. It provides both a summary of the development of Solution Focused Brief Therapy (SFBT) over time and how the latest developments form a newly coherent form of practice based on developing descriptions. The author has structured the book using simple and easy to understand metaphors to paint a rich, creative, and visual picture of therapy for the reader, which makes it an accessible read. This book will be of interest to a wide range of SF practitioners internationally, as well as to those involved in coaching, counselling, family therapy, education, social work, healthcare and organisational change.

"A valuable addition to the growing conversation about solution-focused practice in schools. Cooley provides the nuts and bolts of solution-focused group work with students of all ages."-John J. Murphy, Professor of PsychologyUniversity of Central Arkansas"The book is a pleasure to read, extremely informative, and helpful. The organization and content teaches a skill in a way that makes the reader feel empowered."-Cynthia Knowles, Substance Abuse Prevention Specialist and ConsultantA fresh, dynamic approach to build on students' strengths and encourage positive mental health.Solution-focused brief counseling helps students improve their well-being by concentrating on goals and solutions rather than dwelling on problems. This resource shows how to use this highly effective approach for group counseling sessions so that students can dialogue and learn alongside their peers.Research-based and practical, this unique guide gives school professionals the foundational theory and knowledge to adapt solution-focused group counseling techniques for any topic, curriculum, or grade level. Readers will find:Case studies of real students encountering real problems Forms, permissions slips, and sample letters for starting a group"Do This" and "Avoid This" sectionsSample agendas for elementary, middle, and high school levels, complete with activities, session scripts, and discussion questionsHelp students address common issues by creating lively, engaging group meetings using this powerful, goal-oriented methodology.

First published in 1996. Routledge is an imprint of Taylor & Francis, an informa company.

This approach enables clients to find relief from symptoms stemming from or related to the sexual abuse, to alter feelings associated with memories of trauma so that flashbacks become less intrusive, and to develop a positive, practical, and healthy future orientation. In short, clients experience healing and begin to live satisfying lives. Yvonne Dolan works from the assumption that, despite the traumas they have endured, clients have the inner resources to create uniquely effective solutions to their problems. Both solution-oriented and hypnotic techniques are used to tap those resources in the context of a safe, respectful relationship. Clients are encouraged to trust themselves, to move at their own right pace, and to recognize and build on tiny signs of healing. Ericksonian techniques are particularly powerful in enabling clients to resolve dissociated traumatic experiences, experience corrective development learnings, and turn the symptom of dissociation into a resource for healing. Solution-focused therapy ensures that clients not only resolve past sexual abuse but also form a clear map of functional behaviors and perceptions to replace trauma-based ones. Specific strategies are offered for treatment of post-traumatic amnesia, self-mutilation, sexual dysfunctions, memory problems, and a multitude of other symptoms. While the treatment is primarily individual, supportive family members and friends are invited to sessions, where they learn to assist survivors in ways that are comforting and healing. Rather than obsessively going over the traumatic events of the past, both clients and supportive family members are guided to notice signs of improvement, to identify actions and words that are helpful, and to do more of what works. In addition, the therapist and client plan strategies for dealing with nonsupportive family members and with perpetrators. In effect, Resolving Sexual Abuse shows therapists and clients how to imagine a healthy, satisfying future-and then move toward it with confidence and success.

In recent years Solution Focused Brief Therapy (SFBT) has emerged as the therapy of choice for many health and social care professionals. Its simplicity and brevity means it is effective, economical and adaptable across many settings, and it also has a strong evidence base. As part of the bestselling SAGE Skills in Counseling & Psychotherapy series, this book is one of the first to focus specifically on SFBT skills and practice. Aimed at those new to the approach and as a refresher to those that have started using SFBT, it covers the key techniques and interventions. Structured step-by-step along the lines of an actual therapy session, the book can be dipped into or read cover-to-cover. It covers:- Assumptions, expectations and ways of working- The role of the Solution Focused Brief Therapist - The Miracle Question, scaling, tasks- Ending sessions and closures.Supported by case studies, therapeutic dialogue, hints and tips, exercises and points for reflection, the book is an ideal companion for any counseling, health or social care trainee who plans to practice Solution Focused Brief Therapy in today's time-constrained settings. It will also be a valuable guide for those qualified in the caring professions and who wish to refresh the way that they work.

Therapy is frequently miscast as requiring an enormous amount of time and financial commitment, but helpful, goal-oriented therapy can produce positive results after only a few sessions. Solution-focused brief therapy (SFBT) has been gaining momentum as a powerful therapeutic approach since its inception in the 1980s. By focusing on solutions instead of problems, it asks clients to set concrete goals and to draw upon strengths in their lives that can help bring about the desired change for a preferred future. Addressing both researchers and practitioners, a distinguished cast of international, interdisciplinary contributors review the current state of research on SFBT interventions and illustrate its applications--both proven and promising--with a diverse variety of populations, including domestic violence offenders, troubled and runaway youth, students, adults with substance abuse problems, and clients with schizophrenia. This expansive text also includes a treatment manual, strengths-based and fidelity measures, and detailed descriptions on how to best apply SFBT to underscore the strengths, skills, and resources that clients may unknowingly possess. With its rich assortment of resources, this handbook is the definitive guide to SFBT for scholars and mental health practitioners alike.

Solution-Focused Brief Therapy with Families describes SFBT from a systemic perspective and provides students, educators, trainers, and practitioners with a clear explanation and rich examples of SFBT and systemic family therapy. Family therapists will learn how SFBT works with families, solution-focused therapists will learn how a systemic understanding of clients and their contexts can enhance their work, and all will learn how to harness the power of each to the service of their clients.　 The book starts with an exploration of systems, cybernetics, and communication theory basics such as wholeness, recursion, homeostasis, and change. Following this is an introduction to five fundamental family therapy approaches and an overview of Solution-Focused Brief Therapy. Next, the author considers SFBT within a systems paradigm and provides a demonstration of SFBT with families and couples. Each step is explicated with ideas from both SFBTA as well as systems. The final chapter shows how SFBT practices can be applied to a variety of family therapy approaches. This accessible text is enhanced by descriptions, case examples, dialogue, and commentary that are both systemic and solution-focused. Readers will come away with a new appreciation for both the systemic worldview of SFBT and SFBT principles as applied to systemic work.

Solution-Focused Cognitive and Systemic Therapy: The Bruges Model is the first book in English to lay out the Bruges Model, a meta-model that incorporates solution-focused therapy in an analysis of the therapeutic alliance and common factors that account for the majority of the efficacy of any therapeutic endeavor. This book is divided into three parts, covering each of the common factors: client factors, therapist and relationship factors, and placebo factors. Each part summarizes the state of our theoretical knowledge, then dives into specific clinical and educational applications in specific populations and contexts.

The third edition of this widely adopted text covers the philosophical foundations and nuts-and-bolts of using solution-focused counseling to help preschool-12 students resolve problems. Dr. Murphy's practical and respectful approach has been successfully applied throughout the world by school counselors, counselors-in-training, psychologists, social workers, teachers, administrators, and clinicians who work with young clients. His empowering techniques help students focus on doing what works as simply and efficiently as possible by using their strengths, resources, wisdom, and feedback. This edition includes new chapters and information on the restrictive influence of problems, strategies for building positive relationship, collecting client feedback to monitor and improve services, and coconstructing solvable problems and reachable goals. Real-life case examples, sample dialog from counseling sessions, discussion and practice exercises, troubleshooting tips, and new and expanded appendixes enhance the book's classroom and clinical utility. Book jacket.

Solution-Focused Groupwork, Second Edition is an innovative and highly practical guide for all professionals who use groups to help people. For those new to the approach it provides a clear, step-by-step introduction, while for more experienced practitioners it presents ideas and techniques which can be readily integrated into existing practice. In this fully updated revision, including a brand new chapter on Supervision, John Sharry examines the therapeutic factors that characterize solution- focused groupwork and contribute to its effectiveness. Using carefully selected case studies and examples, he takes the reader through the various stages in the therapeutic process, from getting started to the final session.

"Walsh's book is not only thorough, thoughtful, and clearly written, it is also timely because as SF practice applications with their parallel knowledge bases continue to multiply, the questions Walsh addresses so competently are cutting edge for adopting a SF approach to practice in human services." Peter De Jong, Solution-focused Therapist, Trainer, and Consultant and Emeritus Professor of Social Work, Calvin College, USA Based in part on original research with over 50 practitioners, this absorbing book provides a practice model for solution-focused helping, developed from real-life experiences across a number of settings. The book begins by reviewing the original De Shazer and Berg practice model, establishing a case for change and then introduces a new concept for the solution-focused helper. Case examples are used to demonstrate the application of this new model in five different practice settings: Healthcare Learning disability Services for older people and end-of-life care Community development Services for globalised diverse communities Reflective exercises and research reviews are included for each setting as well as sections on policy contexts and ethical dimensions. The Solution-Focused Helper will support students and practitioners who are already familiar with the basic concepts and principles of solution-focused work and who wish to develop their practice and deepen their knowledge.

Solution-Focused Play Therapy is an essential text that blends the process of play therapy with solution-focused therapy. With a focus on child strengths and resources, this book identifies key concepts and principles in solution-focused play therapy (SFPT). The author provides neurobiological and developmental support for SFPT and guidance on how practitioners can transition from using a non-directive approach to a more directive and activity-based approach based on the developmental needs of the child. Chapters describe the 12 basic skills needed for employing this approach with children of all ages and their families. Harnessing a strengths-oriented approach, the author presents expressive ways to use key SFPT techniques, including the miracle question, scaling, finding exceptions, and end-of-session feedback. Clinicians will come away from the book with a suite of interventions, strategies, handouts, and forms that can be employed with children of all ages and their families, from strength-based assessment and treatment planning to the final celebration session.

This text highlights the indispensable role of school counselors today, namely as change agents in an increasingly complex and fluctuating school system. Informed by emerging standards of practice and current research, the book adopts the salutary perspective of solution-focused brief therapy as its foundation. It outlines practical and time-sensitive strategies for school counselors to use with students, parents, teachers, and administrators. The Solution-Focused School Counselor encourages readers to envision and proactively construct interactions with students, families, and staff that contribute not only to the formation of an exceptional school, but to the shaping of an effective professional practice. Blending current theory into practice, the authors have consulted research across a variety of disciplines and have related it in an understandable format. School counselors will find this book useful either as a professional resource to be read from cover-to-cover, or as a reference tool from which specific sections may be consulted. This book is an excellent resource for school counselors and students alike. It is also useful for school psychologists and administrators as well as anyone interested in making a difference in the school setting.

​​New data have come to light through the Solution Focused Brief Therapy Association Archive (hereafter, the Archive).  This information is drawn from manuscripts and video featuring one of the SF founders, Insoo Kim Berg, MSW.  Archive video examples of Ms. Berg conductingsupervision, therapy teams, and case consultation as well as unpublishedmanuscripts written by her provide unique opportunities to illustrate specific assumptions and techniques rarely seen before. The documents outline Ms. Berg's philosophy, assumptions, and techniquesto conduct supervision, and the videos offer in vivo examples of her supervision and team/case consultation style.  Together, the Archive materials offer a rich resource for a book that both informs and illustrates SFS​.

How do you conduct a small-scale research project? And how do you make it excellent?Struggling with the intricacies of Solution-Focused theory, skills or practice? Wanting to learn more about providing brief, practically-based solution-focused interventions across many therapeutic settings? As part of the popular Brief Therapies Series, this long awaited Third Edition will tell you all you need to know about Solution-Focused Therapy (SFT) and more! This popular introduction takes you step-by-step through the counseling process, providing insight into how to structure and manage your therapeutic work in ways that are grounded in Solution-Focused principles. This book includes: A detailed introduction to the theory and practice of 'brief' therapyA discussion of the foundations of SFTExercises to use with clients and/or trainees Brand new case examples relating theory directly to practiceAn insightful reflection on the journey of the practitioner From leading Solution-Focused expert Bill O'Connell, this book will not only provide practical guidelines and theoretical background for the beginner but support and inspiration for the more experienced.

This second edition of Solution-focused Therapy remains the most accessible yet comprehensive case-based introduction to the history, theory, research and practice of solution-focused therapy (SFT) within mental health care and beyond. Drawing on contemporary research and the author's own extensive experience, the fully revised and updated new edition includes: discussion of recent developments relevant to research and traininga new chapter on challenges to SFT and the integration of SFT with other therapeutic approachesextended discussion on ethical issues topical exploration of the application of SFT with patients with personality disorders and dementias contemporary research on solution-focused coaching and approaches to organizational change new case materialThis highly practical guide should be on the desk of every student or trainee studying this strongly supported, growing approach. It is also a useful resource for practitioners wanting to update their core skills and knowledge.  

This practice-oriented book demonstrates an innovative, effective, brief therapy approach for time-sensitive assessment and intervention with children and families. With trademark creativity, flexibility, and humor, Matthew Selekman combines the best elements of a range of current approaches with family play and art therapy techniques, to create a comprehensive solution-focused model. Illustrated by numerous case examples and session transcripts, and supported by empirical research, Solution-Focused Therapy with Children helps frontline clinicians--regardless of level of experience--master the skills they need to bring about rapid, lasting change.

Solution-Focused Therapy with Children and Adolescents offers mental health professionals an integration of creative and playful approaches and solution-focused therapy. The author presents developmentally appropriate and expressive alternatives to oral communication including sandtray, writing, puppetry, drawing and coloring, photography, and music. The text presents an overview of strength-based and creative approaches with a focused examination of the philosophy and process of solution-focused therapy, then divides chapters into specific stages of therapy--beginnings, searching for treasure, setting goals, and ending the session--with creative techniques offered in each section. The final chapter addresses working with children and adolescents in solution-focused groups, including how to set up groups and progress through different group stages, presenting specific techniques and activities focused on each stage of the group process.

Every fifteen seconds someone commits a crime of domestic violence in the United States, and most violators will be court-mandated to receive group treatment. Outcome studies of traditional treatment programs (those with confrontational or educational approaches) indicate high rates ofdropping out and low effectiveness, lending urgency to the need to find an alternative method. This book describes a cutting-edge treatment approach that creates effective, positive changes in domestic violence offenders.Solution-focused therapy focuses on holding offenders accountable and responsible for building solutions, rather than emphasizing their problems and deficits. By focusing on "solution-talk" instead of "problem-talk," clients are assisted in developing useful goals and solution behaviors that arethen amplified, supported, and reinforced through a solution-building process. The book will be of great interest to professionals and graduate students in social work, psychology, and counseling.

The Solution Focused Approach with Children and Young People: Current Thinking and Practice brings together leading figures and innovative practitioners from different professions, contexts and countries to provide a unique overview of Solution Focused work with children and young people. Presenting a range of applications in individual, group and community work, it puts the spotlight on diverse fields, exploring how the Solution Focused approach can work in real-world contexts. This book showcases a powerful, engaging approach which helps children and young people find the resources and strengths to manage difficulties and make the most of their lives. It contains interesting case studies, narrative descriptions of original practice, programmes of work developed using Solution Focused principles, and thought-provoking discussions of key elements of practice. With chapters presenting perspectives from coaching, therapy, consultancy and education, and applications including learning assessments, child protection, bereavement, edge of care, and youth offending, the book provides an overview of the current state of practice and provides pointers to potential new developments. The Solution Focused Approach with Children and Young People will help both experienced practitioners and those new to the approach, to develop and update their knowledge and skills, as well as introducing them to creative and cutting-edge tools to inspire fresh ideas and thinking. It will be essential reading for Solution Focused practitioners and students, as well as coaches, social workers, school counsellors, and mental health professionals working with children and young people.

Solution Focused Brief Therapy in Alternative Schools (SFBT) provides a step-by-step guide for how school social workers and counselors can work with other school professionals to create an effective solution focused dropout prevention program. Along with illustrative cases and detailed explanations, the authors detail the curriculum and day-to-day operations of a solution focused dropout prevention program by drawing on the experiences of a school that uses this approach.

Solution Focused Practice Around the Worldprovides an exploration of the diverse uses of SF and offers fascinating insights into how the Solution Focused approach is currently used in many applications around the globe. Bringing together prominent authors, practitioners and trainers, the collection is divided into five sections: theory; therapeutic applications; working with children and adolescents; coaching and working with organisations. Originating from the first international conference on Solution Focused practice spanning all applications of the approach, the chapters provide a grounding in the theory and practice, and an exploration of the breadth and depth of Solution Focused therapy. All practitioners of the Solution Focused approach globally as well as those working in the wider fields of therapy, social work, education, coaching and human resources will benefit from this text and the applicability of the inherent theories to their area of expertise.

This book is a collection of solution focused practice across Asia, offering case examples from the fields of therapy, supervision, education, coaching and organisation consulting. It demonstrates the usefulness of the solution focused approach in the Asian context by providing practice based evidence, and highlights the diversity of application. By sharing real case examples in action across Asia, it is the aim of this book to stimulate the curious and inspire the converted. It gives readers a taste of what it is like to use this approach within an Asian context, in different areas of practice and within a broad spectrum of clinical issues. The examples offer exciting and creative ways in which solution focused practice can be used within the Asian context - with the hope that more practitioners will be curious enough to give solution focused practice serious consideration as a viable, evidence-based practice.

Although I have been a hospice nurse for almost 19 years, I am not a counselor. However, I will be able to use some of the information I learned here to assist my patients and my colleagues with issues encountered during the difficult time when patients are dying and families are struggling with realities. I will definitely share this book with our bereavement counselors and social workers." Score: 90, 4 stars --Doody's T]his is a√ book about possibilities-not finalities...about all the different ways that people deal with loss and bereavement√ and how solution focused brief therapy can be helpful in making sense of the experience that people go through when facing death. --Harry Korman, MD Solution focused practice challenges the conventional approach to bereavement counseling by emphasizing solution building over simple problem-solving. Joel Simon, with over 16 years of experience in the field, demonstrates how this therapy can help clients think of possibilities, rather than limitations, when facing death or the loss of a loved one. This book presents a general overview of solution focused practice, tools, and methodologies for practitioners. Simon also provides real-life vignettes and verbatim transcripts from actual patients in end-of-life or bereavement counseling. This book provides insight into the philosophy and practice of solution focused therapy, as applied to clients with life-limiting conditions and their loved ones. Key topics discussed: The use of language in solution focused practice: theory, meaning making, and the role of emotions Tools of solution-building, with questions, troubleshooting guidelines, and tips for evaluating outcomes The distinction between problem-solving and solution-building Co-constructing goals with clients Applying solution focused principles to hospice, grief, and bereavement practice This resource serves as an invaluable tool for social workers, hospice workers, psychologists, and other bereavement and grief-counseling professionals."

First published in 1999. Routledge is an imprint of Taylor & Francis, an informa company.

At a time when the accepted standard treatment for alcoholism is long-term and expensive, solution-focused therapy, as developed at the Brief Family Therapy Center in Milwaukee, offers a brief and cost-effective alternative. Insoo Kim Berg and Scott D. Miller believe that a focus on solutions, rather than pathology, is the most constructive strategy for working with problem drinkers; their foremost concern is with what works. To this end they don't reject traditional treatment programs; rather, they view them as one part of a flexible and multidimensional approach to alcohol abuse treatment. The authors successfully utilize solution-focused therapy in their work with problem drinkers, but it is their philosophy of working with clients--and within clients' belief systems--to encourage change that is at the heart of their model. The model, grounded in the philosophy of solution-focused brief therapy, introduces a paradigmatic change in the approach to substance abuse treatment. Rather than treating a problem drinker, Berg and Miller work with clients to treat problem drinking. The authors' refreshing blend of respect for their clients and optimism about their ability to stop abusive drinking offers hope to clients who can't fit into traditional long-term programs or who have given up on themselves. This book shows how clients can be helped to construct a future where drinking or substance abuse is no longer a problem. Solution-focused therapy, based on respect for and collaboration with the client, concentrates on success and solutions. Therapists develop goals with the client, rather than imposing "appropriate" treatment objectives. If one solution doesn't work, the technique--not the client--is blamed and client and therapist go on to "do something different." The authors' model is much more than a list of interventions; it is a multi-faceted approach to treatment, which can adapt to anything that works, whether brief therapy, AA, or more formal inpatient programs.

Couples counseling is distinct from individual and family therapy and, while ideas from these other formats may be overlapping, applying theoretical concepts to couples has distinctive challenges. Behavioral, Humanistic-Existential, and Psychodynamic Approaches to Couples Counseling is unique in that it addresses how to conceptualize various theories around a single case. By discussing only one case, the reader is more readily able to compare and contrast the theoretical ideas of each theory, as well as the pragmatics of techniques. Five theories are discussed around four consistent parts: history, theory of problem formation, theory of problem resolution, and case transcript.

Contemporary Theories in Counseling and Psychotherapy provides readers with a comprehensive introduction to cutting-edge therapeutic approaches that are widely revered and used, but generally not included within traditional counseling theories textbooks. Readers learn theories that will not only keep their knowledge current in an evolving field, but also will help to improve and support the ongoing development of their personal practice. The text features contributed chapters written by scholars in the discipline that cover the following contemporary theories: contemporary psychodynamic therapy (CPT); contemporary person-centered counseling (CPCC); cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT); integrative post-modern therapy (IPMT: narrative, solution-focused, relational-cultural); dialectical behavior therapy (DBT); acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT); motivational interviewing (MI); positive counseling; neurocounseling (including EMDR); and complementary, alternative, and integrative modalities (CAM). Each chapter presents the history of the theory, critical views of human nature, key concepts, techniques, and an overview of the counseling process. Social and cultural issues and the efficacy of each theory are discussed. Each chapter concludes with a vignette that demonstrates a client experiencing the counseling approach, followed by questions to pique students' interest. Video demonstrations of select theories are included. A thoroughly modern and critical resource, Contemporary Theories in Counseling and Psychotherapy is ideal for courses focusing on current theories of counseling and psychotherapy. It's also an excellent supplementary resource for courses on classical theory.

Major theories of counseling are presented in historical context reflecting the developments in psychodynamic theory, existential and humanist ideas and the evolution of cognitive/behavioral ideas. KEY TOPICS: Following the coverage of theory, the authors apply the theories to practice, providing an integrated examination of the process. MARKET: Any course focusing on theory and/or the process and procedures of counseling.

In an age when actual psychotherapeutic practice is predominantly eclectic, most psychotherapy textbooks are outdated and impractically bound in theoretical pigeon holes. Counseling and Psychotherapy Essentials incorporates into a single source the latest advances in the field and focuses on psychotherapy's core processes--rather than ideologies--to provide a comprehensive and imminently pragmatic textbook for learning integrative counseling and psychotherapy. The central lessons of this book are framed on one side by a theoretical overview in which essential therapeutic concepts and techniques are synthesized, and on the other side by a detailed review of frequently encountered concerns such as depression, anxiety, substance abuse, couple/marital issues, and psychopharmacology. From the general to the specific, Good and Beitman keep their discussion grounded in the core processes of psychotherapy--engagement, pattern search, change, and termination--that facilitate therapeutic change. In Counseling and Psychotherapy Essentials, students have a textbook that seamlessly connects their classroom experience with their actual work with clients, preparing them to be effective clinicians.

GET TO KNOW THE ORIGINS, DEVELOPMENT, AND KEY FIGURES OF EACH MAJOR COUNSELING THEORY This comprehensive text covers all the major theories in counseling and psychotherapy along with an emphasis on how to use these theoretical models in clinical practice. The authors cover the history, key figures, research base, multicultural implications, and practical applications of the following theoretical perspectives: Psychoanalytic, Individual/Adlerian, Existential, Gestalt, Person- Centered, Behavioral, Cognitive-Behavioral, Choice Theory/Reality Therapy, Feminist, Constructive, Family Systems, Multicultural, and Eclectic/Integrative. This text has case examples that bring each theory to life. The entire book has been updated with the latest research and techniques. Pedagogical features include learner objectives, "Putting It in Practice" boxes, questions for reflection, case examples and treatment planning, and chapter summaries. Every theory is examined from cultural, gender/sexual, and spiritual perspectives. The instructor supplement package includes a Respondus test bank, chapter outlines, supplemental lecture ideas, classroom activities, and PowerPoint slides. It also includes video demonstrations corresponding to every major theory and linked to each chapter's contents. In addition, a WPLS course will be available after publication. Expanded video elements closely tied to sections of the text New visuals, including graphics, charts, and tables to facilitate student understanding of theories and how they relate to one another Increased coverage of multicultural and ethical issues in every chapter Cultural, gender, sexuality, and spiritual issues are integrated into every chapter The Sommers-Flanagan's hands-on, practical approach emphasizes how students and practitioners can apply these theories in real-world practice. Students are empowered to develop theoretically-sound and evidence-based approaches to conducting counseling and psychotherapy.

COUNSELING THEORY AND PRACTICE provides a unique, in-depth presentation of all the major theories of counseling and psychotherapy. Author Edward S. Neukrug discusses twelve theories that cover four broad conceptual approaches: psychodynamic, existential-humanistic, cognitive behavioral, and post-modern. The text effectively demonstrates how counseling theories are applied in real counseling settings.

Contemporary society is in constant change. Transitions and crises occur in every life, regardless of status, ethnicity, sex, race, education, or religion. Yet, the traditional societal forms for helping with these transitions and crises are changing as well. The typical nuclear family has given way to single-parent, blended, or dual-career structures. Religious, health, educational, social service, philanthropic, and other organizational support systems have also changed from their pre-1950 counterparts. As these sometimes evolutionary, sometimes revolutionary, changes have occurred, considerable scholarship and empirical research has attempted to identify and develop methods of helping people encounter these transitions and crises. These efforts have come from various fields: psychology, sociology, anthropology, linguistics, law, social work, nurs­ ing, medicine, education, labor relations, and others. Each has brought its own theories, research methods, and practical experiences to bear on the problems. One of the methods that these fields have universally been intrigued with is the use of empathy. Empathy, that crucial but elusive pheno­ menon (so the literature has reported), has been identified as important in human interactions. Labor mediators, legal arbitrators, psychiatric psychoanalysts, encounter group facilitators, classroom instructors, and kindred helpers have been told that "understanding how the other person or group is thinking and feeling" will help that person or group. The anxious parent and troubled spouse have been urged to "understand the other's point of view." Some writers have even argued that empathy is crucial to resolving international tensions and terrorist group violent actions.

The Outcomes of Counseling and Psychotherapy was first published in 1965. Minnesota Archive Editions uses digital technology to make long-unavailable books once again accessible, and are published unaltered from the original University of Minnesota Press editions. How is the future behavior of a client or patient affected by counseling, casework, or psychotherapy? What fundamental personality changes, if any, can be attributed to such treatment? What does the counselor do that determines the outcome of his efforts? This volume deals with questions like these, questions which concern not only psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, and other counselors, but also the communities, institutions, and agencies which support their work. The report presented here is based on the findings of a ten-year project conducted at the University of Minnesota Student Counseling Bureau to assess the results of its counseling program. Since the early days of counseling at Minnesota, many studies, in a research program extending over a period of thirty years, have attempted to determine the effectiveness of counseling. In continuing these studies, the present authors have applied current statistical methods to contemporary counseling theory and practices. This account of the search for specific variables that define the goals of counseling, and for instruments to measure those variables objectively, is an important contribution to future research in the field. Ralph F. Berdie, director of the University of Minnesota Student Counseling Bureau, writes a foreword.

Theories of Counseling and Psychotherapy fully integrates a multicultural approach, which is demonstrated in practice throughout every chapter and every theoretical approach. New to the Seventh Edition: Increased focus on visual elements such as photos, charts, and summary tables. More focus on case illustrations. Increased coverage of ethical and legal issues, technology and on the counseling relationship. Added coverage of narrative counseling and brief, solution-focused counseling.

Note: This is the bound book only and does not include access to the Enhanced Pearson eText. To order the Enhanced Pearson eText packaged with the bound book, use ISBN 0133388735. To order this title packaged with MyCounselingLab without Pearson eText, use ISBN 0134391055 . Theories of Counseling and Psychotherapy: Systems, Strategies, and Skills offers an innovative look at emerging and well-established counseling theories. Organizing theories into four broad themes (Background, Emotions, Thoughts, and Actions), authors underscore key similarities and differences in each approach. Moving beyond a traditional theories book, chapters include skill development sections that connect counseling theories with clinical practice. Fully revised, this edition brings a stronger multicultural focus, includes over 400 new research references, and offers new activities to sharpen clinical understanding. The Enhanced Pearson eText features embedded video. Improve mastery and retention with the Enhanced Pearson eText* The Enhanced Pearson eText provides a rich, interactive learning environment designed to improve student mastery of content. The Enhanced Pearson eText is: Engaging. The new interactive, multimedia learning features were developed by the authors and other subject-matter experts to deepen and enrich the learning experience. Convenient. Enjoy instant online access from your computer or download the Pearson eText App to read on or offline on your iPad® and Android® tablet.* Affordable. The Enhanced Pearson eText may be purchased stand-alone or with a loose-leaf version of the text for 40-65% less than a print bound book. *The Enhanced eText features are only available in the Pearson eText format. They are not available in third-party eTexts or downloads. *The Pearson eText App is available on Google Play and in the App Store. It requires Android OS 3.1-4, a 7" or 10" tablet, or iPad iOS 5.0 or later.

Incorporating the thinking, feeling, and behaving dimensions of human experience, the tenth edition of Corey's best-selling text helps you compare and contrast the therapeutic models expressed in counseling theories. Corey introduces you to the major theories (psychoanalytic, Adlerian, existential, person-centered, Gestalt, reality, behavior, cognitive-behavior, family systems, feminist, postmodern, and integrative approaches) and demonstrates how each theory can be applied to two cases ("Stan" and "Gwen"). He shows you how to apply theories in practice, and helps you learn to integrate the theories into an individualized counseling style. New learning objectives identify key aspects of each theory and focus your study.